#vd:translation

[momorabu]

Viidog Code Event Story - ホーリーナリト . ギフト /Holy Night . Gift

Finally, yet another super overdue translation of Viidog Code~ This was supposed to be translated how many months ago? But somehow it got dragged until now to be completed ><” (I actually finished most of it last week but left just a tiny part to be done today ^^;) At this rate, I might as well finished it by Christmas but that’s another two months~

As always, the summary of the story can be found below. Translation may not be 100% accurate due to my poor Japanese skills~

Chapter 1: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

The story started with “me” and Kaname getting ready to go on a shopping trip together, to which Kaname commented that he was honoured to have the chance to head out with “me”. He assured “me” that if there are any suspicious people who had appeared before us, he would definitely protect “me” from them. 

When we’re out on the shopping streets, Kaname noticed that “I” was surprised by the Christmas decorations on the streets and realised that this was “my” first time celebrating Christmas here in this city. He was curious to know whether “I” had believed in Santa Claus and mentioned that he had already known that it was his parents who had left Christmas presents by his bedside ever since he was young. He started talking about a special job - Santa Candidate, which even though Kaname doesn’t know much about it, he knew that in order to become a Santa Claus, one would need to take on tests and obtain a license just like how one becomes a detective. The tests were known to be very difficult, and even being selected to become a Santa Candidate was already very honorable for those applicants. Also, the tests would be held in this city and thus at this time of the year, there would be lots of Santa Claus on the streets.

Suddenly, a woman appeared before us, asking us where was the police station. Kaname answered the woman that the nearest police station was 10 minutes away from them and asked her whether she had encountered any trouble, since we’re detectives and could lend her a hand if there’s a dangerous situation.

The woman led us to the park, explaining that there’s a man nearby who seems to be scaring kids over there. The man indeed looked quite scary, which the woman described him to be like an “oni” (Japanese Demon). (It sounds kind of mean to describe someone’s face like that, I feel bad for the man already ><”)

Kaname decided to approach the man, which the man had noticed and thought Kaname was here to question him about his job. He was wearing a Santa Claus outfit and we get to know that his name was Sanda Kuro, a Santa Candidate as shown from the name card he had given to us. Sanda said that he was being taught to be bright and cheerful and to also dote on the kids as a Santa Candidate, but the kids had run away from him when he tried to talk to them and guessed that it’s because of his face that they’re scared of him. (That’s sad D:)

Kaname assured Sanda that he had knew that he meant no harm to others when he first met him, and encouraged him to be more confident in himself since he had managed to get through the trials so far to become a Santa Candidate. But, Sanda revealed that he had already failed the tests to become an actual Santa Claus for four years in a row, and if he failed again this year, he would be stripped of his right to take the tests from then on. Even though it was hard for Sanda, he didn’t want to give up, as much as he had no idea how he could pass these tests to become an actual Santa Claus. 

Kaname introduced himself while handling over his name card, and informed Sanda that he would help him together with “me”, hoping Sanda would continue to work hard to achieve his dream. He invited Sanda to head back to the detective agency with us to talk more about the Santa Claus examinations, since we do not know much about how these would be carried out.

Chapter 2: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

We head back to the agency together and informed the rest of Class 3 about this situation. Rudo was alright with us taking on this request, and commented on the Santa Claus were actually part of the Charity group, where these Santa Claus with the official licenses were allowed to give out gifts to children during Christmas, especially those who were unable to celebrate Christmas with their family. These Santa Claus would be considered the “real” Santa Claus and thus lots of people had wanted to be one. Due to overwhelming applicants, the tests were very difficult so as to limit the number of people who had passed the tests every year. In order to be eligible for the tests in the first place, one would need to do lots of research and understand the entire layout of the city and its history. There would also be tests that test on one’s physical ability and strength.

With the paperwork completed and Kaname officially taking on this request, he assured Sando that we’ll be aiding him on his tests as backup and starting tomorrow, we’ll be helping Sando with his physical training as well as increasing his knowledge for the tests. Other than “me” who would be accompanying Kaname, he would also look for other members of the agency who could give us a hand in training. 

Just then, Chiharu passed by, and upon hearing this interesting request, he decided to join in and give us a hand too. He didn’t seem to realise that Sando was wearing a Santa Claus outfit, and remarked that he looks like a red and white demon, and that made Kaname wondered perhaps Chiharu did not know about Santa Claus at all. 

Izana and Ran soon joined and wanted to help us too, though Izana’s interest lies more in finding out why the charity group could afford to spend so much money in buying presents each year, aiming to know how did they accumulate so much money. That made Ran mad as he felt that Izana had made the charity group sounds like an evil corporation instead. However, he was also interested in this charity group, as it was very mysterious and one could not obtain information about it easily due to how secured they were in leaking any information about it.

Knowing that we planned to help Sanda with his physical training tomorrow, Ran suggested on getting Rudo to help since Rudo was the one who planned Class 3′s training menu and could create one suitable for Sanda. Kaname decided to approach Rudo about this matter and would contact the others again if he requires their help later on.

Chapter 3: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

When Kaname enquired Rudo about the training menu, he suggested that he could have Sando go a run in the park, and later on do some weight training by using the iron bars over there as well. "I” was supposed to help by enquiring the others to help plan the other curriculum for Sando, but “I” still came over to Kaname in the morning and greet him, and had also prepared bento, drinks and even a first-aid box for them to be used in the training later on. 

Rudo and Kaname head to the park after that, and realised that Sando had already started on his training. They watched him jog around the park, and realised that he seems to be quite slow in jogging. Sando apologised when they commented on that, and revealed that it had been like this ever since from the past, that he soon ran out of energy when running. Since running speed was very important in the test, Kaname thought that it’s best they come up with a solution to improve Sando’s running speed. 

Sando remembered that in his earlier tests a few years ago, he had to escape from a reindeer that had gone out of control within the limited time and to find a bomb that was hidden within the presents within the allocated time as well. There was also a quest that required him to find the highest building in the streets and to put a present at its roof. 

Since there isn’t much days before the actual tests, Rudo felt that there would be a limit on how much Sando can improve on his physical training within these few days, so he decided to teach him some tips on how to improve his running speed. The tips worked well, as Sando’s running time had gradually improved over time, which made Kaname smiled as this meant that Sando’s success rate in passing the tests had increased. They decided to get Sando to different kind of training to build up the confidence in him, and even the bento “I” had prepared for Sando was also very nutritious and suitable him when he was training~ ^^

The next day, Sando visited Kaname at the detective agency, and informed him about the test’s information that had been revealed earlier on. Turned out that Sando would need to protect the presents from the bandits, which would be acted by the invigilators. Sando was worried since he’s not good at physical combat, and felt that he won’t be able to pass the test.

Thus, Kaname gotten Toki to assist them in physical combat training, where Toki would have to act as the bandit. He requested Toki to go easy on Sanda, as he doesn’t have any experience in fighting at all. Kaname advised Sanda to observe carefully at his opponent, and assured him that this won’t be something that’s too difficult. He continued on that Sando could attack the opponent’s weak point when the opponent rushed towards him, and then escape when the opponent was caught off guard. Sanda ended up with some injuries from this training, and thus Kaname requested “me” to help him with the first aid.

Chapter 4: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

After that, it was Izana’s turn to help Sanda with his training, as he was excited about it since it meant that he had gotten the chance to get to reveal the truth about the Santa Organisation (known as the charity group which organised the Santa Claus to give out presents every year). However, Hijiri had tagged along as well, bringing along information of the various popular spots of the city with him. Izana had felt that Hijiri was being a disturbance to him, and asked him to head back to take the afternoon nap which he had always enjoyed. 

(”Going along with you, it would seems like we’re moving at a snail’s pace. Please don’t be a hindrance and pull me back”. - Izana really seems to dislike moving along with Hijiri =w=“)

Chihiro had tagged along as well, and upon seeing Izana’s and Hijiri’s interactions, he remarked that they were getting along well as childhood friends. (Really? o.O) Izana dissed Chihiro that he could not understand how he could see that they had a great relationship with each other from their conversation just now. Izana was also surprised that “I” was here to help out too, since “I” was considered the person who knew the city the least among everyone at the detective agency (I know TWT), and Chihiro helped “me” to explain that “I” was here to make sure things go smoothly along since it was the first time Sando was meeting the three of them. 

When they finally met Sando at the hotel room where he was staying at, Hijiri noticed that he seems to have muscle aches all over him and wondered if he was alright. It seems like the physical training by Class 3 and the combat training by Toki had taken a toll on poor Sando. Chihiro offered to buy some phlox powder for him later on, as there was a store he had came across that sells medicine that’s really effective for Kenrouzoku.

Izana was determined to help Sando since if Sando wasn’t being selected for as a Santa Claus, Izana would lose the chance to grab more information about the Santa Claus Organization. Thus, this was the start of the lesson to learn about the various popular spots of this city. As they were teaching Sando, Hijiri remarked about a place that he usually went the “kids”, and Sando mistaken that he already has children when he’s still very young ^^; 

Izana offered to teach Sando more information about the city, but knowing these information would land his life into danger, as Izana would require him to become a spy when he managed to become a Santa and able to get into the Santa Organization. (Welp... Please stop Izana from getting people to do dangerous things ><”)

Chapter 5: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

A few days later, Kaname was spotted waiting outside the detective agency, and he blushed when “I” caught him standing there, explaining that he was worried about Sanda, and was waiting for him to arrive with the news of his test results. “I” asked him whether he would like to enter the building and have some tea, but Kaname told “me” that just seeing “my” face was already the best medicine for him to get back in spirits. 

Even though Kaname felt embarrassed that he was caught being worried, he revealed that he can’t helped but to get worried about Sando after knowing that there were Kenrouzuku who had participated in the tests too. He turned to “me” and asked “me” whether “I’ve” asked Sando before why he had wanted to become a Santa Claus, and revealed to “me” that actually, Sando had received presents from the Santa Organization when he was young, and he was surprised that the Santa had given him something that he had really want at that time when he had not talked about his wish to anyone else. However, he returned the gift to the Santa Claus, and wished to have his mother’s illness to be treated instead, and like a miracle, his mother actually recovered after that. It sounds magical, but Sando felt that perhaps it was just by coincidence at that time, and had laughed when talking about his past.

Kaname revealed that he had wanted to become a detective that could protect others. “I” asked him whether he had a Santa license, in which Kaname replied that it was difficult for him since one would need to reach a certain age in order to become a Santa Candidate (maybe towards middle-age?). Just then, Sando called Kaname but quickly hanged up later on. Kaname guessed that perhaps Sando was at the park, but from his voice, Sando sounds deflated...

We head towards the park to look for Sando. When we found him, he said in a sad tone that unfortunately, he was not selected. However, he suddenly got a phone call that informed him that he was being selected as one of the people being selected had dropped out due to injuries! (Congratulations~!)

Therefore, Sando could proceed to the next round of examinations, where he would need to research where the people on the list given to him were staying and to choose the presents suitable for them to give as a gift to them. The people who had received the presents were given marks based on how satisfied they were, and if Sando reached the passing marks, he would be able to obtain the license! Thus, other than looking for the residence of the people on the list, it was very important to find out what kind of gifts the people would like to receive. However, there were alot of people to be gifted and would be difficult to clear this round of examination.

Chapter 6: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

After a few days, Rudo, Toki, and Chihiro had gathered to decide on the route which Sando should follow when he gives out the gifts on his examination day. Rudo remarked that it was surprising to know that Toki had known the area of the shopping streets very well (even though it was no surprise that Chihiro was an expert ^^;). Toki explained that due to his brother being bad at directions, Toki had looked for him multiple times until he had known the area very well, as much as he hates to. 

However, looking at the map of the residences of the people that Sando had to deliver the gifts to, Chihiro realised that they were all over the city. The number of people to be gifted was even up to a hundred, and thus if they could not plan a good route for Sando to follow, he would not be able to finish delivering all the gifts in time.

Toki thought that Sando should be familiarised with the streets by now since he had already failed the tests for four years in a row, but Rudo reminded him that this was still the fifth time Sando had come to this city, and there were alot of small streets and underground paths in this city which he might know about and thus the streets would be confusing for him to navigate. Also, there were many places in this city which isn’t safe, even though there isn’t much they could do about the safety in this city that much.

The group decided to mark out different paths that Sando could take in different colours so that he would know which he should follow during the exam. 

When they entered the dark alley, Toki told them that there was a man following them just now, but had now left them for now. He guessed that perhaps the man was another detective being recruited by other Santa candidate. They went out to the main streets again, and Toki voiced out that he would introduce some underground paths that were easy to notice to Sando in case he got lost in the midst of delivery.

Just then, Chihiro noticed that there were some cute rabbit plushies at a toy shop and started playing with them. Rudo could only look on with envy as deep down in his heart, he actually wanted to touch them too. (Aww~ Rudo is cute this way~ >////<)

Chapter 7: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

Next up was Kaname and Izana to help Sando to research on what kind of gifts the people on his list would like to receive, and that is done by tailing after them =w=“ They were tailing a child and noticed that he/she had slowed down whenever they went past the toy shop. Izana called Ran (who was already in the shop I supposed?) and asked him which product in the toy shop was the child looking at. Ran replied that the child was looking at a vegetable ranger changing set and was also looking at the same item at another shop too earlier, which made him determined that this was probably the item that the child would really want to have.

As Ran stepped out of the store, he remarked that though initially he thought that it would be hard to research on such a huge list of people to find out what they like, since they’re mostly children, it was actually pretty easy to observe and notice what they like or want. He also added that it seems like they’re Santa’s elves, who aid Santa Claus to find out what little children want for their Christmas presents if they had behaved well that year. But Izana simply smirked and remarked that not all elves would always be on the side of Santa Claus’ all the time as there are elves who likes to prank on others, hinting that he may not be on Sando’s side to help him once he had gotten any clues on the Santa Claus organization. Even as much as Ran doesn’t agreed with Izana’s views, Izana knew that Ran won’t be able to stop him =w=“ 

Izana had heard that at times even adults receive presents from the Santa Claus Organization, and was determined to see this in front of his very own eyes. Since even adults were on the list of people to be gifted, Ran was surprised to know that maybe he would be gifted too. Izana teased him that he may not be on the list, to which Ran rebutted that his name may be on lists of other Santa Claus candidates or perhaps the actual Santa clauses with licenses would make an appearance with the presents on the actual day instead.

(Kaname and Ran were so sweet to tell “me” that a girl so cute and kind-hearted like “me” would definitely get visited by Santa Claus ^^)

Izana was still determined to see Santa Claus no matter what, which made Ran curious about what would he do when Santa Claus came to the detective agency. Izana replied that he would capture him of course, and tried all kind of means to get the insider information about the Santa Claus Organization, and he planned to sell that information away after this incident is over. Ran could only sigh and remarked that even though Izana was a novelist, he doesn’t have one sense of romanticism in him at all =w=“

Chapter 8: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

Later on, Hijiri showed up at the park and told “me” that he had prepared something for Sando to cheer him on. It was a banner which Hijiri said that he would put it up to welcome Sando when he’s reaching us. He thought that he should put the banner down before Sando arrived, but felt that it would be an obstruction to other passerbys in the park. 

Chihiro turned up soon after, and they discussed about Sando was still in the midst of his paper test, but some people passed by us and talked about an alarming incident that had happened. It seems like someone had sent a threatening letter to the venue where Sando was having his test according to people at the Santa Claus Organization, since those people who had passed by us had red badges on that are representations of the organization. Some of the candidates might drop out of the examinations due to this, but this was the last year that Sando was eligible for the examinations, and thus he would continue. Chihiro could only wish that everything would go smoothly for his exams. 

Suddenly, we received a phone call from Kaname. He informed us that the results for the paper tests were released, and Sando had not just passed the tests, he was even among those who had scored really well for it and thus were given the advantage to start with the delivery of the presents than the others! (Congratulations Sando~!) Kaname was at the examination venue and told us that he had not seen any suspicious people hanging around here, so it seems that nothing threatening had been happening to the candidates so far. 

Now all we have to do was to wait for Sando when he was on his way to deliver the presents to cheer him on, but we get yet another phone call, this time with bad news instead. Rudo called and told us that Sando had disappeared on the way when he was delivering a present to one of the person on the list... Even though we were really worried, Hijiri smiled and assured us that it would be alright, and what we could do was to wait for him here which was the goal of his delivery test.

Chapter 9: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

“I” head towards the large Christmas tree at the train station soon after to look for Kaname. He informed “me” that unfortunately, Sando had yet to appear and it was worrying, since no matter which route Sando had chose to take when delivering his presents, he would pass through here once no matter what if his delivery was proceeding smoothly along. Rudo had already went on a search for Sando by going through the routes where Sando could have went to, but he called a little earlier on and informed Kaname that he had not found Sando yet. 

As much as Kaname wished that it was just them who had lost sight of Sando and actually Sando was still delivering the presents smoothly, he had a feeling that Sando might be caught in some sort of trouble as it was too weird for him not to show up when he had already put in so much efforts in the examinations.

We got yet another phone call, this time from Izana instead, and he had a really useful lead for us! He told us that the reason why Sando had disappeared, and that was because he was chasing after a snatch thief that he had came across by chance on his way on delivering the presents. Since Sando had requested our help, Izana would lend him a hand as representation of the informant, to make sure Sando would pass the Santa Claus examination in the end. He decided to send where Sando was located now to Kaname, so that we can think of what we could do to help Sando, as too much time had passed that by the time Sando resumed to deliver the rest of the presents, he would go over the time limit as set by the examinations and failed. 

Kaname looked at the location sent by Izana and realised that Sando had ran quite far away from what he had expected, remarking that no wonder Rudo could not find him when he had searched around the area. He asked “me” to take his hand and we ran towards the shopping streets together. In order to make full use of this lead, Kaname vowed to capture this snatch thief.

Chapter 10: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

Chirio and Hijiri had also head towards the shopping streets to help Sando out. Chihiro had not expected Sando would actually went to chase after a snatch thief in the midst of his important exams, which Hijiri added on that though Sando’s face may look abit scary, he was actually a very kind-hearted person. Chihiro dissed that if the Santa Claus examination had a “kind-hearted award”, Sando would be the one that’s should be awarded. (But too bad there’s no such award ^^;) Along the way however, Chihiro suddenly stopped and told Hijiri that he had something to attend to, and asked him to continue his way ahead instead...

In the meanwhile, Kaname and “I” had head towards the alley in the evening. He was glad about something that “I” had told him (which I don’t remember now since the game doesn’t actually show what the heroine said =w=“) even though he knew that this probably wasn’t the time to be happy about such matters. We had followed the information given by Izana and came to the area where Sando should be located, but it was weird since not even Sando was nowhere to be found, Kaname could hardly even smell his scent, wondering whether Sando had already went away from here and his scent might be carried away by the wind.

(Kaname was really sweet as he asked “me” whether “I’m” alright and cautioned “me” to be careful when “I” almost fell.)

Rudo met up with us and we decided to split ways to search for Sando, with Rudo taking the right route, and Kaname and “me” taking the left route instead. Along the way, we finally came across the snatch thief and Sando! The snatch thief yelled at Kaname to get out of the way, calling him a thin and fragile boy, which apparently pissed Kaname enough to give the snatch thief a judo throw. (Rudo highly praised him for it though XD) We decided to capture the snatch thief and tied him up his hands and legs to stop him from fighting against them. 

Kaname was surprised that Sando had been fighting with the snatch thief for a long time till now, and Sando explained that he had seen the thief snatching a bag from a grandma, and the thief seems like he was the grandma’s grandson. Sando requested us to send the thief to the police and to return the bag, as he wanted to resume his delivery of the presents. Rudo told us that he would do these instead, urging Kaname and “me” to help Sando.

Hijiri called and informed us the top Santa candidate had already finished with his delivery of the presents and had reached the goal. Sando lost his confidence as he felt that he won’t be able to finish delivering the rest of the presents within the time limit, but Ran and Izana showed up and told him not to give up.

Chapter 11: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

e were surprised by the appearance of Izana and Ran, since Ran had said that he had other work to do on that day and he apologised for lying to us, saying that it was Izana who had told him to keep it a secret that he was here. Ran told Sando that Izana and him were looking for information about the Santa Claus recently, and get to know something alarming. There had been a rumour that it had already been decided who was to pass the examinations every year before the actual examinations, and feeling bothered about this rumour, Izana and Ran had went to contact other Santa Candidates and asked to look at their lists. It was then they realised that one of the candidates’ list had all the people that were related to the chairperson committee of the Santa Claus Organization. Therefore, they deduced someone among the organization had purposely prepared a list different from the other candidates, and let the candidate became the top and the first to reach the goal. The candidate which came out the top of the examinations seems to be the nephew of the people in the chairman committee. D:  (So they’re just only letting those people related to them to be inside the organization? =w=“)

However, Sando replied that he would rather give up instead after knowing about this, since he had never expected that the organization that had given the license that he had always wanted to get was such a dishonest organization. Seeing that Sando was feeling deflated, Kaname encouraged him, asking him why had he wanted to be Santa Claus and had not given up after all this year. He knew that the hope to be a Santa Claus had yet to go out in Sando’s heart, and told him that a wonderful Santa Claus definitely exists in this world. That encouraged Sando once again as he aimed to deliver all the presents as his role of a Santa Candidate even if he went out of the time limit.

Suddenly, Toki appeared and told us that we don’t have the time to be chit-chatting as we‘re running out of time, passing over Sando’s sack. Ran thanked him and even wanted to treat him to a meal later on. (I kind of like Ran’s and Toki’s interaction after they’ve always been paired up together in the main story XD Ran even called Toki “Toki-chan”~)

However, when Sando peeked into the sack, there was no presents in the sack at all! He guessed that he might have dropped them when he was chasing after the snatch thief, and thus Kaname offered to help Sando find the missing presents together with Toki and Hijiri. Suddenly, Chihiro appeared, holding the missing presents~! He had noticed the presents being dropped by the roadside and had picked them up while chasing after us. Hijiri had also picked up some presents up around the area too after Chihiro had contacted him and told him about the presents who had fallen onto the roadside. (Yeah~ That’s lucky for them to have already picked up the presents ^^)

Chapter 12: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

After Sando's examinations, it was soon Christmas! Chihiro remarked that time sure flies fast and asked "me" whether "I" was meeting with Ryohei and the other to help preparing for the Christmas party. Commenting that "I'm" really hardworking, Chihiro revealed that he wanted to give "me" a pat on the head as a praise~ Just then, Kaname turned up and sort of interrupted the moment before Chihiro gave "me" a head pat. (Haha, will Kaname get jealous? XD) He left soon after and left Kaname and "me" to ourselves.

Kaname remarked that since they had gotten Chihiro and Hijiri to work together with them to help Sando this time, he felt that it was a different experience working with just Class 3. Also, he felt that he still had lots to learn after seeing how Rudo had attended to the various situations. Kaname had felt disappointed that Sando was unable to deliver all of the presents within the time limit thanks to the snatch thief incident, but Ran came to us and said that everything still turned out alright in the end, since Sando was unhurt and even managed to get a Santa license in the end. Kaname knew that Sando was able to get the Santa license because of Izana and Ran helping in the background, and this was considered a special case indeed for the Santa Claus Organization. Ran continued that even though Sando had went out of the time limit slightly for the delivery test, the children were really satisfied with their presents when compared to children who had received their presents from the other candidates. Even though Sando had his own wish, he worked really hard to help others who were troubled instead, and that made him seems just like a Santa Claus in Ran's eyes.

Izana joined us too and remarked about how disappointed he was to find out the remaining members of the Santa Claus Organization were people who really likes kids and good people, other than the one person who had fiddled with the list of people to be gifted so that his own nephew could come out as the top. He had expected that the organization was one who make themselves look like a charity group and cheated alot of money from the others, or they're an organization which is actually a large-scale criminal group instead, but unfortunately for Izana, the organization was not anything like what he had expected at all ^^; Ran had deduced that the threatening letter was written by Izana, to which Izana replied that he did so to make the examinations more exciting, but Ran lectured him that his letter had made everyone worried, even wondering whether there was going to be an arsonist showing up at the examination venue.

In the end, Sando had sent presents to us, though technically he could only start deliver presents from next year onwards. The present came with a little card, thanking us for helping him to pass his examinations and supporting him all this while. Ran was glad to receive another gift (since he probably had one from the delivery test I think?), and received something soft and fluffy which Rudo could only looked on with envy XD

(Kaname looks so cute when he blushed XD)

As everyone got engrossed in opening their presents, Chihiro suddenly remembered that there was "something" they had to do. Kaname opened up a box and gave it to "me", telling "me" that this was a badge that's a representation of the D.O.G detective agency and was a gift from all of them from the detective agency. He told "me" that "I" was now considered a very important member of the detective agency and thus they wished that "I" had the same badge as them as well. 

Kaname complimented that "I" looks really good with the badge on "me" and said that he felt honoured that "I" had the same symbolism on "me" like him. He was glad to celebrate Christmas with "me", saying that this would definitely be a memory that he would not forget.

And that’s it for this story~! This was quite a cute little story, which main characters were none of our detective crew though ^^; I actually thought this Santa Ojisan was actually quite cool though we never get to know how he looks like XD In this story, we get quite a few chances to get along with Kaname, which I really enjoyed the interactions with him ^^

Next event story would be quite a serious and major one that tied in with the side stories~ I planned to translate side stories after that one before returning to resume with the rest of the event stories~ (But who knows when would I translate them ^^;)

#viidog code #event story #summary #translation #otome game #vd:event #vd:translation #class3 #class 4

[momorabu]

Viidog Code Event Story - 無人島に隱された秘密 / The Hidden Secret on the Deserted Island

This was supposed to be June’s post but somehow it gets delayed to almost the end of July to be completed =w=“ (I’ll see if I can complete two posts in August in order to catch up ^^;) Finally, it’s time to know Class 3 and Class 1 abit better with this event story~! And it’s going to be even more fun and adventurous seeing that the detectives are going camping on a deserted island~ +W+

As always, the summary of the story can be found below. Translation may not be 100% accurate due to my poor Japanese skills~

Chapter 1: 無人島上陸 / Alighting on the Deserted Island

The story started with the fisherman bringing a group of the detectives to the deserted island on his boat. The detectives were here to research about the island, which would be a difficult task and it seems like the detectives had been getting similar work like this recently. The fisherman had heard that the detectives would be returning on the same day, and thus asked Rudo whether it would be hard to complete the entire researach about the island in just one day. Rudo replied that they planned to split the research into several days, so for today they just planned to research the lower part of the island for now. 

Rudo noticed that Kotaro was silent throughout the whole trip to the island, and thus worried whether he was uncomfortable due to motion sickness on the boat. But Kotaro assured him that he’s alright since he had taken the motion sickness medicine earlier on, and had a question for Rudo instead. He wondered why Rudo had specifically requested a fisherman to take them to the island when Kotetsu and he could both operate a ship and take them there without the help of a fisherman. Rudo answered that this was what Shu had planned and thus felt that perhaps Shu had something in mind when he did the arrangement. Rudo was also worried about “me” being tired from not being used to travelling on the boat and informed us that it would take another 1 hour before we reach the dock on the island. He was actually glad that “I” was able to join Class 3 to work together~ ^^ (Sounds like Rudo had been looking forward to such a day actually ^/////^)

When we finally landed on the island, Sousuke was really excited as he exclaimed that the sea made him feel good that it felt like his heart got cleansed by it. Kotaro bumped into Sousuke, which made whined that he’s going to fall into the sea. But Kotaro coolly replied that he’s going to throw Sousuke if he continues to make a din, and also that he was actually blocking the road for the others to get off the boat. Sousuke apologised and changed the topic to about fishes instead since for him, making sure that they have enough food was the number one rule on living on the deserted island. He had even wanted to catch some octopus to make some takoyakis on the beach. (Erm... did you even have the ingredients and machines to make takoyakis?)

Rudo informed them that their task today was to research about the ecosystems on the island (Eh? It sounds like they’re biologist rather than detectives suddenly OWO”). From the words of the person who gave them this job, this island belongs to his great grandfather, and it had been a 100 years since anyone had stepped foot on the island, which sounds like it can be a treasure hunting trip in Sousuke’s ears. The client had planned to build a resort on the island and thus required information on the island, such as the plants and animals living on the island, the quality of the ground here, and any other information the detectives could gather on the island. Shu had requested “me” to come with Class 3 so as to assist them as part of “my” job as an assistant, as Class 3′s members will be working on their parts based on what they’re good at. 

As the island was really huge, Class 3 would be splitting up to research the island in groups. Sousuke and Kotaro would be walking along the beach and researching in that area, so Sousuke quickly ran off leaving poor Kotaro behind. As the beach was really long, Kotaro informed Rudo that if they feel that they’re walked too far from the starting point, they would return instead. Rudo and “me” would be making the base camp in the area we were currently at. There would be a second team coming later on (and here I was wondering where’s Kotetsu and Kaname ^^;), so we would also be assisting them to carry the stuff they’re bringing over, and also set up a tent for Sousuke and Kotaro to rest later on~ (This really sounds like a camping trip for me ^^~) 

As there aren’t any chairs around, Rudo looked around for some flat stones to be used as stools. He was surprised when he saw that “I’ve” brought along a picnic sheet... and it has rabbits print on it, and get to know that “I’ve” bought this when “I” was on a hiking trip with Class 2 in the past. (Rudo looks like he’s really fond of the picnic sheet~ He really likes cute stuff I guess~ ^///^)

Rudo told “me” that Hijiri had showed him the video he had taken on Class 2′s break day, and remarked that he felt his heart was healed just watching the kids enjoying themselves, adding on that it seems that he had went back to the time when he was a kid himself. Hijiri had invited Rudo to join them the next time Class 2 was on break, but Rudo wondered whether he should go since he knew that Yu from Class 2 was quite afraid of him... (Awww~ TWT) “I” offered to go along with him in that case, which made Rudo felt more at ease since he knew that “I” would help to ease up the atmosphere if “I” was there with them ^^ Therefore, Rudo decided that he shall tell Hijiri about this matter when we’re done with their work, and invited “me” to go along with him as well~

Chapter 2: 船出と祈り / Praying for the Boat Venture

In the meanwhile, Kaname and Kotetsu were still back on the dock on the main street, with Kaname being silent and feeling worried about “me”. He hoped that his feelings were able to reach “me” and become a power to protect “me”. Kotetsu was, in fact, alright with Kaname’s actions, since at least he was quite rather than being all fidgeting and worrying like earlier on. Kaname was still pissed about the agency sending “me” to the deserted island when there’s a possibility that ferocious monsters could be hiding on it. Kotetsu felt that Kaname might be thinking too much but Kaname rebutted that it won’t be weird if there’s a tiger or two living on the island since the island had been abandoned for up to 100 years. Kotetsu tried to assure Kaname by informing him that he used to go to neighbouring islands for fishing since there’s alot of fishes there and it was a quiet place to fish. He had not encountered any tigers in his experience, and at most he had only encountered wild boars on the island ^^; (Side information from Kotetsu: Wild boars could swim and thus could land themselves on these islands. Even though tigers could swim as well, they can’t swim long distances and land on different islands ... Do wild boars swim long distances?) That doesn’t help to ease Kaname’s worries though, as he now worried about “me” being chased after by wild boars instead ^^; Kotetsu tried to assure Kaname again by telling him that Sousuke would step in and help to fight the wild boar in that case, even joking that such a scene would be even more interesting than a snake fighting a mongoose. Kaname’s worries don’t stop here though as he thought about “me” being surrounded by a group of wild boars next... (Kaname’s worries just doesn’t stop... =w=“)

Kotetsu finally got frustrated with Kaname’s worrying, and cautioned him that they won’t be able to continue with the investigation if he continues on in being like this. Kaname rebutted that he just can’t feel at ease as long as he kept imaging all the possibilities that could happen on the island. He complained why “I” have to entrusted with this mission when other people such as Kuki or Shiro could take on the mission instead... Feeling that it’s probably worthless if he kept on worrying, Kaname offered to help with preparations on the boat instead.

Shu came to check on the two of them later on, and Kotetsu informed him that they’ve prepared everything that Shu had told them to prepare. Senri was worried for Shu as he asked him whether he was indeed going to the deserted island too since Senri didn’t think that this was a trip that requires Shu to make his way down personally. Shu explained that there was a need of help this time round due to how large the island was, and since Shu had the free time currently, it was obvious to him that he should lend a helping hand, as it was always better to have more people who were knowledgeable about this area to tag along. Senri was still not pleased as he grumbled why Shu had to take on such a hard labour mission, when Rui could do the same too... (Sounds like Senri would rather Rui take on this mission rather than Shu =w=“ It’s not nice to push matters onto Rui as much as I don’t like him very much =w=“)

Kotetsu who was listening to their conversation dissed that he seems to have heard something similar just now~ (Haha, he’s totally referring to Kaname when he complained that why “I” should be the one who take on this hard labour mission rather than Shiro / Kuki XD)

Kotetsu wondered why Shu had asked a third party to help prepare the boat for this mission too when Kotetsu could do it himself, but Shu answered that it would be a waste of time if Kotetsu was the only one who did it, and thus he split the members into two different groups to increase the efficiency of this mission. (But because of Shu’s plan, it caused Kaname to endlessly worry for “me” =w=“)  When they get to know that Kaname was helping with the preparations for the boat, they had a bad feeling when they realised that Kaname had zero knowledge in regards to anything about a sailboat... And just at that moment, Kaname was getting scolded by the fisherman for pushing a button that he was told not to touch ><” 

Shu realised that Senri had stopped asking him to stay out of the mission, to which Senri replied that he would not disobey Shu’s decision. However, he would tag along too and would help as an assistant to Shu just like “me”. Later on, when Senri was taking out his handkerchief to help to clean Shu’s dirty hands, he accidentally dropped a flyer from his pocket. It was a flyer given out by a family on the streets just now, and they were looking for their missing father. Senri remarked that recently there had been a rise in missing people who were related to the trading industry, and thus wondered perhaps this missing father was involved in a similar incident. He had given the family the company’s name card and guessed that perhaps the family’s case might be one of their jobs too in the near future if they enlisted their help. Shu replied that while they would definitely give in their all if the family had approached them about it, but for now, what they should do was to focus on the job they’re currently working on. 

Chapter 3: 調查リーダー / Investigation Leader

Back on the island, “I” had fallen asleep earlier on and woke up to Rudo looking over “me”. He explained that “I” must have fallen asleep due to fatigue and even offered “me” some tea using the water from a fountain he had found nearby. Actually, it was the first time for Rudo to be taking on such a mission, as he remarked that Sousuke and Kotaro were both more experienced than him in such outdoors mission. He assured “me” not to worry, and to always approach him if “I” have any queries about the mission. (Aww~ Rudo is really such a kind-hearted guy ^^)

Just then, Sousuke came back to the base camp, claiming that he’s the first. This mission reminded Sousuke of the time he was camping when he was a policeman, and told us that he would have to run on the beach with a full set of heavy equipments, adding on that it was indeed a training that trains the entire body. Rudo noticed that Sousuke was carrying a wooden box and asked him what it was, to which Sousuke replied that he had saw it floating in the sea and thought that they could put the fishes and octopus they’ve caught just now into it to use it as a cooler box. 

Sousuke had reached the checkpoint of the research pretty soon since he had been running along the shoreline. From his research, he had found some animals residing on the island, such as squirrels, mice, snakes and lizards. He added that the sea was really beautiful here and there’s alot of fishes here, making this island a really good spot to build a resort on. Rudo remarked that the client would be happy to hear about it, remarking the scenery here made one feel at ease. In fact, Sousuke felt that this place had such a relaxing atmosphere that he could even take an afternoon nap here. Unknowingly, that was exactly what “I’ve” done just now, and “I” felt embarrassed and guilty about it that “I” blushed >////<

Kotaro returned soon later on, with information about the plants on the island. Most of the plants were common and harmless, but there’s a red flower that gets Kotaro’s interest as it was an uncommon plant seen back on the main island. In addition, Kotaro had also found a cave on the island, which the team decided that they might look into that later on. Seeing that the second team would be arriving soon, Kotaro suggest that we should set up the base camp and tent in preparation for their arrival. (Wait... I thought Rudo and “me” did that already. Welp, guess we didn’t do much when Sousuke and Kotaro were researching =w=“)

Sousuke was hungry and got dissed by Kotaro instead, saying that Sousuke had just eaten breakfast not too long ago. Rudo informed us once again that the investigation this time was a combined mission of Class 1 and Class 3, with the addition of “me”. Shu had instructed Class 3 to lead the investigation, and Rudo had decided to appoint Kotaro as the leader for this investigation this time round. However, Kotaro didn’t seem like he wanted to take up this role, that Sousuke had to encourage him to take it on, saying that this matters to him too seeing that his partner was being instructed to be a leader. (I guess Sousuke was really happy for Kotaro’s sake ^^;)

Rudo told Kotaro that the reason he had picked him was because Kotaro seems to be the one who’s the expert in terms to these related outdoor activities. With the leader decided, Sousuke was in high tension as he excitedly suggested that everyone should hold a party in memory of Kotaro being instructed to take on the role of the leader for this mission, even wanting to make an octopus bun for it XD (And I was surprised that Sousuke had actually brought along the machine to make takoyakis and even the flour and eggs as well, I guess it’s really possible to eat takoyakis here after all~ ^^;)

Rudo told the two of them to take a break from their research for now and rest well instead, cautioning Kotaro to take care of his body well since he was the leader of the day. In the meanwhile, an octopus had found his way into Sousuke’s outfit, and he yelled at “me” to help him to take it off. Kotaro saw that commotion and sighed, saying that unfortunately, this was not the time for him to take a break after all... ^^; 

Chapter 4: 本格始動 / Actual Operation

The second team finally arrived onto the island~! Shu and Senri was surprised when they smell the scent of the takoyaki sauce when they got onto the island. Kaname was worried about “me” throughout the entire trip and felt at ease when he saw “me” safe and sound. As Kaname had quickly helped to prepare everything ready for the voyage, the second team had arrived earlier than expected, which was great for Kaname since he was yearning to see “me”.

Kaname noticed that Kotaro seems more tense than usual, to which Sousuke helped to explain that Kotaro was appointed as the leader for this mission overall, and thus he was really working hard to make sure that the mission would be a success. Kaname agreed that Kotaro was the best person suitable for the role of the leader for this mission since there’s no one else who knew more about the outdoor other than him. He explained to “me” that the investigation leader would be decided on every mission in accordance to each individual’s speciality, and this was done to increase the efficiency of the missions. Most huge missions would still be under the lead of Rudo, but if there’s a special mission like this that suits a certain’s member’s speciality, that person would be the leader of the mission. As Sousuke had been a policeman before (new information about Sousuke!), he’s good at tracing and patrolling, and would usually be the leader for such missions (which is actually quite frequently~). Kaname’s speciality is his knowledge on plants, especially flowers. and also looking for stolen gems and artwork, as well as musicial instruments too. 

The two remarked that as it’s been a while since Kotaro was appointed as a leader, he may be abit nervous about it. Sousuke decided that he shall send some takoyakis he had made to Kotaro to cheer him up~

Kaname is still recounting how he’s worried about “me”, and even talked about how he had imagined “me” being attacked by ferocious creatures ^^; Sousuke assured him that if that ever happens, he would first help to attack the creatures instead, even wanting to do that in real life to show it to Kotetsu, who joked about Sousuke earlier on with Kaname ^^; (I guess the part where Kotetsu said that the scene would be like a snake fighting a mangoose?) Kaname advised Sousuke not to be violent to the creatures since they’re here to research about the eco system afterall, to which Sousuke said he won’t hunt them but he would want to fight them and become friends with them... ^^; Somehow he even tried to get Kaname to be the judge for the match, which Kaname surprisely agreed to XD But Kaname said that if the match gets too dangerous, he would protect “me” instead, which Sousuke replied he would protect “me” together too, since “I’m” their very precious assistant >////< (That’s so sweet coming from these guys~ ^////^)

(Haha, Kaname sounds like he’s jealous about Sousuke who gets to say such cool words about protecting “me”. He affirmed to “me” again that he really values “me” and would protect “me” at all costs, even asking “me” to rely on him even more >////<)

On the other hand, Kotaro was reporting to Shu about the workflow for the mission. Kotetsu was preparing the devices required to investigate the sea water, which would be used later on for the mission. As this was the first time Kotaro is leading the mission when Class 1 is working together with Class 3, he urged Class 1 to just say what’s on their mind if they have any questions for him. Kotaro had planned to investigate the island until the evening, when the boat had arrived to pick them up. As there isn’t much time left till then, Kotaro decided to split everyone into three groups to carry out the investigation. 

First up was the “sea” team, which consisted of Shu, Senri and Kotetsu. They would be checking on the sea water and the marine creatures in the sea, and the leader of that team would be Shu. Shu and Senri would be researching on the sea water, since Shu had done related tasks before when he was working as a police. (Is it me or maybe part of the staff here were ex-policemen OWO”) Kotetsu alone will be investigating the marine creatures instead. 

Next will be the “hill” team, which would consists of Sousuke and Kaname only. Kaname will be researching on the plants and flowers (since that’s his speciality), and Sousuke will assists him. Lastly, Kotaro, Rudo and “me” will be forming the “camp” team, which will continue to set up the base camp while the other two teams were carrying out their investigations. We would also plan and calculate how many days it would take to research about the entire island. 

(Shu’s verdict for Kotaro’s plan? It’s perfect XD)

Chapter 5: 助手の奔走 / Assistant’s Work (lit. Working around)

When the teams carried out their tasks, Kotaro asked “me” to deliver water to the guys instead since setting up the basecamp requires lots of physical strength. (I guess Kotaro just didn’t want “me” to do such hard labour as a female ^^:) While “I” went to get water from the fountain and deliver to the guys, Rudo and Kotaro will set up the tent for the basecamp instead. 

Over at the “sea” team, Kotetsu was fishing when Senri asked him if he had any tips on fishing. Even though Kotetsu had been fishing by habit usually, he guessed that perhaps timing was important to land a catch. If one pulls the fishing rod too early, the fish would escape before they get caught, and if one pulls the rod too late, the fish might have already been gone after eating the lure on the hook. When Kotetsu was about to show Senri how to fish, he ended up throwing the fishing rod when he saw “me” appear XD “I” went to pick up the fishing rod, and was about to touch the fish on the rod when “I” got yelled at by Kotetsu. He apologised for that later on and explained that the fish was actually poisonous, so he was actually cautioning “me” instead. Even though Kotetsu was doing better in facing “me” than during the time when we first met, he would still get shocked if we met suddenly, and thus him throwing the fishing rod away was just part of his reflex kicking in ^^;

Seeing that I’ve brought water for them, Senri asked “me” to take some over to Shu too. When “I” met Shu, he had a message that he wanted “me” to pass over to Kotaro, saying that at the speed of them investigating, they would have a result on the quality of the sea water by evening if nothing crops up. Kotetsu also had some findings on the fishes he had caught. There are currently five different fishes that he had caught, and they were all edible. Even though Kotetsu had wanted to catch small fishes and then use them to catch larger fishes, that would take a long time and thus he won’t be able to do that today. The guys thanked us for the water, and Kotetsu told us to look forward to the catfish barbecue later on~! (Guess that means that he would be catching lots of catfish for that ^^)

However, Kotetsu seems to have noticed a boat but decided to shrug it off instead...

Next would be heading into the forest to find Kaname and Sousuke~! Kaname was glad to see “me” and thanked “me” for the drinks, remarking that was actually quite hot at the south part of the island. He remarked that Sousuke was with him a moment ago but had felt uncomfortable after that, when he had eaten poisonous mushrooms that are grown in this forest. Luckily, the mushrooms are not too poisonous, so Sousuke was back to normal soon... and went hungry again ^^; After that, Sousuke claimed that he had saw a wildboar and had went into the inner part of the forest chasing after it. (One might thought that Sousuke might have imagined seeing it, but Kaname assured “me” that the mushroom does not have the effect of making people hallucinate ^^;) Therefore, Kaname was just staying in place and continuing with his investigation of the plants while waiting for Sousuke to return in the meantime ^^;

Since “I” was interested in Kaname’s findings, he decided to show “me” the plant he had found, and taught “me” that odd and even number of leaves on a plant will give an indication on how much flowers / fruits it would bear. Kaname had noted down his findings, especially on the rare plants he had found. He decided to let “me” deliver his notes to the base camp, as well as inform the guys over there about Sousuke’s circumstances. 

“I” returned to the camp to find that it was already set up and Rudo and Kotaro had already calculated how much time it would take to investigate the island. Like what the fisherman had said when he took us here, it would take roughly three days for a thorough investigation. What puzzled Kotaro was how did the fisherman knew that it would take them three days? O.O”

Chapter 6: 明かされる任務 / The Mission that was Revealed

As the sun began to set, Kotetsu was glad to see that Sousuke had returned and informed him that he had a large catch today. Sousuke was about to touch the catfish when he gets yelled at by Kotetsu (again XD) that they’re poisonous. Kotetsu had knew that Sousuke had eaten poisonous mushroom earlier that day, and warned him that he doesn’t want to get poisoned again ^^: In the end, Sousuke lent a helping hand to Kotetsu to carry the fishes back to the base camp. 

Shu and Senri had also returned to the base camp and handed their records to Rudo, noting that there isn’t anything abnormal about the water. Senri had done what he can do to help since he doesn’t understand what the report means anyway as they’re all numbers arrange in columns, and that made Shu smiled as he told Senri that he would teach him about calculating those if there’s a chance next time~ 

Kaname had returned earlier on and was now at the beach nearby sketching a flower that only blooms in the evening for the research. It was a flower which was red and had seven petals. (This may be an important information later on~)

However, there’s a problem right now. The fisherman who was supposed to come and pick us up had not arrived, and Rudo wondered what had happened that cause the delay. As since there’s no other way to go back right now, the group would have to stay overnight on the island. Kotaro had found something amiss all this while, and asked Shu for the actual reason they were brought here. Kotetsu had also noticed that the fisherman’s boat seems to be patrolling around the island like it is supervising the detectives, and wondered perhaps it was related to this matter as well. 

Shu finally announced the real reason that the detectives were brought onto the island. Researching about the island is a hoax, and a bluff to cheat the pirate crew called “Pudel”. “Pudel” is a pirate group which will carry a large scale of pirate activities, and their members had never been caught before, making it uite a unique group. The detectives’ client for this mission was none other than the police, rather than the island’s owner, and their actual mission was to uncover the reason why this pirate group was able to commit their crime perfectly without a trace. The police had suspected that there’s a spy within the police headquarters and thus decided to recruit the detectives to help them investigate about the pirate group instead. The police’s latest findings had traced the pirates to be around this area. It was told that the pirates would definitely stay on this island for a night before committing their crime the next day. Therefore, it can be deduced that the secret to the pirates’ perfect crime might be hidden on the island. Also, it seems like the key members of the pirate crews were all kenrouzoku, and since the detectives were kenrouzoku themselves, perhaps they could deduce and predict the detective's actions better than the police.

(Aww~ Sousuke was so disappointed when he realised that the island investigation was a bluff D:)

After knowing about the actual mission, Rudo argued that it had been too dangerous bringing “me” along to the island. (Thank you Rudo for being concerned about “me” T////T) Shu agreed and guessed that Kuki would definitely be mad when he heard about this later on, (So Shu kept it as a secret from Kuki =w=“) but felt that bringing “me” along was necessary to bluff the enemies even further. The overall leading of the group will still be under Kotaro and they planned to get in contact with the people related to the island and talk to them tomorrow. The time limit for this mission will be at noon, when Mamiya came over and fetch them. 

Chapter 7: サバイバルディナー / Survival Dinner

Everyone gathered around at the base camp when night falls, and were informed about the actual mission they’re tasked to do. Kaname had heard about the “Pudel” pirate crew, and was surprised to learn that we’re actually going to chase after them. Shu corrected him that we’re not actually going to chase after them and capture them as that would be the job of the police. What the detectives are tasked to do was to find out how did the pirates managed to escape from the police and their secret techniques in doing so. The detectives learned that the fisherman who brought them here was actually a member of the pirate crew as well, so that’s why the fishing boat was patrolling around the area supervising them OAO. 

Kotetsu told Kaname to stop worrying over “me” and focus on his work, to which Kaname apologised and explained that he can’t feel at ease when it came to matters regarding to “me”. Shu remarked that Kaname was too deeply affected by “my” presence and that would end up being a weakness of his...  When the guys were discussing about this, “I” was busy helping out with the cooking, and Kotetsu decided to to prepare for the catfish barbecue as well since he had promised “me” that in the afternoon ^^

Kotetsu had lit up a campfire and decided to use that fire to cook the rice. “I” was tasked to look over the pot while Rudo went to prepare the fish together with Kotetsu. Kaname also came over to help, but got dissed by Kotetsu instead that he had not even barbecued anything before ^^; Actually Kotetsu was worried about Kaname being poisoned accidentally since the catfish contained poison in them. Kaname insisted to help, and suggested that Kotetsu would be the one in charge of removing the poison while Kaname helped to spear through the fishes with the sticks to barbecue them. 

(It’s cute that Kaname actually whined that he felt uncomfortable touching the catfishes though XD)

When it’s dinner time, Kaname complimented that the miso soup was delicious, thinking that it was made by “me”. Turned out that it was made by Rudo instead, which impressed Kaname even more~ Kotetsu also praised Rudo on his skills on preparing the fish, and remarked that perhaps Rudo has the talent to become a master chef ^^ Rudo also praised Kotetsu back on his cooking skills, but Kotetsu didn’t think that what he had done as cooking, as all he had done was removing the poison from the catfish and spearing them through the stick. For Shu, everything was delicious and he commented that it was rare to be eating while being surrounded by the nature, as he hardly goes outdoor even when he was on a break. 

Senri wasn’t around as he was away attending to another emergency job nearby (Hmm? What can he do on such a deserted island like here though?). The others had suspected that he might be looking for clues regarding the pirate crew, but Shu firmly replied that Senri won’t be someone who will do that, and asked the guys not to persue the matter any further. (I guess things will be revealed when Senri spoke about it?)

“I’ve” also made desserts for everyone, which were made of the cranberries and raspberries found by Kaname. Shu offered to make green tea for everyone, and remarked about the times when he used to drink green tea frequently when he was working as a policeman, due to his senior saying that green tea can help one to focus more than coffee~ 

Chapter 8: 作戰會議 / Operation Meeting

After dinner, Sousuke decided to create some beds before bedtime. Kaname agreed to that as well, as there’s no way he would allow “me” to sleep on the ground. The guys decided to lay their extra outfits below “my” sleeping bag to create a bed and also inflated an emergency float to be used as a pillow. Kotetsu looked at them fussing over “me” and dissed that they’re being “helpful” XD 

As Kotetsu began to clear the dishes, the rest of the detectives proceed with the meeting on discussing their plans for tomorrow. Shu had hoped that they would be able to find their “target” before the time limit and thus decided that they shall look at the places that could be used as a hideout on the island, such as water fields, caves and the forest. Thus, a search team would be created for tomorrow’s investigation. 

Shu had deduced that someone must be hiding on the island, but whether that person was a member of the pirate crew, it wasn’t something that Shu would be sure of until they found that person. He had sensed someone’s presence on the island, but wondered it might be him mistakening something as a person, and remarked that the “person” seems to be very afraid and a careful person. If that person could be talked to and persuaded, Shu decided that he shall appoint Senri to be the one to talk with that person, as Senri was good at talking with a relaxing voice to win over one’s heart easily. Even though the person seems like he’s afraid of the detectives, there’s still a possibility that the person is related to the pirate crew, so on the safe side, the detectives would be split into the “negotiation team” (Class 1) and the “decoy team” (Class 3). As there’s too many people in Class 3 and the negotiation team is much safer, Rudo decided that Kaname and “me” would be allocated into the negotiation team together with Shu and Senri. 

Rudo told Shu to rest for the night when the meeting was over, saying that the members of Class 3 would be taking shifts in making sure that the fire was burning and looking out for them throughout the night. Rudo was the first person on duty, and when “I” came over to talk to him, he apologised for getting “me” involved in a pretty dangerous mission this time and imagined that Kuki must be so angry about it now that his hair is raising ^^; (Kuki is really behaving like a big brother or say father to “me” ^^;) Rudo was also in the dark about Shu’s actual motive in coming to the island and guessed that in order to prevent the targets from suspecting them, Shu had to lie and hide the facts first from his own comrades. 

Rudo had a request for “me” at such an “emergency”, and it wasn’t anything related to the job. He had wanted to invite “me” out and “I” readily accepted it. Rudo praised that “I’m” good at making desserts and blushed when he realised how happy “I” was on receiving the praise ^^

When “I” was about to head for bed, “I” noticed that Kotaro was setting up a tent for “me”. He told “me’ that Kaname had requested him to set up a tent for “my’ usage. There was still one more pole to be set up for the tent, so Kotaro asked “me” to help out while he taught “me” how to set up the tent. 

When all was done, Kotaro asked “me” how had “I” felt about him today. (Eh?/ It’s kind of sudden to be asked about “my” impression of him OWO”) Obviously, it was none other about how he was like as a leader for today (And to think I was expecting some Doki-Doki scenes =w=“) He was disappointed when “I” could not think of anything at the moment, and told “me” to inform him immediately if “I” had thought of it. 

(I always thought Kotaro was cool and can be kind of mean, but I guess he can be kind of sweet seeing that he did help to set up “my” tent and was interested to know “my” feedback about him as well, even if it’s work-related ^^;)

Chapter 9: 早朝探索 / Morning Investigation

The next morning, Kotetsu was amazed by what Sousuke and Kaname had done specially for “my” sleeping bag, noting that it seems like a little hill ^^; Seeing that Kotetsu was about to head for a walk in the morning, Sousuke suggested to go exploring in the mountains together, to which Kotetsu happily agreed to, since he thought that they might be able to find the bed which their targets are sleeping in if they’re lucky. They decided to leave a note to inform the others about their whereabouts and set off.

When they were in the forest area of the mountain, Kotetsu spotted a mushroom and was about to reach out to it when Sousuke stopped him, warning him that it’s actually a poisonous mushroom even if it looks edible and Kotetsu will get a stomach ache if he had eaten it. Sousuke remembered that Kaname had told him that the mushroom was only slightly poisonous and it can still be eaten if they cooked it to remove the poison. However, it would be terrible if one had eaten them raw or half-cooked instead. Kotetsu dissed that it seems like getting a stomach ache from eating a poisonous mushroom can be considered an important experience, which Sousuke happily agreed to without realising he was being dissed, and said that he could feel that his skills in managing dangerous situations had increased ^^; The guys decided that they shall pick the mushrooms they’ve spotted and let Kotaro to choose from them later on. 

Suddenly, Kotetsu noticed that something had moved somewhere near them. Sousuke had thought that it’s small animals like squirrels, weasels or hamsters, but Kotetsu was wary and thought of the possibility of their target finding them. Kotetsu later realised that it can be hard being Sousuke’s partner and was relieved to know that his partner was Kaname... since Sousuke had landed himself in a swamp and need help in pulling him up. When Sousuke was saved, his legs and trousers are soiled, so Kotetsu suggested that they head back to camp to get cleaned and changed. 

On their way back, they came across a stream and from the flow of the water, one could gauge where the mountain was situation. Sousuke was disappointed to find that there wasn’t any fishes in the river, but Kotetsu told him that there was fishes initially, but they had all escaped quickly when Sousuke jumped into the river ^^; Kotetsu spotted some fishes that can be eaten and decided to go fishing, even making some fishing rods on the spot using the branches in the forest for themselves. As they started to fish, Kotetsu remarked that Sousuke has a great eyesight and could spot the fishes easily in the river. With great timing, he managed to catch a fish just as the fish was eating the bait, and was praised by Kotetsu who told him that he had great reflexes. Sousuke was embarrassed and blushed, commenting that he seems to be praised alot by Kotetsu today XD

Chapter 10: 右腕の責務 / The Role of the Right-hand Man

Back at the base camp, the others had awoke and got to know that both Sousuke and Kotetsu had gone walking in the mountains together. Guess that they’re working hard looking for leads even while taking a while, Kaname decided to go exploring too, and Senri agreed to go along with him. Kaname had thought that Senri would be accompany Shu who had woken up too, but Senri cooly replied that it’s not like he sticks to Shu all the time, and there would be times where they were move about separately. Since Kotetsu and Sousuke had head into the mountains, Senri and Kaname decided to walk along the seaside.

Senri remarked that they might be able to meet the person residing on this island, and referred to a missing person flyer which he had taken the day before. He explained that he had gotten this flyer from the wife and son of the missing person, which was the boss of a trading company. Senri had found it weird that the man had went missing at the same period when the pirate crew had started to cause troubles on the sea, and from there, Kaname deduced that there might be a possibility that the trading company had worked together with the pirate crew, and was involved in the sea robberies. However, Senri voiced out that he had researched on the company and learned that it had been doing well and earning profits every year, and thus doesn’t think that the company would risk themselves so much just to earn from the robberies. Instead, Senri deduced that the boss might be threatened and forced to aid the pirate crew. Kaname was convinced by Senri’s reasoning, and guessed that those trading ships were already part of the pirate crew, which helped to let them escape from the police easily. 

However, this was still a tough case to crack, and as much as Senri doesn’t want to get Shu involved, he could not find any reason to persuade Shu from not doing so. The two of them decided to search around the beach some more and head back to the base camp when they’re found something, seeing whether that would help the team in setting up an operation plan.

Remembering that Senri had gone out yesterday night, Kaname asked him whether he was out alone searching for clues instead. Senri admitted that he was indeed looking for clues, as he felt that his role was to pluck out the seed of danger before Shu starts with his operation. Senri had realised that Shu had taken on this case before they head to the island, and feared that Shu would not talk to anyone about this case if he had not found any important clues that the island is involved with the pirates’ activities. Therefore, Senri decided to do what he can by investigating alone before Shu spoke about the case. This was Senri’s decision, and he was glad to be of help to Shu. (Senri seriously values Shu very much~ ^^;) 

After hearing Senri’s words, Kaname asked him why he was able to be so strong. Kaname wanted to be strong too and protect “me”, his partner Kotetsu, his comrades at the detective agency and everyone around him, but he realised that he was always blinded by his desire to protect everyone and could not see things clearly around him, and ended up making worthless efforts every time. He felt that even if he had the best plan and the best skills, he would end up causing trouble for everyone, and thus he really envied Senri for being to do what he wants smoothly. 

Suddenly, they realised someone’s presence nearby. Senri feared that they might scare off the person if they approached him, and guessed that the person won’t be able to eavesdrop on their conversation at the distance he’s maintaining between them. After a while, Senri could not sense the presence anymore, and guessed that the person must have escaped after all... (Aww... That’s such a pity D:)

Chapter 11: 逃げる影 / The Shadow that Escapes

Senri went to get in contact with Shu and informed him that they had spotted the target. Kaname was trying to trace him now and had let Shu where the target was currently located. Turned out that the target was near the cave which Kotaro had spotted yesterday, and Shu pondered whether they should join in the chase after the target or wait at the cave to make sure the target won’t be able to escape when he reached there. Kotaro had noticed that the target was staying alone on the island, and doesn’t seems to have any accomplices who worked with him here. But, there was still a possibility that his comrades were the pirates, and thus it was best that they capture this man first. 

Kotaro instructed everyone to head towards “Point E” and advised them to prevent getting themselves involved in fights that were not needed, since their only aim now was to capture the target. Rudo nodded and remarked that if he was the one in charge of leading now, he would give the same instructions as well, and praised Kotaro for giving good instructions. That ended making Kotaro blushed as he thanked Rudo for the praises XD

Kaname and Senri had received the instructions as well, and Kaname noted that “Point E5″ was an area that they’ve not investigated yet. Senri remarked that person was trying very hard to escape from them as they chased after him, and deduced that the possibility of this person being involved with the pirates seems to be very high. There was also a possibility that the man had thought that the detectives were pirate crews instead too...

Kotaro and the others went into the forest and managed to block the person’s escape route. Kotaro talked to the man, telling him that he guessed that the man had been the Pirates’ hostage for a long time even if he doesn’t want to. He doesn’t want to be captured by the pirates anymore, and thus when he spotted the detectives, he thought they’re the pirates too and tried as hard as he can to escape from them. Kotaro tried to persuade the target to be captured by him so that he can finish his mission, but of course, the person doesn’t want to be captured, and thus run away again from them... =w=“

Seeing that the target had run into the cave, Kaname asked Senri whether it would be better if they followed him inside. But Senri asked him to calm down instead and told him that the man had now hide himself in the cave because he was scared as deduced by Shu. He got even more scared when he was confronted by so many men, and thus went onto a rampage and hid. Senri proposed that he would try to talk to the man at a distance away from him, and learn more about him. Kaname agreed to this plan and asked Senri to be careful. (I guess he might be worried that the man will suddenly attack Senri ^^;)

Senri went near to the cave while still maintaining a safe distance, while Kaname went further away from them. Senri told the man that there’s only him and the man now in this area, and tried to persuade the man to talk to him. He assured the man that they did not have any weapons, and would also protect the man to return him back to the main island safe and sound too. 

The man finally spoke after being persuaded, admitting that he was roped into helping the pirates, as he cannot choose to reject them. He was originally the boss who operates the trading industry, and in his eyes, the pirates were a scary presence that could not be forgiven. The man pleaded that he had not wanted to commit such acts at all, but he crumbled due to fear and ended up being forced to help them. He had also felt that he had worked too much in his life that he was always busy and hardly returns home, and felt that perhaps there wasn’t a spot for him in his family anymore... (That sounds sad TWT) Therefore, the man decided that he shall not return tot he main island, and would try his best to escape for now, before escaping to another place when things had tide down.

Senri was stern as he told the man that his family isn’t considered that important to him since he’s giving up on going home so easily just because he’s being threatened. He asked the man whether work is really the most important to me, as Senri felt that it wasn’t deep down in his heart. Senri showed the man a flyer and told him that he had seen the man’s wife and child giving out flyers on the streets looking for him, and were still waiting for his return. So, it was only the man’s misunderstanding that he has no place in his family. But the guy wasn’t easily convinced, saying that he’s not sure that the flyer is real and he’s not confident of himself, saying that he’s a terrible husband and father. 

Senri replied to the man that they don’t have to specially make a flyer just to lie to him when they could just capture him by force since ultimately their goal was to capture this man who was their target. He tried to convince the man once again that his family were indeed worried about him and looking for him and told him that it’s impossible to create such a heartwarming flyer if his family does not care about him. 

Since the man had said that he won’t be returning home, Senri remarked out loud that he shall head back to the island and tell the man’s wife about the man’s whereabouts here, as he felt that he had the responsibility to do so. However, there would a possibility that the man’s wife would get worried and came here by herself, landing herself in danger of being captured by the pirates who frequent here. Senri said that the consequences won’t be related to him anyway and bid goodbye to the man. That made the man decided that he shall head back once to the main island and tried to set things right, since he knew that he won’t be able to go back to anything if he had continued to escape from the pirates on the island. Even though he doesn’t know whether he would be forgiven for his actions, he wanted to try and talk to his family once again. 

Chapter 12: 明日への船出 / The Boat towards Tomorrow

Senri, Kaname and the man returned to the island, where Shu and the others were waiting for them. Shu praised him for a job well done, but Senri smiled and replied that it was just something he had to do for Shu. Shu asked the man why he was being brought to the island, to which he answered that initially, he changed the course of the trading ships in order to escape from the supervision of the police, but he ended up encountering the pirates when doing that, and was threatened to assist them. Senri deduced that it’s possible, since most trading ships just want to ship their goods faster and didn’t want to the police to stop them and do checks on them, and guessed that perhaps other traders were also being forced to do similar things on other deserted islands.

Senri assured the man that he would be safe and won’t be blame since the man himself had not want to help the pirates but was forced to, saying that the police would not treat a victim like him as a criminal. However, the man knew that what he had did would not forgiven in the trading industry, and saying that he’s going to work even harder at work in the future to regain the trust that was lost in him from this incident. Also, he’s going to treasure his family very much from now on, which pleased Senri that he said that. Senri replied that though he had lectured the man earlier on, Senri too knew the feeling of losing something / someone very important to him as it had happened to him before too. 

As the case came to a close, Shu remarked that this was what they can do in their powers at this point of time, and felt that what they’ve done was right. This had always been Shu’s vision when operating the detective agency, and was also this vision that had saved Senri (probably to referring to Senri’s past I guess?). Rudo thanked Kotaro for doing a good job in being the leader for this mission, to which Kotaro replied that he doesn’t felt that he had done much this time round. But Rudo felt that Kotaro had already did what he could do as a leader, by giving good instructions to the members to carry out their jobs, and to follow up to assist them when required. Seeing Kotaro’s instructions for this mission and his actions later on, Rudo remarked that he looks forward to Kotaro’s growth as a detective and leader in the future.

Kotetsu had felt that he had not done much in this mission too this time, seeing that he had only ventured in the forest and went fishing XD Seeing that Kotetsu was with Sousuke just now, Kaname asked him where is Sousuke now as he was nowhere to be found at the base camp. Kotetsu sighed and replied that Sousuke had shouted that he’s going to fight a bear and win a wild boar before running off, and wondered whether Sosuske had eaten a poisonous mushroom yet again XD

The guys spotted a very familiar rental boat coming their way, it was the boat the detective agency had always rented! Seems like Rui was on their way to fetch them up. They get in contact with Rui, who informed them that Class 7 had been activated and was diverting the enemies attention so as to allow Rui to have the opening to come and fetch them. Shu guessed that Class 7 had done that because they were so worried about “me” and wanted to leave the island as soon as possible. Kotaro decided that their best plan now was to escort the man back to the main island, and as Sousuke was now here, they decided to leave him behind, since Sousuke seems like someone who could live well on the island. (What?! Poor Sousuke XDD) 

As they went getting onto the boat, they heard a familiar voice apologising for being late (it’s Sousuke!)~ But Kotaro ignored his cries and urged everyone to get on and for the boat to set off XD Kaname called out to Sousuke to hurry up as he’s going to be left behind XD

On the way back, "I” caught Kotaro looking at “me”, and he said that he just felt that “I’m” someone who can be really hardworking and more reliable than Sousuke. However, he told “me” not to get near him or bother him when we’re back at the detective agency. (.... That’s cold, Kotaro TWT) Kotaro was firm in his vision that he can do everything on his own, so as to get “that person” to think well of him as a member. (I think he’s referring to Rudo ^^;)

And that’s the end of the story, it’s kind of sad Kotaro is pushing “me” away again at the end of it, when I thought we’re going to be just abit closer =w=“ Well, at least Kotetsu is warmer to us now, and I do enjoy Kaname worrying and caring for “me” always, and Rudo too for looking over “me”~ ^^ Sousuke was being a silly guy as always XD

It’s interesting that Senri actually gets quite a large limelight on him this time seeing that he’s the overall key person who helped to resolve the case. I still feel that Kotaro doesn’t shine quite as much as I like to seeing that he’s the main character for this event story and the leader of this mission, since I would really want to know more about him D: Such a pity...

The story was at least fun to read this time round, seeing that the event story on the cruise ship the last time round was abit of a boredom. Sousuke was really funny and entertaining, and I do enjoy Kotetsu’s disses XDD Class 3 is really quite a bunch of guys with interesting personalities together ^^

#VIIDOG CODE #event story #summary #translation #otome game #VD:event #VD:translation #class 3 #class 1

[momorabu]

24.02.2018

Viidog Code Event Story - ショコラ.コンテスト / Chocolate.Contest

Though it’s pretty late for a week plus, happy Valentine’s Day~! As planned, this is Viidog Code’s Valentine’s Day story for the month of February, filled with many love and chocolates XD

As always, the summary of the story can be found below. Translation may not be 100% accurate due to my poor Japanese skills~

Chapter 1: 心を込めた...... / To put one’s heart into it......

The story started off with "me" accompanying Kuki after "my" work. Even though he remarked that he felt bad for "me", he was glad that "I've" wanted to do that to help him as a junior. We talked about the work we're working on today, which was looking for a missing cat. The cat was really obedient, which made our job easy and thus we were able to finish it earlier than expected. Kuki remarked that it seems that our work recently was all about looking for lost pets, and hoped that there's more work that's suitable for Class 7 heading our way instead since looking for lost pets was more towards Class 2's style of working. 

Even though Kuki felt that it meant that the town was peaceful when there's no request, he wondered whether there won't be anything happening from now on. That would be a problem for Shiro, Tsubasa and "me", who still require many experiences in order to become a good detective. (Apparently, Kuki is already considered one with many years of experiences ^^:) Kuki had asked "me" to consider in becoming an official detective rather than just an assistant, telling "me" that "I" should be more confident of "my" skills and even encouraged "me" that he would accompanying "me" in finding out the answer on who do "I" want to be along the way~ (Thank you Kuki ^////^)

Suddenly, Kuki caught a whiff of scent in the air and realised that it was the scent of chocolate coming from the shopping streets. But apparently "I" can't smell that scent since my sense of smell is not as good as Kuki who was a Kenrouzoku ^^; (Kuki had completely forgotten that "I'm" not a Kenrouzoku, remarking that he had already mistaken "I" was one because my actions recently seems to resemble one... =w=" Really? o.O)

We decided to head to the shopping streets to find out more about the scent. Turns out that there was Valentine's fair being held over there now that Valentine's was soon approaching. (Kuki felt painful being reminded he's single when he saw that there're couples all around him ^^; )

Just then he noticed a pamphlet promoting an upcoming Valentine's contest. It sounds like an interesting contest as it was about making chocolate, and since "I" could cook, Kuki encouraged "me" to join, saying that "I" might end up winning if "I" joined the contest. He had thought that "I" would reject the idea as usually "I" didn't like to be in the limelight, but this time, however, "I" was all pumped up and excited to join, which made Kuki remarked that that was rare to see this reaction from "me". Kuki was happy for "me" nevertheless hearing that "I" actually wanted to join the contest on "my" own ^^

Reading up more on Valentine's contest,  we realised that the chocolate would be eaten and judged by the judges where one of the key points for judging would be the appearance of the chocolates. Kuki got pretty pumped up too in the end, telling "me" that since "I've" decided to join to contest, we should aim to win it!  (Turns out the Kuki was feeling quite bored as he was free recently, and thus he started to get excited about the contest as well ^^;) 

(So sweet that Kuki had offered to help "me" with the contest, and said that we would think of ideas together ^^ Thank you Kuki~)

Kuki mentioned that the Suzu-kun had made chocolates for the agency members during last year's Valentine's, and those chocolates were greatly praised for having a perfect appearance and taste. (But most of that chocolate ended up being taken over by Naoto... I guess he really doesn't like anybody else eating Suzu-kun's chocolate =w=")

Chapter 2: 甘~いサポート大作戰 / The Big Sweet~ Support Plan

The next morning, both Shiro and Tsubasa were called over by Kuki. As Shiro seems to be quite sleepy,  Tsubasa laughed as he asked him whether he had stayed up late to play games instead. He mentioned that Kuki had bought a game yesterday and asked Tsubasa to play together but Shiro said that he's only here to listen to Kuki on whether there are any new jobs for them. If there are no jobs, he'll return to his room. (Aww why don't you want to play with Tsubasa? TWT)

Suzu-kun joined them, which made Shiro wondered what was the matter Kuki was about to discuss with them. When Kuki finally made his appearance, Shiro scolded him that he was late, but Kuki replied back that he was on time and it was just the rest of them who were early XD Tsubasa was surprised that "I" wasn't coming, since he had expected that this meeting was something to do with Class 7 and Suzu-kun. (Why does it seem like Tsubasa is disappointed ^^;)

Kuki gave a weak smile and answered that the reason why they had gathered here together was to discuss a matter that was related to "me".  Shiro had wanted to leave once he realised that this meeting has nothing to do with work, but the others persuaded him to stay in the end. Kuki took out the pamphlet regarding the Valentine's Contest, which Suzu-kun had known about it. Naoto had suggested Suzu-kun participate in the contest, but unfortunately, there's work that Suzu-kun had to do on that day and thus he won't be able to make it for the contest.  (That was a good news for Kuki though, as he remarked that it's even better to have one less strong competitor XD)

Kuki announced to the others that "I" would be participating in the contest, which Shiro had initially thought that Kuki had forced "me" to participate saying that it's a good learning opportunity. But Kuki corrected him and informed them that "I" had decided to join the contest on "my" own this time, and suggested that they should try their best to support "me" since it was considered a rare opportunity for "me". 

Since Suzu-kun wasn't participating in the contest, Kuki wanted him to teach "me" about decorating and wrapping the chocolate, which the latter agreed immediately as he wanted to repay "me" for all the help "I've" given him when he was cooking in the past. The rest of Class 7 shall become "my" backup and assistant instead. (Tsubasa was abit too happy to help, even stating that he'll be a good runner for "my" sake ^^;)

Shiro voiced out that he had never agreed to help with the contest, and said that he's just going to stay here in the agency on standby until a job arrives. Suzu-kun tempted Shiro by asking him whether he wanted to help him taste the special hamburger which Suzu-kun had made, and in exchange Shiro would have to lend his help instead XD Since Shiro really likes hamburger very much, he agreed to help in the end ^^;

Kuki reminded them once again that though he's glad that they've all agreed to help,  it's not a must that they have to help all the time since ultimately their job as a detective was more important and should be given the priority when any work has arrived. He had wanted to help "me" even more when "I" told him that "I" wanted to try doing things on "my" own, and thus told the others that they should try to in ways that they can. This operation was then named as "Sweet~ Support Challenge"~!  But what Class 7 can do was helping with the shopping and to taste the chocolate actually, as they're not like Suzu-kun who was good at cooking. 

(Tsubasa felt happy thinking that he'll be able to eat a lot of chocolates made by "me"... Tsubasa, you just want to eat "my" chocolates, don't you? =w=")

Chapter 3: チョコの種類 / Types of Chocolate 

Suzu-kun and Shiro accompanied “me” on a shopping trip after that, and along the way, Suzu-kun asked “me” whether “I” was able to imagine what kind of chocolate “I” want to make for the contest. After explaining to him, he understood about “my” idea, advising “me” that “I” could make chocolates of different shapes using the moulds, and could also make beautiful decorations for them. He encouraged “me” that since “I” have a pair of good eyes, “I’ll” definitely be able to make chocolates that not only look nice, but taste delicious as well, and that “I” would definitely be able to win the contest. (Suzu-kun, you’re giving way too many compliments >////<)

We reached a shop, Shiro told us to head inside instead and that he’ll just wait for us here instead. Inside the shop, Suzu-kun remarked that Shiro was really someone who takes care of people well~ Even though it seems like he’s being forced to accompany us on this shopping trip, Suzu-kun told me that he sensed that Shiro just didn’t want to leave “me” abandoned and unattended somehow ^^ Suzu-kun seems to know this feeling very well based on his experience of talking with Naoto, who always seems to be not interested in anything at all usually. (Other than Suzu-kun that is ^^:) He mentioned that Naoto had played basketball with Tsubasa recently, and though he’s not interested and was just accompanying him initially, Naoto soon started sweating and taking the basketball match more seriously towards the end.  

We picked up the ingredients that we need, and since they’re just for practice sake, we decided to get three types of chocolates - Mik, bitter and white chocolates. We also decided to get all of the cooking utensils, and Suzu-kun asked “me” whether the new spatula he had seen in the kitchen was bought by “me”. But “I” didn’t know about it either, thus Suzu-kun wondered who was the one who had bought it. (Hmm... This would be a mystery “I” guess... )

After we’ve done our shopping, Suzu-kun realised that perhaps we had bought too much stuff, and decided to go get Shiro to help us with carrying all the groceries. 

(Shiro is actually really sweet when he asked to carry even the bags in the “my” hand, saying that this was why he had accompanied “me” on the shopping trip. Thank you Shiro... >/////<)

Suzu-kun asked Shiro whether he likes chocolate or not but turns out that he was neutral about them, though he felt that chocolates and Valentine’s were all boring to him. Suzu-kun wanted to REALLY know Shiro’s preference for chocolates though and started asking him questions whether milk chocolates or white chocolates are tastier to him. Shiro answered milk chocolate, but that was only because he had not tasted white chocolate before... Thus we offered him to eat white chocolate straight away XD Though initially Shiro said that he doesn’t need to, he realised that we had already opened the chocolate anyway and decided to eat it in the end if not it’ll be a waste XD

Suzu-kun decided to head to another shop before returning, and somehow Shiro was alright with it, telling “me” that as long as “I” want to go, he’ll just follow since he’s just accompanying “me” to take all the shopping bags. (Shiro seems like the best guy ever for helping with shopping T//////T)

 On our way back, Suzu-kun mentioned that there seem to be people among the judges who don’t like sweet stuff, and thus felt that it would be best to make chocolates that were delicious, but not too sweet to suit their tastes. 

Just then we came across a stall that sells Taiyaki at the park, where Suzu-kun went and bought a white chocolate flavoured Taiyaki to Shiro’s shock OWO” Suzu-kun explained that such food is created so that people who dislike white chocolate usually would find it easier and delicious to eat. He was good at inventing such ways of eating since it was an always a hard battle for him to make food that has something which Naoto dislikes to eat in it XD

Chapter 4: おいしいひととき / Delicious Moments

In the morning, Tsubasa woke "me" up. "I" had fallen asleep at the kitchen the earlier night, and since no one had come to woke "me" up until now, Tsubasa guessed that "I" must be working hard till really late into the night. He offered "me" some hot cocoa, saying that "I" must be feeling cold now since "I've" slept here for the night. Even though Tsubasa was impressed that "I'm" working hard for the contest, he also advised "me" to take care of "my" body, as everything would be a waste if "I've" gotten sick in the end. 

He realised that "I" had a kept a copy of notes that were used for researching chocolate, and asked to take a look at it. After realising that "I" had not decided what chocolate "I" should make for the contest, Tsubasa offered to think together, even though he admitted that he doesn't really know much about beautiful chocolate~ (Of course you can Tsubasa ^/////^)

"I" drank a sip of the cocoa and remarked that it tasted different than usual. This was then Tsubasa realised that he had added some chocolate to it as he thought that it can be something "I" could reference from. As cocoa is really sweet, Tsubasa thought that adding some bitter chocolate might fit well together. He wondered perhaps he had done something unneeded... (Aww it's okay Tsubasa.... *pats*)

Tsubasa told "me" that everyone had been talking about how "I" seem to be more pumped up than usual this time and wanted to ask why "I" had wanted to work so hard this time. As Tsubasa wasn't able to accompany "me" on "my" shopping trip yesterday, he wanted to help "me" out a lot today and asked whether he'll be able to offer any assistance. He suddenly remembered passing by a cafe that could be of help to "me" during his work yesterday and asked "me" whether "I" wanted to take a look at it today. (Is... is Tsubasa asking "me" out on a date? O////O) The two of us agreed to share our food since that would mean that we get to eat a lot more variety of chocolates. 

Over at the cafe, Tsubasa was looking through the menu and remarked that there's alot of chocolates to choose from. He pondered on what to choose and as there aren't any photos on the menu, he doesn't know what the name of the chocolate refers to. Tsubasa admitted that he had zero knowledge of chocolate even though he's great at eating them XD, and decided that he'll let "me" decide on which chocolate to order instead. 

We ended up ordering a whole table of chocolates, but "I" only took a little of everything. Turns out that "I" didn't want to eat too much since "I'm" afraid that "I'll" get fat. And thus Tsubasa told "me" to let him handle the eating as he can easily use up the calories from eating chocolate on playing basketball instead~

Tsubasa realised that one of the chocolates had alcohol in it, and remarked that there might be people who're allergic to alcohol or not used to it overall and thus alcoholic chocolate isn't recommended to be made for the contest. He admitted that though he was alright with drink alcohol (this is the part when I realised that Tsubasa is an adult after all ^^;), he isn't really good at eating alcoholic chocolate. (Kuki on the other hand, was a fan of alcoholic chocolate XD)

Upon realising that "I" aimed to make chocolates for people who aren't interested in sweet stuff, Tsubasa remarked that that must be difficult. He was worried that he may not be of help to "me" but when he knew that "I" was thankful towards him in bringing "me" to such a wonderful cafe, Tsubasa heaved a sigh of relief~

Chapter 5: みんなで作るチョコレート / The Chocolate Made By Everyone 

The next day, as what we’ve planned earlier on, Kuki and the rest would be helping “me” to make the first batch of chocolates for testing. “I” was worried when “I” didn’t see Shiro in the kitchen, but Kuki assured “me” not to worry since Shiro was just right outside the door looking over “me” in the shadow. Suzu-kun asked Shiro to stop hiding there and joined us, encouraging him that we need people who don’t have an interest in sweets as a person in giving advice, as Suzu-kun, Tsubasa and Kuki all have a sweet tooth. 

As Shiro unwillingly joined us, Kuki started giving out instructions on what everyone should do. Suzu-kun would be acting as “my” support, and Tsubasa would help to take anything that’s high up on the shelf, washing the utensils and also helping in retrieving anything nearby in the kitchen. (Tsubasa sounds busy ><”) Kuki and Shiro would be in charge of thinking about the recipe instead.

Tsubasa set off in retrieving all the utensils required, but in the midst of it, he tripped and bumped into “me”. (And that’s how we got this CG~ ^^)

He was worried and asked whether Suzu-kun and “me” are hit by the utensils when he fell onto us. Suzu-kun assured him that we’re alright, and in fact complimented Tsubasa for having quick reflexes as he had managed to catch hold of all the utensils before they even fell onto the floor. Tsubasa apologised for tripping and thanked “me” for comforting him ^^

As we continued in making the chocolates, Suzu-kun asked Tsubasa to help us by taking out the fruits from the fridge and laying it out to be used as decorations. When Tsubasa was done with his task, Suzu-kun came over to see what fruits he had put out on the table. Turns out there’s melon and... avocado? Suzu-kun remarked that he had read something on a foreign website that chocolate might goes well with avocado, and decided to give it a try in the end.

Kuki came over and complimented Tsubasa in doing a good job as an assistant. However, he looked at Shiro and complained that Shiro isn’t doing his task seriously at all, since in the meantime, Shiro had not given even an idea at all. Kuki had said, they require feedback from people who aren’t interested in sweet stuff, and thus it’s useless if Kuki thinks and give only his feedback. Reluctantly, Shiro started to think about what chocolates he might likes, and suggested white chocolate. Kuki remarked that white chocolates sound like a choice a guy would make when trying to pick up someone, and commented that guys should like milk chocolate instead. Shiro was pissed as he rebutted that he doesn’t understand why choosing white chocolate would mean that the guy was trying to pick up on the other party. (I don’t understand either ^^;) Kuki did apologise to Shiro in the end though XD

As the chocolates were done, Tsubasa was excited to try it, but Kuki stopped him and told him that he’s not the person suitable to taste the chocolate. Instead, he turned to Shiro and asked him to taste the chocolates instead, as Shiro was free and also someone who was not interested in chocolates much. (Lucky Shiro~! +W+)

Chapter 6: 試食会開催 / Opening of Food Testing

We also called Kotetsu and Kotaro to the living room, and after realising that they’re being treated to chocolates (which to them was considered really sweet stuff), Kotetsu asked whether “I’m” participating in Valentine’s Day contest. As “I” already have the guys from Class 7 to help “me” in the shopping, Kotetsu felt that he could not do much other than offering “me” moral support instead. Shiki came to the living room as he was being called, and upon seeing all of us gathering there, he had a bad premonition and wanted to leave XD Kuki quickly stopped him and explained that he needed them to help “me” to taste these chocolates and give feedback on them. He further on explained that these chocolates were what “I’ve” practised making today for the chocolate contest, which “I’ll” be participating. 

Shiki excused himself once again, stating that he’s the type of person who doesn’t eat chocolates at all, and said that chocolates are not good for dogs. Kuki gave a weak smile and told him that even if chocolates are not good for dogs, it doesn’t affect them being Kenrouzoku anyway ^^; After realising that Shiki doesn’t budge at all, Kuki turned to “me and told “me that unfortunately, Shiki doesn’t want to eat the chocolates made by “me” at all. This was then Shiki realised that “I” was in the room. He asked “me” not to hide over there and come out instead, and when he saw “my” disappointed expression, Shiki said that even if he doesn’t eat, there’s still Kotetsu and Kotarou who would help to taste the chocolates. Kotetsu and Kotarou agreed to the taste testing, though they warned that they can’t eat too much of the chocolates as they aren’t good for them.

Kuki explained that the theme of the chocolates made by “me” this time was for people who are not interested in eating sweet stuff and that the chocolates should make them want to eat them instead. In the end, Shiki also joined in for the taste testing, though he clarified that it wasn’t because h wanted to eat them, but because he felt that it would be fruitless trying to reject from doing it as Kuki was being too bothersome to him ^^: 

As the guys crowded around the chocolates, Kotetsu wondered if the chocolates were made by “me”, as he remarked that chocolates were made in the shape of oranges. Kuki was surprised that they did not know about chocolate fondue and wondered perhaps this was actually the normal reactions from people who aren’t interested in sweet treats at all. He explained what a chocolate fondue is and its toppings to the guys, and as the guys tried it out, they were surprised to find that the fruits match really well with the chocolate from the fondue~! 

Kuki next took out some rainbow chocolates, and like the name, these chocolates have seven colours on them, though the food colouring was safe to be eaten. Kuki was furious with Shiki, as he hasn’t given any feedback since just now when he tasting the chocolates. Turns out that the guys didn’t give much helpful feedback this time round, which made Kuki worried as he asked “me” what we should do now. Even though he didn’t give much feedback this time, Kotetsu offered to think more about chocolates so that he could provide some help later on. (Thanks Kotetsu~ OMG suddenly he seems so nice to the heroine now >////<)

Chapter 7: 延長戰 / Extended Challenge 

As we retreated back to the kitchen where Tsubasa and the others were located, Kuki told them that the chocolate tasting was harsh, but overall it was a good chance to learn about the different tastes of the guys. Even though the guys admitted that they were not interested in the chocolates, they still offered to help “me” out for the contest, to which Kuki remarked that they probably just want to support “me” very much. (Thank you guys T////T) 

Kuki cheered up and told “me” that it’s time for a revenge! As there were still time before the contest, Kuki told us that we had to put our heads together to think of another chocolate we could make to appeal to the judges. Tsubasa told “me” that there would probably be alot for “me” to improve on for the recipe so he would help by eating lots of chocolates and giving lots of feedback! XD (Tsubasa seems like he just want to eat the chocolates XD)

Tsubasa informed us that Shiro was thinking very hard about the recipe while Kiki and “I” were away carrying out the chocolate tasting in the other room, and Kuki told “me” that it seems like Shiro had something that he wanted to give it to “me”. That made Shiro abit flustered as he remarked that the two of them were making the atmosphere awkward for him ^^; He handed “me” a pile of notes, which Kuki peeked at and remarked that he had written a lot, and urged Shiro to explain what great ideas he had thought up to us. (I bet Kuki is just doing this to tease Shiro on purpose XD)

Kuki explained that his reason for getting Tsubasa and Shiro involved was also to train them to be an independent detective, and this training could always be done as part of their daily life. For example, they could climb the stairs when going shopping to build up their stamina~ And thus, Kuki felt that this could a training for them as a detective by helping “me” to make chocolates, to which Tsubasa guessed that perhaps Kuki was helping them to cultivate teamwork with one another. 

Shiro persuaded himself that what he’s going to do now was a training for him to explain the plan he had thought of with his team members, and thus started explaining the ideas he had thought for the chocolates. Kuki was impressed by his ideas, and complimented him, remarking that this had totally changed his impression of Shiro~ (Is that meant to be a compliment? ^^;) Tsubasa also praised Shiro too, though he suggested that perhaps we should just choose two of the ideas in order to reduce duplicates with other contestants. Kuki wanted to get Suzu-kun to help us, but he was gone as he was being called by Naoto to the lab just now. In the end, we decided to add in nuts to the chocolates and to use bitter chocolate which had a high amount of cocoa, since that type of chocolates would make people who were not interested in chocolates felt easier to eat them. 

Kuki told Shiro whether he felt good that the ideas he had thought of was being chosen in the end, and told him to remember this feeling for the future~ He complimented that Shiro had worked hard in thinking up an idea, but Shiro said that he’s not the one who had worked hard, referring to “me” instead being the person who had worked really hard for the contest. 

With the remaining ingredients, Kuki suggested that we make another batch of chocolates for taste testing. Tsubasa informed us that he had already washed all the utensils when waiting for us in the meantime so “I” could always start straight away~ (Tsubasa is efficient... OWO”) He felt glad as he remarked that he would be able to eat lots of chocolates made by “me” this year~ (I really think Tsubasa just really likes and wants to eat “my” chocolates XDD)

Chapter 8: 戰士の休息 / Warrior’s Break time

Later on, Suzu-kun returned and asked “me” if “I” wanted to use to use this mould, offering “me” one with beautiful shapes. But... he realised that “I” had fallen asleep in the kitchen. He remarked that “I” was sleeping really soundly that he can’t wake “me” up at all, and laughed when he realised that “I” had chocolates stain on “my” face too. Suzu-kun noticed the chocolate note on the table and decided to flip through it, commenting to himself as he read through how “I” tried to shave time off in the process as the contest had quite a short limited time to make the chocolates.  He was impressed by Kuki’s observations since even though the latter had never made any chocolates, his thoughts and observations were at a professional’s level. Suzu-kun laughed to himself and remarked that the chocolate recipe made by us was really interesting, and made him felt that he was reading a report actually. 

Suzu-kun thought to himself that he could already imagine how Class 7 were in passionate discussion just by looking at the notes written by us. It made him wanted to make chocolates with Naoto and Hinamori but felt that perhaps that would be too difficult. Suzu-kun wondered why “I” was working so hard for the contest, as he knew that “I” was really putting “my” heart in making the chocolates, he guessed that perhaps “I” was actually making the chocolates for someone... He tried to guess who could that “someone” is, but felt that “I” would be the one who would put in “my” heart for everyone’s sake instead ^^; (What can I say, I just love everyone? >////<) 

Just then, Shiki entered the kitchen grumbling he was hungry and asked Suzu-kun to cook some meat for him. Suzu-kun asked him to keep it down as “I” was asleep, which surprised Shiki as he wondered why “I” was sleeping here. “I” started sleep-talking suddenly, and Shiki wondered perhaps “I” was still making chocolates in “my” dream. The sleep-talking soon stopped, and Shiki continues remarking that “I” seems to look really satisfied in “my” dream as he looked at “my” sleeping expression. 

Shiki commented that “I” had made chocolates every day and chased him down to do some chocolate testing. He asked Suzu-kun whether it was that troublesome to make chocolates actually, to which he replied that even though the process of making chocolates isn’t that hard, it seems that “I” put in alot of “my” heart in the chocolates “I’ve” made for the contest, and Suzu-kun wondered that perhaps the contest was the reason why “I” was working so hard. 

(Turns out that we had also bought a lot of wrapping paper... that Shiki remarked that they had stacked together high up like a mountain.... ^^;)

Shiki smiled as he said that “I” had even accepted his feedback seriously, complimenting “me” that “I’m” really someone who had good manners. Suzu-kun replied that this was because the feedback of people who aren’t fond of chocolates was precious feedback to “me” ^^

Just then, Shiro appeared in the kitchen too, and Suzu-kun wondered perhaps Shiro was being lured here by the smell of his cooking~ (Since he was preparing food for Shiki anyway XD) Shiro replied that he was actually looking for “me” instead, and was surprised to find “me” asleep here, commenting that he had heard from Tsubasa that “I” had also fallen asleep here yesterday night. He told Suzu-kun to wake “me” up later on to let “me” sleep in “my” room before leaving the kitchen. Even though Shiro had wanted to find “me” to talk about work-related matters, he decided to talk to “me” about it tomorrow instead since “I’ve” already fallen asleep. (Shiro is actually being nice not to wake “me” up? OWO”)

Chapter 9: コンテスト開催 / The Start of the Contest

It was finally the day of the contest. Kuki brought “me” to the contest venue and was amazed to see that not only that the contest venue was huge, there’s alot of contestants too. “I” began to get nervous, to which Shiro dissed “me” that how am “I” going to continue if “I’ve” already gotten nervous in the beginning. Tsubasa informed “me” that the announcer had just called all the contestants to head towards the kitchen, and before “I” head towards there, Kuki encouraged “me” to have more confidence in myself and aim for victory. Class 7 would be seeing over “me” and supporting “me” over at the spectators' seats instead. 

(Shiro’s way of encouraging is... to urge “me” to head towards the kitchen quickly before “I” get disqualified? XD Tsubasa had to ask him to give more encouraging words instead XD)

As “I” left the guys and head towards the kitchen, Tsubasa remarked that “I” seems to be very nervous and he’s getting abit worried about “me”. (Aww~ >///<) Kuki also started to get nervous too and decided to calm himself down by looking through the pamphlet and double checking on the contest rules instead. The contest requested the contestants to make three different chocolates, and to miss out on anyone would be disastrous, so this is a very important key point of the competition. Since there’s nothing much the guys could do now, Kuki asked them to support “me” and started cheering for “me”.

However, they noticed that “I” seems to be behaving weirdly in the midst of the competition. Kuki suspected that “I’m” having some trouble and soon enough, “I” came running over to their side. Turns out that “I” was missing one of the utensils, and thus Kuki suggested “me” to try going towards the staff and see if “I” could borrow it. But “I” replied to him that the staff told “me” that there are no more extra utensils, so Kuki quickly called “someone” who had just finished their work to bring the utensil over here at this moment. That “someone” was Suzu-kun, and Kuki was confident that Suzu-kun would definitely not bring the wrong utensil to the contest venue definitely XD He told “me” that Suzu-kun would be coming in 20 minutes, so he hoped that in the meantime, “I’ll” try to do what “I” can in making the chocolates. 

Soon Suzu-kun arrived with the utensil, and the utensil went through a check and was approved by the staff. After getting disinfected, “I” could finally use it! As they realised that it seems that a lot of contestants do not have enough utensils, Kuki wondered whether they should suggest to the contest organizers to extend the time limit of the competition. Kuki ultimately did communicate with them and Tsubasa was impressed by his skills, remarking that Kuki felt like a policeman in a drama~ XD 

Now that the utensils were all prepared, and the time limit of the competition got extend, Kuki hoped that nothing else would happen later on... (Tsubasa reprimanded Kuki for saying this, as that would just raise a flag that something would indeed happen for sure later on XD)

Chapter 10: 一難去ってまた一難 / One Obstacle After Another

As they continued to watch “me” prepare the chocolates for the contest, Kuki noticed that “my” hands were trembling and hoped that “I” didn’t end up dropping them. As “I” needed to make three chocolates in total, “I” actually need a large amount of chocolate, so wasting any would be very costly. 

Kuki started cheering for “me”, encouraging “me” that even if “I” failed, they would try to help so everything would be alright and that “I” should calm down and take “my” time in making them. He urged Shiro to cheer for “me” too, telling him that “I” would definitely be happy to know that he’s cheering for “me”. But Shiro refused to, so Kuki remarked that if “I” lost the contest, he would deem it as Shiro’s fault (for not cheering at all XD) and said that he doesn’t want to see “me” lose because of Shiro. 

Tsubasa told Shiro that “I’m” looking over at them now, and Shiro took this chance to cheer for “me” to work hard. However, it was too soft that “I” was cupping “my” hands to “my” ears straining to listen, and thus Kuki suggested that they all cheer loudly together, remarking that it may be embarrassing for him since he’s not at the age to do such things anymore ^^: But it turned out that none of the members cheered loudly at that moment other than Shiro, which made him flustered and pissed off as he realised that he’s being trolled by Kuki XD However, that made “me” really happy that “I” smiled in return at them ^^

The competition continued on, and Suzu-kun remarked that even though “I” was really nervous earlier on, after hearing their cheers, “my” actions had gotten alot smoother. Things were proceeding smoothly along, and Suzu-kun remarked that the chocolates made by “me” were the prettiest ones that “I’ve” ever made till now, and felt that “I” stand a really good chance in gaining victory at this rate. They noticed that “I” was really satisfied with how the chocolates turned out to be, as “I” smiled and seems to really enjoy “myself” very much as the contest.

Just then, Shiro noticed someone approaching “me”. It was another contestant who was making chocolates next to “me”, and she had dropped part of her chocolates on the floor just now. “I” ended up giving her part of the chocolates “I” as about to use, which made Kuki worried since that would mean that “my” third chocolate would be really small as “I’ve” given away too much of “my” chocolates. Shiro wasn’t pleased as he remarked that “I’m” showing “my” kind-hearted side at such a weird timing now. 

As the guys could see that “I” do not have enough chocolates, Kuki suggested the guys look for more chocolates for “me”. Suzu0-kun asked “me” to keep calm and continue melting the remaining chocolates “I” have to make the third one, assuring “me” that they would find more chocolates for “me” to use.

Chapter 11: 力を合わせて / Putting All Strengths Together

The guys managed to get in contact with Kotarou, who had received some chocolates from his client and was able to give it to “me” to use them. He and Kotetsu even came to the event venue personally to hand over the chocolate to us~ (Thank you Kotarou ><”) They remarked that they’ve gotten these high-class chocolates as a reward for acting as the bodyguards for an important person. (Somehow Rudo approved of it, I guess Rudo just likes sweet treats a lot that he doesn’t mind getting chocolates instead of money for a job ^^;) Tsubasa had noticed that they had their walkie-talkie with them, and wondered perhaps they had come over in the midst of their job, but they assured him that they had just finished their work when they’ve gotten Kuki’s call and came over. Kotetsu mentioned that it was Rudo who had told the entire class 3 to help support “me” in making the chocolates ^^ (Kuki even remarked that Rudo’s words sound like he’s a sponsor ^^;)

(Kotarou is just glad that he was able to fulfil Rudo’s request. This guy just admires Rudo too much XD)

With the extra chocolates safely arrived, “I” was able to proceed in making the third chocolate for the contest. Even though the chocolates was completed, there was still wrapping and decorating left to do, but looking at the time, Tsubasa mentioned that there seems to be enough time for “me” to complete doing it. Kotarou and Kotetsu ended up staying for the rest of the contest, as they were interested in knowing the results, and wanted to report about it to Rudo as well~ 

(I just love how Tsubasa was being all encouraging when he cheered for “me”~ ^////^)

The atmosphere at the event venue started to get intense as the audience grew quiet. Kuki wanted to ask Suzu-kun for his comments, but he wasn’t around now... (I think Suzu-kun was still outside elsewhere looking for chocolates and yet to return? O.O) Turned out there was an online voting for the contest, where the photos of the chocolates were being viewed by the users online, and they would vote whichever they think looks the most delicious! (That... sounds kinds of unfair ><”) Tsubasa noticed that the contestants had all started to inform people they knew to vote for them, thus Kuki proposed that they vote for “me” too. However, Tsubasa felt that only just them voting might not be enough, and suggested to get the entire detective agency to help as well~

Chapter 12: 頑張���理由 / The Reason for Working Hard 

"I’ve” contacted Kuki, requesting them to vote for “me”, and seeing that “I’ve” specially requested for help. Kuki decided to ask all of the members of the detective agency to support “me”. Even though Tsubasa worried that some of them may not be able to as they were in the midst of working, but Kuki assured him that their work today was not as serious so hopefully they could spare a few minutes to vote for “me”. He ended up using all channels to contact the members, which Kotetsu remarked that the last time they’ve used all channels of communication was the time when they’re capturing Beto ^^; Kotarou said that he would follow Rudo’s instructions (to support “me”), and since “I’ve” requested for help, he would assist “me” in contacting the other members~

(Here’s Kuki’s message to the other members of the detective agency): Currently, Momo (”my” name in this game) is in the midst of participating the chocolate contest, which I guess most of you would have known by now, as there was always a scent of chocolate in the agency building for the last few days. But now, there’s currently an online voting for the contest, and as I hope that she would win this contest, I wished all of you could submit a vote for her.

He sent off the message via the walkie-talkie, giving a weak smile and commented that perhaps he would get scolded by Shu for this later on ^^; However, Shu and the others all began sending replies to that message, telling Kuki that they’ve voted for “me”. (Thank you guys! T//////T)

(As the messages were really sweet and heartwarming, I decided to translate them~ Pardon for any mistakes since I’m not that good at literal translating yet.)

Shu: “This is Shimada, I’ve received this request and had voted for Momo. Over and out.”

Senri: “Momo had been working hard and practising making chocolates till really late in the night. I’ll vote for her as I wanted her hard work to be fulfilled in reality.”

Rui: “Mamiya here, and I’ve just voted. In addition, I’ve read that the winner would get a prize reward, and thus look forward to it.” (Why does it sounds like Rui just want a part of the prize money =w=“)

Hijiri: Of course I’ve voted for Momo~ As long as I pressed this button will do right? Ah, hmmm? Why is the device seems to be... (It sounds like his device is being weird D:)

Yu: “Hijiri had broken the computer~! Ah... am I connected via the walkie-talkie? Erm... Ah... I... I’ve voted! (Yu sounds adorable stammering over his words XD)

Ryohei: “Hehehe, Hijiri, you’ve got to compensate for it. (Compensate for the broken computer ^^;) I’ve voted on my smartphone! And, my granny would be helping to support as well!”

Yanagi: “Isn’t communicating through here not allowed actually? ... Ah... I’ve just seen the photos now and honestly feel that they’re really good, so I’ll vote for it.”

Chihiro: “I thought it’s food that I didn’t know about, but turns out it was “chocolate” (as written in kanji). Since it was a request by Momo, I’ll follow it. Bo-chi~ (Sound effect of pressing a button XD)”

Rudo: “This is Sera. I've seen Momo’s work. I... thought the second chocolate looks the most... It’s to my liking, and thus I’ll vote for it. (Not sure whether he meant most delicious or cutest. And did he vote for someone’s chocolate too? OWO”)”

Sousuke: “Wooooh, I’ve voted! The chocolates look really delicious! Oh? Wah, I’ve stopped my nose from bleeding! Yes, I’ll head towards the event venue right now and eat the chocolates! (Sousuke sounds really excited, though I hope he takes care of his nose? ^^;)”

Kaname: “...... Hime (Princess), I feel really apologetic as I wanted to come to the venue so much actually...... At least, please let my feelings to be conveyed to the venue through my vote!”

Mashiro: “This is bad (in a way he means this is good actually XD), I’ve seen the chocolates~ I feel that this is definitely a chocolate that seems “Momo-like”, and would vote for it. The master and the guests there have also voted for it. (Thanks~! ^^)”

Ran: “Momo-chan’s chocolates were really adorable~ Of course, I’ve definitely voted for it. Let’s exchange Valentine’s chocolate!”

Izana: “Fufufu, it’s me. Theobroma... To lay my hands on chocolates, a food said to be eaten by the gods, what a crime for me. But, this is why I’ve to judge it I guess. Fufu~” (I had no idea what he’s trying to express =w=“)

Haruki: “Sorry, I’ve forgotten which ones are Momo’s chocolates....... But, I think this should be hers so I’ve voted for it. I’m sure I’ve got it right......” (I really hope you voted the correct ones, Haruki ><”)

Naoto: “Neh, why are you guys getting Suzu-kun run about by yourselves? I have work to do so I can’t go to the contest... Ah, I’ve voted, anyway, the other chocolates don’t look good in comparison.” (You don’t have to so bad to diss others’ chocolates, Naoto =w=“)

Suzu-kun: “I’m heading back to the venue right now! Since I’m not sure I’ll get back in time, I’ll vote now instead. Other than the looks of the chocolates, I’m more interested to know about the taste~”

Hinamori: ”I’ve seen... the chocolates... What interests me the most... is that the lines on top of the chocolates seem to look like arteries and veins? Hyaaaa, this is great just thinking about Momo’s veins - “ (And his message got shut off XD Whew! Just before he said anything that’s going to sound creepy ^^;)

Shiki: “I’ve seen the chocolates. They look different from the ones you offered for tasting. Since I’ve voted for it, please convey the message to Hyoko (lit. Little Chick = “me”) that she had worked hard.” (Aww, Shiki’s message sounds really heart-warming~)

Toki: “Are we aiming for victory through bulk voting by the agency? Since this is a word order I’ll follow it...... I’m heading back to my work.” (Toki sounds like he’s just voting for the sake of voting ^^;)

Leo (my adorable admin staff~): “Big sis and everyone, you’ve all worked hard for the contest! I’ve definitely voted, so please take good care and be careful when coming back!”

Kuki was impressed that every member of the agency who wasn’t here at the venue had all gotten in contact through the walkie-talkie, to which Tsubasa remarked that this was because everyone had thought well of “me”. At this time, the judges had also finished their food tasing of the chocolates, which Kuki felt that they were really fast in doing it XD

As only three of the contestants would get to win something in the contest, Kotarou felt that it’s a small opening as there were many contestants overall. Kuki believed that “I” would definitely get 1st place, but “I” ended up getting 2nd place instead. Even though he felt abit disappointed about the results (since he really wanted “me” to get first), upon seeing “my” smiling face, Kuki felt that it would do as long as “I’m” satisfied~ 

Kuki was surprised when he realised that “I” wanted to get second place in the first place, as the prize reward was chocolates enough for a year~! They then realised that the reason why “I” wanted to join the contest was that “I” wanted enough chocolates for everyone at the detective agency. Tsubasa had already known about this as he remarked that he had secretly asked “me” about it, and felt that it was really something that “I” would have thought about~ (So Tsubasa and “me” have a secret moment going on? OWO”)

In the end, Kuki was the one who ate the remaining chocolates which “I’ve” made for the contest. He commented that they were really delicious and that he could feel all “my” love in it as well. As these chocolates were made for the contest this time, he asked “me” whether “I” could make chocolates for his sake next time instead >////<

(Till the end, Shiro was just acting as a person who helped to carry heavy stuff ^^; He asked “me” to pass the chocolates which “I’ve” just won to him to carry since “I” can’t walk carrying all of them anyway XD)

And that’s it for the event story~! I think this is probably one of my favourites out of all the event stories since it’s valentine’s theme plus I get to see my favourite Class 7 together with Suzu-kun which is a favourite of mine as well~

This event was one I remembered working very hard to get Tsubasa’s 5* card, which has a really sweet and adorable character story. I’ll translate that in the future after I’m done with all the event stories and side stories since everyone should know more about Tsubasa~ >////<

#VIIDOG CODE #event story #summary #translation #otome game #vd:event #vd:translation #class 7 #suzumori #kotetsu #kotarou #shiki

[momorabu]

04.11.2017

Viidog Code Event Story - J/Lからの招待状 / Invitation from J/K (Jack-o-Lantern)

Happy belated Halloween! Was actually planning to finish typing this last week in preparation for Halloween, but welp... I couldn’t make it ><” Though it’s a few days late, I hope everyone was still in the mood for some Halloween even stories? XD

The stars these time was Class 5, and also members from Class 7 and Class 2 would also make an appearance. Since I really like all 3 classes, this was a joy to read them ^////^ (Especially because I really like Halloween as well~!)

As always, the summary of the story can be found below. Translation may not be 100% accurate due to my poor Japanese skills~

Chapter 1: 待ちに待ったハロウイン / The long awaited Halloween

One day, “I” had taken something to Naoto to request him to analyze it for a case. However, Naoto rejected “my” request, saying that it was “over the business hours and that he had already closed the shop” XD He claimed that he was busy... waiting for Suzu-kun who was out for a shopping trip. Since Hinamori had also went out of the lab for his own reasons, Naoto felt that it would unfair for him to be the only one remaining and working. (I would have felt bad too if I were him ^^;)

Suddenly, Naoto told “me” to unbutton the top button of “my” shirt, saying that it would be nicer to see “my” beautiful collar bone that way. (Okay... seriously speaking this was kind of random and abit creepy.... ) He started to get impatient and worried for Suzu-kun when he realised that he had still yet to return. “I” guessed that him returning later might be related to the Halloween events being held at the streets, and that made Naoto pissed off, since he felt that such celebrations are redundant and in fact... their costumes were too half-done for Naoto’s taste. He remarked that usually people would dress up as a witch, dracula or a werewolve, which he was fine with it but hope that those people would put in more efforts in their outfits, since most of them just ended up looking really cheap that Naoto felt bothered by it. (But unfortunately he can’t do anything about it... =w=“)

Just then, Suzu-kun came back, and commented that he was surprised by the amount of people and “monsters” on the streets. It seems that alot of people had dressed up and roamed the streets at night even before the day of Halloween itself. This made Naoto’s mood dropped even further as he grumbled that he’s not going to step out onto the streets till Halloween is over. He rejected “my” request once again, and told Suzu-kun to prepare his meal quickly instead as Naoto’s stomach was already growling with hunger. 

Suzu-kun scolded Naoto for rejecting “me” and asked to take a look at what was being requested to do. Looking through the tasklist, Suzu-kun said that this was actually more suitable and easier for Hinamori to do it. Naoto said that it was best that they reject this work now since Hinamori had went out and had yet to return currently. Suzu-kun wondered perhaps Hinamori had went to  participate in the Halloween events, remarking that he had saw alot of zombies which Hinamori would really love to see just now, and guessed that Hinamori might even ended up acting as one of them actually. 

Luckily, Hinamori came back at this moment, and accepted the request, telling “me” that he would try to finish it today as the deadline was tomorrow. He was busy with the preparations for Halloween Party recently, and was really excited just thinking of what to prepare, for example... bloody neck cakes, eye balls soup OWO” He even asked us to request what we would like for the decorations and menu too. Even though Naoto doesn’t like gore stuff as he found it disgusting, he didn’t like the idea of a cheap looking party even more, and thus hope that Hinamori would make a great party in the end ^^; 

Hinamori requested Naoto and Suzu-kun to help him out, but Naoto rejected him saying that it’s too troublesome. However, when Hinamori said sadly that he was counting on Naoto’s sense for the decorations display, Naoto agreed to lend him a hand, stating a condition that if he had found something to be “ugly”, that object would not be allowed to be displayed at the venue. (How could you reject Hina’s sad face here~ T////T)

Suzu-kun told Hinamori that he could also asked for “my” help here now that “I’m” here, which Hinamori was hesistant about, since he want “me” to know nothing about the party since it would be more interesting to see “me” being scared by the traps and tricks he had put up at the venue. He agreed to letting “me” help in the end and had finished with analyzing the data in the midst of the conversation, which impressed Suzu-kun greatly since it was rare that he had seen Hinamori completed a task that quickly and guessed that he must have felt pretty pumped up now. Hinamori answered that he was looking forward to not just the food, but also the “events” which he had planned to carry out at the party. 

Hinamori gave a little hint to us that he had planned to get a “secret” guest for the party, but denied saying more about it even when Naoto threatened that he won’t help out until Hinamori said who was the secret guest. Naoto proposed that he would choose the outfits for everyone at the party, by referencing to how the decorations would look like at the venue to fit in overall. Hinamori agreed to it, since he wanted everyone’s outfit to match in the party too. Naoto said that it was a special case this time that he had volunteered to help, as he doesn’t want to be take advantage of for his skills in the future. Suzu-kun felt that Naoto should make full use of his good fashion sense though, and said that other than Halloween, Naoto should also helped out with the outfits co-ordination and decorations for winter as well. (Isn’t it too early? We’re still at Halloween ^^:)

Hinamori had some requests for Suzu-kun in regards to the food menu, as he wanted him to make some pumpkin pudding and gratin,and asked “me” if there’s anything which “I” wanted to request as well. “I” suggested pumpkin pie to Suzu-kun, and he agreed that it’s a great dish and started looking forward to making it in the end. Hinamori also started to look forward to the Halloween Party, wondering whether the secret guest would be able to make an appearance in the end~ 

Chapter 2: お菓子泥棒のウワサ / The Rumors About The Candy Thief

The next morning, “I” was carrying a large sack of items in the living room when “I” was surprised by the sudden appearance of Hijiri. He noticed that the sack which “I” was carrying seems to be very heavy, and offered to carry it for “me”. “I” told Hijiri that the sack had contained the decoration items and tiny props to be used for the Halloween Party, and he offered to carry it for “me” to the venue, as an apology from him for scaring “me” just now.

Hijiri said that it maybe unexpected for others, but he was actually really strong. “I” answered that it’s not that unexpected actually (seeing how large Hijiri is actually ^^;), which Hijiri was surprised by “my” answer since Yanagi had always asked him to be more independent and reliable. He asked “me” to feel free to approach him if “I” ever need his help to carry any heavy stuff in the future ^^ In return for his help. Hijiri asked “me” to accompany him in welcoming Yu back at the entrance of the agency, which “I” agreed to. 

We went outside of the agency to wait for Yu to return from school. Even though Hijiri was initially, he was glad when he sees that Yu finally appeared, and commented  that he looks cute while waving his hands and running over here that he even took a photo of Yu. When Yu came to us, he was angry at Hijiri for taking his photo without his permission again~ But, when he heard that “I” had found him to be very adorable, he decided to forgive Hijiri about it and said that this would be a special case that he let it off~ (Thank you Yu, I think Hijiri would appreciate it.)

Hijiri said that he was worried about Yu whether he would be able to get home by himself when there’s alot of passerbys in the streets dressing up as monsters for the Halloween Event. Yu was angry and rebutted that of course he could come back by himself since he wasn’t scared of the monsters at all. However, he was scared when he saw someone dressed up in a scary outfit and hid behind us, asking “me” whether the “monster” had gone away. After knowing that it’s alright now to come out, Yu admitted that he was shocked by their appearance, and wondered why do those passerbys like to put on such scary outfits, since he would prefer more adorable outfits instead. 

Yu told us that he had heard about an interesting rumour at school today, and asked us if we’re interested to hear about it. He started excitedly pulling “my” arm as we went indoors, with Hijiri smiling and telling Yu that “I” won’t run away even if he doesn’t pull on my arm XD

We went into Cyan to get some drinks, and Yu asked Hijiri to order for him an icecream soda. He was glad to get a really big scoop of icecream, and told Hijiri to thank the shop master on his behalf. Hijiri heed to it, though he gave a weak smile and told Yu that he should thank the master personally himself instead the next time. (Yu is just using Hijiri as his mouth piece to communicate with others here ^^;)

Yu excitedly shared with us the rumour which he had heard today at school - A robber had appeared at the shopping streets! The robber was someone who had dressed up as a jack-o-lantern, and would only snatch candies and sweet treats away from the passerbys. Yu found that to be weird and said that the rumour had spread that perhaps the robber was the real jack-o-lantern instead actually. Hijiri explained that the jack-o-lantern was someone who would be able to travel to the heaven and hell, and was someone who was always passing around in the two worlds and the human worlds. However, if the robber was indeed the real jack-o-lantern, Hijiri would find that to be scary to be honest. (I hope it isn’t true too ^^;)

Moving onto another topic, Yu asked us on what outfits we’re going to wear for the Halloween, and told us that his friends had recommended an outfit to him, saying that he would definitely looks good in it. Hijiri suggested that Yu sent this outfit design to Naoto as a request to him, since this year’s Halloween outfits would be prepared by him actually. Even though Yu wanted to dress up in an outfit that looks much more cooler (like a vampire or a werewolves), he knew that we wanted to see him in a cute outfit and decided to dress in that style in it. He suggested that perhaps Hijiri could dress up as a priest, since he was gentle like one and if he put on a black cloack, Yu could hide inside it.

“I” wanted to dress up as a sheet ghost and Yu said that it’s not allowed to suddenly scare him over there. He would get angry about it if it happens as he wanted to be a “good kid” in front of the others, and this might ended up ruining his image. Hijiri told Yu that he would protect him, but would also protect “me” either which makes Yu unhappy since Hijiri as a priest, isn’t supposed to help a monster (me). Hijiri smiled and said that it’s best that everyone gets along well together instead~

Chapter 3: 街はきなから百鬼夜行 / Hyakki Yagyō At The Streets 

At night, “I” accompanied Kuki for a trip to the candy store to buy some candies, and he remarked that it had been a long time since he had went to buy some candies, since the last time it happened was when he was in grade 5 in elementary school. He was glad that “I” had knew where to buy candies at a cheaper price, and thus we decided to buy some butter as requested by Suzu-kun at a cake shop before ending our shopping trip. 

Walking along the streets, Kuki was impressed by the cosplay of the passerbys who had dressed up for Halloween, and said that it seems that the citizens here were all looking forward to Halloween very much. 

Shiro had accompanied us as well on the shopping trip, but had a glum expression on his face since he was the one who was entrusted with carrying the large amount of candies which we had bought. He wondered why do we have to come out to do our shopping trip in the night time, and Kuki thought that perhaps Shiro was just being afraid of the “monsters” that he might even cry about it. Shiro denied that he’s scared (of course XD), and said that he just dislikes being treated as a slave to help out for the shopping trip, since he doesn’t understand why he had to be involved when Kuki was the one who had volunteered to go for the shopping trip. Kuki just smiled and told Shiro to treat it as a training for weight lifting instead since Shiro was quite free anyway.

Kuki wondered why Shiro seems to be more irritated than usual, and guessed that perhaps he was pissed by all these horror decorations that was being hung up. Shiro wanted to deny that he’s scared again, but he was shocked by someone wearing a horror outfit that he stopped mid-sentence instead. Kuki laughed at Shiro’s reaction, and suggested Shiro to dress up for Halloween instead, since he might not feel scared anymore and may even enjoy the event even more~

As there was a shop nearly which sells Halloween outfits, Kuki suggested that we take a look at it as well. Shiro told Kuki that he would fit well in a devil outfit (since he’s one XD), but Kuki said that he doesn’t feel that he’s much a devil, even though there was a time that he really admired black magic in the past. He was pissed when Shiro dissed him about his past, and threatened to reveal Shiro’s dark past too  (I wonder what dark past that Shiro has... +W+)

Kuki saw that there was more than one designs for the devil’s accessories, and suggested to “me” that the two of us get one of each design for a couple look together. But Shiro discouraged us from getting it, telling us that Naoto would be preparing the outfits for us. That made Kuki felt abit disappointed as he had found the accessories to be really adorable. (Did... Did Shiro just cockblocked Kuki or something...?)

Kuki looked around the shop, and suggested to Shiro that he’s suitable to dress up as a Frankenstein. Just then, a woman shouted that a pumpkin man had appeared and stole her cake! Shiro and Kuki quickly ran to chase after the robber, and told “me” to talk to the lady to understand what had happened.

The two of them chased the robber until they reached the dark alleys. Kuki told Shiro that the two of them would split up and try to trap the robber from both sides. Kuki was glad that their plan had worked but when they’re going to close in on the robber to capture him... he suddenly jumped up onto the wall and escaped from there. Kuki asked Shiro if he had managed to take a look at how the robber had looked like, but other than his body build seems to be of a man’s and was wearing a pumpkin head that covers his face, there wasn’t any clues that they could determine who the pumpkin man could be.

The two of them returned back to the shopping streets to inform the woman that they had failed to catch the pumpkin man. But rather than feeling sad and disappointed, the woman seems to be really happy to be robbed by the pumpkin man. Kuki and Shiro learned about the rumour regarding the pumpkin man possibly being the jack-o-lantern, and Kuki guessed that perhaps the woman was happy since it feels like a moment that she had actually met a popular person. Kuki wondered whether this was a promotion plan organised by a certain company, but it feels that the victims were Innocent passerbys who knew nothing about the plan. They had also guessed that perhaps the robber was just someone who robs for fun in Halloween, but even if so, Shiro doesn’t think that the thief would try that hard to escape when he was almost being caught by them. (Eh? So you’re suggested that the robber should just give up and get caught by you guys? ^^:)

In the end, Kuki proposed that we should take care that our candies doesn’t get stolen and buy some butter before heading back.

Chapter 4: カプ男に魅了された街 / The Street Which Was Captivated By The Pumpkin Man

By the next morning, the news of the pumpkin man had spread all over the town and a video had been uploaded and spread like wild fire in the internet. Kuki could be seen chasing after the pumpkin man on the video, but since the video was taken by someone using his/her phone, the video quality was quite bad that one can’t even see properly who was it on the video itself ^^; 

Hijiri, Kuki and “I” gathered around Naoto to watch the video together, and Kuki remarked that he had no idea that he actually look this good-looking while running. (Erm... you can’t even see it’s you on the video Kuki... ^^;)

Someone had watched the video and sent in a request at the detective agency, asking them to catch the pumpkin man, as this would helped in making the halloween event even much more livelier on the streets.

The few of us had gathered together to meet up with the event organiser who had sent in the request to catch the pumpkin man. Naoto grumbled that he had to head off soon to do some shopping for the special menu which Suzu-kun had requested for the halloween party, but before he even finished his sentence, another incident occurred where yet another victim was targeted by the pumpkin man. There was already news of the pumpkin man stealing from a victim 5 minutes and that news had became a hot topic quickly. Naoto checked his phone and said that it was reported that the incident had happened at the train station, but it would be too late by the time they rushed there now. Since the robber had the same features like what Kuki had described, Naoto deduced that all these robberies were committed by the same person.

When we reached the venue and met up with the event organiser, he was very excited and said that it was hard to look for Kuki after he had watched the video (since his face wasn’t even shown on the video ^^;), but was glad that he had managed to locate him in the end. The organiser thought that it would be interesting for the Halloween event if they’ve caught the pumpkin robber who had caused a commotion at the event. Since the detective agency agreed to take on this request, he immediately wanted to put up the news as a challenge to the pumpkin man - Detective VS  Pumpkin Man, making it seems like it was a event programme. 

The event organiser wanted to get the citizens to help out to take notice of the pumpkin man as well, and thus asked Kuki whether he had noticed any special features that he could put it on his posters. Such information were provided by Kuki: The pumpkin man is an adult skinny man, but other than there wasn’t anymore information which Kuki could provide. (Why did I feel that the event organiser seems more like the detective here demanding more information ^^;) Hijiri asked Naoto whether he could analyze the video, and thus Kuki took this chance to promote about Class 5′s analyzing skills to the event organiser. 

As the news of the pumpkin man appearing in the streets had became very popular, the event organiser guesed that there would be many people cosplaying as the pumpkin man now, and wanted more information about the real pumpkin man in case they captured the wrong guy. Since Naoto had brought along his laptop, Kuki urged him to start analyzing the video now. Naoto tried to analyze the video and extract the sound from it in order to identify the voice of the pumpkin man, however, he can’t due to the man’s voice being muffled by the pumpkin head he had worn, and alot of noise had been captured together with the video.

The good news was, on analyzing the video, Naoto realised that the man’s right arm was more muscular, and deduced that he was probably someone who had used his right arm regularly for extreme sports, for example, a tennis player who used his right arm.

Kuki assured the event organiser that them being the D.O.G detective agency would definitely capture the pumpkin man. 

Chapter 5: おとり搜查は甘い味 / Sweet Scent Of The Decoy Operation

The detective agency decided to act as decoy to lure the pumpkin man out. However, when we arrived on the streets, we noticed that there were alot of people carrying candies and sweet treats on the streets, and guessed that many of the passerby had done that on purpose in hope that the pumpkin man would steal from them. (What... =w=“)

Hijiri was worried about Yu, since he was the one acting as the main decoy carrying a cake box. Yu said that Hijiri was worrying too much and assured him that he would do his best in being a decoy, adding on that if he had let Hijiri hold onto the box instead, the pumpkin man might get scared and won’t steal from him instead. (And that would foil their plan ^^;) Yu mentioned that his classmates had their candies being stolen from the pumpkin man before and they weren’t hurt at all, and thus assured us that everything would be alright.

Yu asked Hijiri to hold onto his hand and also asked to hold onto “mine” too, saying that the three of us would act like we were going on a shopping trip happily together. We passed by a donut house, and Yu noticed that they had a pumpkin flavour available just for Halloween. Since both Hijiri and Yu noticed that “I” had worked really hard in juggling both “my” work and preparing for the Halloween party, Yu decided to reward “me” with a donut, saying that this was a special treat from him since “I’m” his junior~ (Aww~ Yu was so cute and sweet here >////<)

We walked till the square of the shopping streets, but there were still no sight of the pumpkin man. Yu hoped that the pumpkin man would show himself more easily, but Hijiri guessed that it would be hard since he was a robber afterall ^^; (I don’t think a robber would make an appearance that obvious to gain attention on himself ^^;) 

Just then, the pumpkin man appeared, and demanded Yu to hand over the cake box to him. However, instead of heeding to the pumpkin man’s words, Yu hid behind Hijiri instead (due to his shyness). Hijiri told him that he should not hide behind him, and decided to take over the cake box to pass them to the pumpkin man. There was actually a GPS being installed on the cake box in order for them to trace the robber, but the robber soon returned the cake box to them, saying that he doesn’t want a “fake” before escaping once again. Yu mentioned that he had noticed that the pumpkin man had peeked into the cake box and then made a u-turn to return the box. Turns out the pumpkin man would only steal candies and sweet treats and nothing else, that Yu wondered whether the person was really like a real jack-o-lantern. (I’m more curious in what they’ve put in the cake box if it’s not a cake though.... =w=“)

In the end, Hijiri proposed that we stopped our decoy operations for now and changed our plan before heading out again in the afternoon. Yu was interested in how the preparation for the Halloween Party were coming along, and suggested that we head to Cyan to take a look at it when we head back.

However, when we head to Cyan, there were no decorations being put up yet, and since Hinamori was there, Hijiri asked him about it. Hinamori answered that because he had wanted to make it a surprise for us, he planned to only put up the decorations on the day of the party itself. He was here at Cyan today to think about the layout for the decorations, and also offered Yu a coin to look at. But, he also mentioned that the coin was a cursed coin, which scared Yu really badly as he cried for “me” to help him and whining that Hinamori was being mean to him ^^;

Chapter 6: おとり搜查は苦い味 / Bitter Scent Of The Decoy Operation

In the evening, we carried out yet another round of decoy operation again to lure out the pumpkin man. This time the members were Kuki, Shiro and “me”. Shiro was in low spirits and unmotivated to carry out the operation, that Kuki had to threatened him that he would made him cosplay now if he doesn’t listen to his orders ^^; Kuki suggested that “I” stayed in the middle with Kuki and Shiro by “my” side as we made our rounds, since there’s alot of people in the streets now and he’s worried that “I” might get lost. 

Kuki remarked that the pumpkin man seems to be quite a gentleman, since he doesn’t steal anything at all other than the candies and sweet treats, and had not harm anyone at all. He deduced that maybe the pumpkin man was related to the event organiser (working in cahoots), since the event organiser really love Halloween and tricks like this. There’s a possibility that the event organiser would reveal that they were the ones who had planned this and gave away all the candies which they’ve stolen after the event, and the request sent by them to request the detective agency to catch the pumpkin man was also what they had wanted to make the event even more livelier. 

Just then, an announcement started playing on the streets, yelling out that the detective agency and the pumpkin man were going to play a game of hide and seek, informing the citizens that the detectives from D.O.G detective agency were going to capture the pumpkin man. Kuki was really pleased with the announcement, since it helped to promote their agency as well ^^ He wished that they would even promote it with a large photo of him, but since they didn’t... it was quite a disappointment for Kuki. 

Shiro sighed and grumbled that instead of him, we should have gotten Tsubasa to come for the decoy operation. But because Tsubasa was helping out Class 2 on a search for a missing pet, he can’t come with us unfortunately TWT Shiro said that he could always go and search for the missing pet actually, which Kuki found that to be ironic, since usually Shiro would be complaining that he doesn’t like to search for a pet and said that it was job meant for the kids.

A pumpkin man appeared in front of us suddenly and Shiro immediately got defensive and started guarding “me”. But it was only a child who had put on a pumpkin head actually, and thus Shiro quickly explained that rather than guarding “me” he was just moving “me” away because “I” was standing in the way. (Really? =w=“) Kuki just smiled and remarked that he wished that Shiro would at least be half as honest as Tsubasa actually~ 

Shiro noticed that we did not even have any sweet treats or candies with us even though we were supposed to act as decoy to lure the pumpkin man. Kuki told us not to worry as he led us to a shop which sells japanese confectionery, and complimented that their yokan were really delicious that it would make one jaws dropped while eating it. He wanted to look for the shop owner actually, but his daughter replied that he had went for a walk since the japanese confectioneries were not selling well recently. Kuki sighed and remarked that it seems that japanese confectioneries aren’t allowed to be used to celebrate Halloween, and thus it’s hard for their business during this period of time. He bought a yokan, and the daugher even gave him an extra one as a gift, which pleased Kuki greatly since it means that he could eat the extra one. (The one he had bought were to be used as our “lure” for the decoy operation.)

Shiro scoffed at the yokan, wondering whether it could actually be used to lure out the pumpkin man. Kuki wanted to show Shiro how delicious the yokan is actually, and decided to open it and fed Shiro a mouthful XD 

Suddenly, there was a commotion as there was yet another sighting of the appearance of the pumpkin man. Kuki started to get really excited and told us to follow the crowd in chasing after the pumpkin man, (He even remarked that it seems like they’re chasing an idol XD) as he can’t wait to give him the yokan in his hands~ 

After chasing around, we finally saw the pumpkin man and Kuki proudly showed off the shopping bag with the yokan in it, claiming that he had bought this from a hundred years old shop and even asked him to try out the yokan in it. However, the pumpkin man was hesitant, and answered that he doesn’t want it. He laughed later on and claimed that because he was the jack-o-lantern, he’s not interested in japanese confectioneries at all, and asked Kuki to take it back and share it with the others instead. As the pumpkin man made his escape once again, Kuki grumbled that the jack-o-lantern was being to gentle to them at such a weird time. (I think he’s just disappointed that the pumpkin man doesn’t want his yokan though... ^^:)

Chapter 7: 洋菓子店の大騷ぎ / Commotion At The Western Candy Shop

The next day, “I” joined Suzu-kun and Hinamori for some investigation. Suzu-kun mentioned that there were even more people dressed up in halloween outfits compared to yesterday, and since most of the people seems to be really interested in Halloween, he guessed that perhaps we might be able to get more information from them regarding the pumpkin man. On the other hand, Hinamori was more interested to ask them about why they had chosen to dress up in a particular outfit, as he thought that he might be able to meet some new friends this way who were fans of the horror genre. 

Even though our main goal was to ask for more information about the pumpkin man, Suzu-kun suggested that we head to the candy store which was rumored that its candies were more easily to be stolen by the pumpkin man to purchase some candies too. He was surprised that the pumpkin man had decided not to steal Class 7′s sweet treats yesterday, and wondered whether the pumpkin man disliked japanese confectioneries. Suzu-kun found that the yokan sold at that shop was really delicious that he himself was a big fan of it. In the end, he just laughed it off and guessed that perhaps the pumpkin man just wanted to follow the legend or perhaps was really the real jack-o-lantern himself afterall~

However, Hinamori voiced out that the pumpkin man wasn’t the real jack-o-lantern. He remarked that the real jack-o-lantern would be someone who would even helped to guide someone if one had lost his way, and “I” quickly took out my notebook to note down what Hinamori had said, as it was something new for “me” to learn about.

As Hinamori would watch horror movies sometimes with Toki, Suzu-kun asked him whether the two of them would talk about such topics regarding the supernatural. However, Hinamori revealed that Toki didn’t talk at all when he watched the horror movies, that even when Hinamori tried to talk to him about horror movies, he gets no reactions at all. (Poor Hinamori TWT But kind of hard to imagine them sitting together to watch a movie OWO”)

Hinamori was excited about the Halloween Party, and remarked that he would be looking forward in making the happy smiling faces into faces full of fear. (That sound kind of mean Hina~) Suzu-kun frowned and told him that Naoto had instructed Hinamori not to go overboard with his plans, since it would be bad if they ended up making Yu cry instead.

We finally reached the candy shop, and the air was filled with not just the scent of pumpkin, but also a really sweet cent of the candies as well. We overheard a customer asking for to buy the candies that were to be stolen, and Suzu-kun was surprised to see that the wrapping of the candies had a picture of the pumpkin man on it. The shop assistant asked us whether we were here to buy the candies to be stolen by the pumpkin man as well, saying that there was alot of customers who were here and wanted to meet him very much recently. 

We decided to go with the flow and told the shop assistant that we’re indeed interested to meet the pumpkin man and thus came here to buy some candies, and thus the shop assistant introduced us their most popular item which was the one being stolen really frequently by the pumpkin man - Macaroons. 

After leaving the candy shop, Suzu-kun frowned and remarked that even though we’ve obtained more information about the pumpkin man incident, he felt that rather than it being a theft case, it feels more like an event instead ^^; He and Hinamori pondered whether the real jack-o-lantern would felt troubled by this or actually felt happy about his sudden increase in popularity ^^; One thing that puzzled Suzu-kun was, why did the pumpkin man would specifically wanted to steal the macaroons more frequently? Hinamori mentioned that the jack-o-lantern had lived a lavish live before he passed away, and guessed that perhaps that was why he targeted western candies, especially since the macaroons were really delicious. Suzu-kun gave a weak smile and remarked that the pumpkin man seems to be jack-o-lantern fan just like Hinamori if he decided to mimic the real jack-o-lantern so much to even such details. He laughed and said that if we had managed to capture the pumpkin man without trouble, perhaps we could also invite to the halloween party as well~ 

Even though Suzu-kun was helping to prepare the halloween party, he was not involved in the decorating or the outfits coordination for the party, and thus had no idea at all what they were look like and were really interested. Even though it was still a secret for now, Hinamori revealed that the outfits for Suzu-kun and “me” were all decided now~ Since “I” was also helping out with the preparations, Suzu-kun wished that “I” won’t push “myself” too much and would also be looking forward to seeing what “I’ve” been helping out with~ (Thanks Suzu-kun~)

Chapter 8: 犯人はこの中にいる? / The Culprit Is Inside Here?

In the evening, “I” accompanied Class 5 on a decoy operation. Naoto complained that “I” was getting too close to Suzu-kun, but after “I” stepped further away, he complained again that “I” was too far away now and would be easily targeted. This went on for awhile till Suzu-kun voiced out that he’s making “me” very troubled by his words. Naoto said that he doesn’t like the idea of the muffins made by Suzu-kun to be stolen easily (since they were carried by “me”), but he also didn’t like anyone getting close to Suzu-kun either, and continued that he shall protect both the muffins and Suzu-kun XD (I think Naoto should just take the muffins instead himself then... =w=“)

Suzu-kun replied that their aim was to get the muffins stolen by the pumpkin man, since they’ve specifically even put in a GPS tracker in the packaging. The muffins gave out a really nice scent as they were freshly baked, and Suzu-kun said that once they’re cooled, the scent would be gone so he hoped that the pumpkin man would show up soon. Naoto frowned and told “me” not to let go of the bag of muffins no matter what, and protect it even with “my” life ^^’ Naoto actually wanted to take the muffins actually (oh, so he could actually take it?), but he worried that the muffins would obstruct his freedom to use his hands when he had to protect Suzu-kun if anything would to happen ^^; (Suzu-kun > Muffin then... ^^;) Naoto was serious as he stated that he would definitely destroy the person who had stolen Suzu-kun’s muffins. (That’s scary for just a muffin thief OAO”)

However, the pumpkin man had not show up, and Naoto dissed whether the pumpkin man had decided to take a break today, adding on that he wished that he would not show up for the rest of his life ^^; Suzu-kun laughed and told Naoto that he better not say those words in front of Hinamori, since the latter had been looking forward to meeting him and making friends with him XD But he realised later on that perhaps the person who Hinamori wanted to make friends with was probably jack-o-lantern himself actually ^^; Naoto sighed and remarked it doesn’t matter to him who Hinamori wanted to befriend, since he would protect both Suzu-kun and the muffins no matter what. (I guess Naoto’s mindset just won’t change that easily ^^;)

Just then, we received the news that the pumpkin man had appeared near the train station, and thus quickly made our way there.

Upon arriving there, we were surprised to find that a large crowd had gathered over there, Suzu-kun wondered whether everyone had gathered here after seeing the news that were being spread around on the internet. Hinamori was there too, and was surprised to find us here. He was carrying a large amount of candies and answered that he had came to buy even more candies for the halloween party since it was still not enough. Hinamori made his exit soon after that, claiming that he had to leave. 

Naoto started to get suspicious of Hinamori after that, as he wondered whether Hinamori was actually the pumpkin man. He wondered whether the the candies in Hinamori’s hands were actually “given by the pumpkin man” and also guessed that Hinamori might be acting as the secret guest for the halloween party, who might turn out to be the pumpkin man, since he guessed that if Hinamori revealed his true identity (that he was the pumpkin man afterall), it might make the party even more livelier. 

However, Suzu-kun pointed out that the pumpkin man had his right arm much more larger and muscular than his left, and Hinamori’s arms were both at the same size, and thus felt that it couldn’t be him. But Naoto guessed that Hinamori could do that himself to show such an illusion since he was good at horror make up. Since the event organiser was also a fan of Halloween, Naoto guessed that the event organiser might even be Hinamori’s old friend, and they’ve worked together to create such an event. He also voiced out that Hinamori had a gentle manner, and thus was suitable in thief’s description that he was a gentleman and would not hurt the people he had stole from. 

Suzu-kun doesn’t want to suspect that Hinamori might be the pumpkin man though, and replied that he believed that Hinamori would not do such a bad thing. Naoto answered that in that case, we would just have to capture the pumpkin man to reveal his true identity. 

Chapter 9: 追跡,カプ男! / Let’s Chase, Pumpkin Man!

We decided to join the night parade on the night before Halloween. Even though it was very crowded full of people walking around, Naoto felt that our outfits were the best among all the cosplayers. He really like how Suzu-kun look with his werewolf outfit, and went on to take yet another photo of him again, even saving the photo into his “Suzu-kun’s Special Folder” on his phone. He complimented that Suzu-kun looks really suitable in this outfit, which Suzu-kun thanked him for the compliment~ 

However, Suzu-kun felt that our outfits seems to be on a different level than just cosplaying, as the outfits looks really expensive. He thanked Naoto for his efforts to make these outfits and complimented “my” outfit as well. Naoto remarked that he had made “me’ look even more fashionable, and added on that dressing “me” up as a devil was a request by Kuki actually. Suzu-kun wondered why Kuki had requested “me” to be a devil, asking Naoto whether Kuki likes devil actually. Naoto answered that he doesn’t know either and told Suzu-kun to not bother about it and instead... compliment his shinigami outfit soon XD Suzu-kun complimented him, saying that Naoto really looks suitable in it~

Suddenly, we heard Kuki’s order through the earphones and walkie talkies that were equipped on everyone. Kuki said that he would confirm with us the operations that we would carry out today, since we only have another two more days to capture the pumpkin man. He mentioned that the pumpkin man runs really fast, and told us that in the event if we’re unable to catch up with him, we should not give up, and should instead check on the pumpkin’s man escape route and how he escapes to use those information for tomorrow’s operations. 

Naoto revealed that he had actually secretly equipped a GPS tracker on Hinamori and got the master of Cyan to inform him when Hinamori had left the building. Using the GPS tracker, Naoto planned to tail him in order to check whether he was the pumpkin man. If Hinamori was still in Cyan when the pumpkin man appears, he would have an alibi that proves that he wasn’t the pumpkin man actually. 

“I” was knocked down by a passerby who seems to be drunk, but thankfully Suzu-kun held onto “me” before “I” fall and asked if “I’m” alright. (Suzu-kun is so gentle ^///^) Naoto wasn’t pleased and said that if Suzu-kun was the person who was being knocked down, he would let the other party see hell instead, to which Suzu-kun told Naoto not to say such scary stuff ><” He remarked that there seems to be more people who were drunk today compared to the usual, and was worried for “me” (since “I” might get knocked down again.) Naoto seems jealous as he asked Suzu-kun why wasn’t him worried for him XD Suzu-kun answered that Naoto might be dangerous instead for a different reason... XD (Dangerous as in he might ended up attacking other people instead? XD)

Hijiri and Yu were stationed at the train station instead, with Hijiri complimenting how cute Yu was that he might be even ended up getting more candies than the pumpkin man. As Yu was really shy and was humble, the other passerbys decided to sneakily put in candies in his bag instead XD Yu noticed it and still thanked them shyly though, before heading off XD (Ahh~ Yu is too adorable here in his pumpkin outfit ^////^)

He hurried back to Hijiri and told him to hide him. Hijiri smiled and told him that he doesn’t have to be so scared, but Yu found the cosplayers to be really scary that he can’t help but to want to hide afterall ^^; He wondered why does the passerbys in the streets had to dress up in such scary costumes, since he would rather if everyone dressed up in teddy bear costumes instead XD (That would be cute~ >///<)

Hijiri complimented that Yu was the cutest among all the cosplayers, and thus he could understand why everyone would want to give him candies actually~ Yu sighed and said that he understood that, since it had been countless times that the people around him had told him that he looks adorable and the outfit was suitable for him ^^; He wanted to be complimented by “me” actually, but unfortunately because of work, he was unable to meet “me”. He had not seen “my” outfit yet currently, and asked Hijiri what “I’m” dressing up at. Yu just wanted the work to end quickly for him so that he could meet “me” soon, but in order for that to happen, he would first had to capture the pumpkin man~! 

Chapter 10: 守れ! 清人の夢 / Protect! Hinamori’s Dream

As we walked around the streets, there were no sightings of the pumpkin man, Suzu-kun wondered whether the pumpkin man had decided to take a break at such a day (the day before Halloween). However, Naoto frowned and said that it would be hard to prove Hinamori’s alibi in that case, since he had just received news from the master that Hinamori had left Cyan, and was making his way to the shopping streets. 

We walked on, and saw a man dressed up as a zombie informing the public that there were candies giveaways happening at the shopping square. Naoto remarked that this event seems like it was planned to lure the pumpkin man to appear, and thus decided to head there to get ourselves some candies. We ended up getting alot of candies as they were giving out one large sack for per person, and it even had a strong scent as the candies were made with brandy, which was actually quite rare. Suzu-kun noticed that “I” had a coin chocolate in “my” sack and wanted to exchange something for it with “me” since he likes coin chocolate very much. Naoto was disappointed to find that his sack doesn’t have any coin chocolate, since he would definitely offered his to Suzu-kun~ He ended up making an order online for coin chocolate, and told Suzu-kun that 1kg of it would be delivered the next day OWO” Suzu-kun felt that 1kg of coin chocolate was too much for him, and guessed that perhaps he would just give it out at the halloween party tomorrow. 

We wanted to get more news about the pumpkin man, but when Naoto checked his phone, he mentioned that he’s getting a weak signal for his connection since it seems that everyone on the streets had been actively posting about the pumpkin man and it ended up affecting the overall connection.

Suddenly, the pumpkin man appeared before us and had stole the candies before we realised it. We tried to catch up to him but he was fast and was already far away from us. Suzu-kun told us to leave it to him as the candies he had stolen had a strong scent of brandy and thus he could trace him using his scent of smell~ (Way to go Suzu-kun~! ^^)

We traced the pumpkin man until we reached the dark alley, and Naoto remarked that the pumpkin man must have know his way around the town very well. We were near the japanese confectionery shop that sells really good yokan and Suzu-kun suspected that the pumpkin man had actually went into the shop...

But suddenly Hinamori appeared in front of us, which surprised us. Suzu-kun decided to be blunt and asked Hinamori whether he was the pumpkin man actually, with Naoto adding on asking Hinamori whether he had decided to act as the pumpkin man as a collaboration with the event organiser to make the event even more livelier. Hinamori denied it was him, and he doesn’t know about it, to which Naoto continued asking him why was he behaving weirdly recently. Suzu-kun said that he doesn’t want to suspect Hinamori actually, and hoped that he would come clean with everything to them. 

Hinamori revealed that he had actually called jack-o-lantern to make an appearance at the halloween party tomorrow, and said that rather than the pumpkin man, it was the real jack-o-lantern who he had invited. He knew that the jack-o-lantern had lived in this japanese confectionery shop, and thus had been coming here everyday to plead him to make an appearance at the party. But no matter how many times he had pleaded to him, he was still rejected... TWT (Aww... poor Hinamori~)

Naoto comforted Hinamori and told him to return for today and come back tomorrow, saying that the jack-o-lantern might have changed his mind tomorrow instead. He asked Hinamori whether he had noticed that the jack-o-lantern had the scent of brandy on him, to which Hinamori answered that he did noticed that.

After Hinamori had left, Naoto said that Hinamori must have mistaken the pumpkin man to be the real jack-o-lantern actually, since Hinamori himself had not seen the pumpkin man stealing candies at all, and thus had been thinking that the pumpkin man who the others are talking about was a different person from the jack-o-lantern which he had seen. 

Chapter 11: カプ男の正体 / The True Identity Of The Pumpkin Man

But, what’s important for us was to find out who exactly was the pumpkin man. However, there doesn’t seems to be anywhere the pumpkin man could escape to or hide in at the dark alley other than the japanese confectionery shop, and thus Suzu-kun suspected that perhaps the old grandpa who was the owner of the shop could actually be the real identity behind the pumpkin man...? Suddenly, the shop owner appeared and admitted that he was indeed the pumpkin man. He also mentioned that Hinamori had mistaken him to be the real jack-o-lantern, and he had decided to continue with this act pretending to be the real jack-o-lantern before him, since he knew that if he’s known as the pumpkin man instead, he would be captured for sure. The shop owner had heard the conversation between Hinamori and us just now, and now felt embarrassed about his actions and him lying to Hinamori.

As the shop owner had been making candies for many years, he had used his right arm extensively till it had became muscular, just like how a pro sportsman would. Suzu-kun asked the shop owner why he wanted to steal the candies and the owner explained that due to Halloween, his japanese confectioneries had not sold at all, and thus he thought if he had stolen the western candies from his rivals’ shops, perhaps more customers would come to buy candies from his shop instead. He now realised what he had done was a stupid act since somehow he helped to increase the sales of his rivals’ shops instead ^^; 

Initially, rather than planning to disrupt the business of his competitors, the shop owner had wanted to make it a fair competition between him and others shops in terms of taste actually. He had made some japanese confectioneries that were suitable to be sold in the halloween period. (Like bloody sweets or Dracula theme candies ^^;) However, he was too focused on making these scary sweets that in the end his wife and daughter had said that these candies were too scary to be sold and thus the shop owner had no idea what he should do next (other than disrupting his rivals’ business). 

Suzu-kun suggested that he actually had an idea for the shop owner. Suzu-kun had actually attempted to make some japanese confectioneries that’s suitable for Halloween himself. He thought of making pumpkin yokan, and said that with the help and skills of the shop owner, they might be able to make it taste even better. The shop owner started to get excited and showed Suzu-kun the scary sweets he had done, and Naoto started dissing that the shop owner was Hinamori’s type of person .(People who really like horror stuff ^^;) Suzu-kun gave a weak smile and asked “me” to please take Naoto away from here XD (Since he was just causing a disturbance XD) 

Suzu-kun told the shop owner that people would like candies usually even without those scary decorations, and thus suggested him to make some new flavours that were delicious, and gave it out to everyone on the streets as an apology for his actions instead. The shop owner wondered whether he would be forgiven just like that since he had seen himself to be a really bad guy who had stolen everyone’s candies. Naoto came back to join in the conversation, and said no one would mind and instead this would make the event more livelier. Suzu-kun told the shop owner that we had accepted the event organiser’s request to capture the pumpkin man (even though it just sounded like a game instead) and thus suggested that the shop owner would continue to be the pumpkin man and let us get captured on the streets instead tomorrow. The shop owner thought that he would get punished like this in public, but Suzu-kun said that the shop owner would just apologise to the crowd who had gathered and gave out the new flavoured candies which he had made to the crowd, saying that the public would definitely forgive him this way. Since now that hey’ve decided on the new candies and places to distribute them, Suzu-kun urged the shop owner to join him to make some pumpkin yokan~

Naoto told the shop owner to come to the halloween party after distributing the candies tomorrow, since Hinamori had invited him to come to the party countless times. The shop owner replied that what Hinamori wanted to invite was the real jack-o-lantern... but Naoto cut him off by saying that to Hinamori, the pumpkin man which the shop owner had acted as was the real jack-o-lantern, and told him that he should just fulfill Hinamori’s wish like how a santa claus would showed up during Christmas. (Naoto sound so cool saying this >///<) In the end, the shop owner agreed to come to the party, but warned them that he would be late since he would have alot of candies to be given out, and thus would need us to make some time for him to make his appearance.

We started smiling at Naoto, and he confessed that he’s just doing this favour for Hinamori since he would feel troublesome if the main organiser of the halloween party was in low spirits XD 

Chapter 12: ハロウインの夜は更けて / The Halloween Night Continues On

It was finally the night of the Halloween party~ “I” entered the place and was surprised by Suzu-kun who had casted some spider webs at “me”. The spider webs was part of Hinamori’s collection, and told “me” not to worry since these spider webs are fake ^^; He remarked that “I” was late but upon noticing that “I” was wearing makeup that Ran had helped “me” to put it, he complimented “me”, saying that it suits “me” and “I” looked really adorable~ ^/////^ 

Even Naoto complimented that make up, saying that Ran had did it just like what he had requested, and said that he had requested it because it won’t make sense for him if the make up doesn’t match with the outfits which he had made ^^; (Naoto is indeed a perfectionist  ^^;)

(When questioned about the decorations of the venue, Naoto was glad that it came out really good and said that “I” must have worked hard at it. Even though usually he dislikes these disgusting decorations, he felt that overall the decorations actually looks quite good and thus alright with it.)

Hinamori noticed that “I’ve” came to the party, and told “me” to enjoy “myself” here~ He was sorry that he had not managed to invite the “secret” guest (jack-o-lantern), and said that even though he had wanted to invite him to the party again today, he was disappointed to find that the jack-o-lantern wasn’t at the japanese confectionery shop, wondering whether he won’t be able to see him after that for the rest of his life TWT He said that he had wanted to let us meet up with him, since he had felt that the jack-o-lantern was a wonderful person. Hinamori continued on by explaining that the lantern that was jack-o-lantern’s head was a symbol of him being alone. Jack-o-lantern was unable to reside in the heaven or in hell, and thus was always floating around, and that lantern was his only hope. Hinamori explained that because he used to be alone in the past as well, he could understand really well about this feeling. (Aww Hinamori~~ T////T *pats) 

Naoto and Suzu-kun joined us, and told us that we should get started with the game time at the party, since if Kuki had gotten impatient with the waiting, he would get started on singing nostalgic songs on the karaoke XD Hinamori thanked the two of them and said because of the two of them as well as the rest of the detective agency, Hinamori doesn’t feel lonely anymore ^^ 

We started playing with a bingo game, which Kuki had won after getting a triple bingo. Turns out that the present was a replica version of a certain someone’s heart, which Kuki gave a weak smile but still accepted with a thanks to Hinamori, saying that he would treasure it even more than his own heart~ 

(I just want to show Kuki’s devilish halloween outfit here ^^)

Just then, Yu arrived, with Kuki mentioned that someone cute had came to join us~ However, Yu was scared of the decorations and started panicking, making Kuki flustered as well as he called Hijiri for help instead ^^: Hinamori guessed that the decorations must be too hard for Yu’s heart, and said that in order to make Yu enjoy the party in the future, he should change the decorations used for the next party~

“I” went on to help out with Suzu-kun, and he told “me” that he had helped “me” to keep some pumpkin candies for “me” in the fridge. Even though Suzu-kun had make some yokan as taught by the shop owner, he felt that making pudding and pies were easier for him since he was used to making these instead. “I” couldn’t decide on whether “I” should eat the pudding or the pie made by Suzu-kun, so he recommended that “I” ate both instead, even suggesting we eat together later on~ (That was a sweet moment with Suzu-kun ^////^)

At this moment, Naoto appeared and told Suzu-kun to help him in moving away a doll which was put up as a decoration at the party, since Yu might ended up fainting if he had seen these ^^; Suzu-kun asked Naoto whether he would feel sad if the scary decorations were taken down, but Naoto answered that he had already enjoyed them and it was more important that they try to fit to Yu’s taste as well to make him felt at ease at the party. (Awww~ Naoto was actually being really nice here ^^) Naoto said that he’s always a really nice and gentle person, especially to Suzu-kun~ ^^ 

The bingo game which the other members in the agency were playing had ended as well at this time, and thus Hinamori told everyone to help themselves to the food and enjoyed himself. Kuki had eaten alot of coin chocolates, and ended up getting a nosebleed ^^; Suzu-kun was glad that Kuki was a fan of coin chocolates as well, while Naoto worried that Kuki might ended up eating Suzu-kun’s share but guessed that he won’t eat so much since he ordered 1 kg of them ^^; 

And... that was the end of the Halloween event story~ Sad that it ended halfway through the party and never really showed us the part where the pumpkin man appears... I wanted to see Hinamori’s face lit up when he saw his jack-o-lantern made an appearance though... =3=“

As I’ve stated above, this was mainly a Class 5′s event story so as a fan of Class 5, I was glad to see them shine in this event~! ^^ (Since there was so much moments of them ^^) Kuki and Shiro made quite alot of appearance too, which I enjoyed, and together with Hijiri and Yu, it seems that the cast this time round was full of characters that I really like ^^

The halloween outfits wore by the various members were really nice as well~ ^^ Suzu-kun especially looks really adorable as an ookami prince here~ >////< Yu as well in his little pumpkin witch outfit XD Even though they showed Kuki’s Halloween outfit, I hoped that they showed an outfit for Shiro... and many others too, too bad we don’t get to see them~ (I bet Shiro would definitely looks good as an ookami as well! +W+)

#VIIDOG CODE #event story #summary #translation #otome game #vd:event #vd:translation #class 5 #yu #hijiri #kuki #shiro

[momorabu]

07.10.2017

Viidog Code Event Story - ホラーハウス・パニック / Horror House . Panic

It’s a new month and I realised I haven’t post my monthly Viidog Code story yet for the last month... so here is it~! This story happens in the summer, which maybe abit late now considering we’re approaching Autumn, but it’s alright~ Let’s get chilling with a haunted theme story~! It’s great to write about light and funny stories (though abit creepy) after the difficult and complex storyline in the main story ^^

As always, the summary of the story can be found below. Translation may not be 100% accurate due to my poor Japanese skills~

Chapter 1: 異人館街の幽霊屋敷 / The Haunted House at The Strange Street

One day, Shiro found “me” at the database room and realised that “I’m” reading up on a search report from our last case. “I” told him that “I’m” revising to learn more about detective work, but Shiro asked “me” to return him his reflection report since “I” have no need to read them. (It just sound to me that he’s embarrassed though ^^;)

Since “I” want to work so much, Shiro asked “me to head to the office with him, as it seems that Kuki had gotten himself involved in yet another case. Shiro didn’t know what case it was as he was also just being called down to the detective agency, and was also requested that he find “me” and bring “me” along to the office.

(Just want to say... Shiro looks good in summer wear~ ^///^ Hoodie~ >////<)

We headed to the office to find that Tsubasa and Kuki were already there. Kuki was glad that Shiro had managed to find “me” and brought “me” here, since he was worried that he won’t be able to do it. Shiro rebutted at him that Kuki is just treating him as a slave XD 

With everyone in Class 7 gathered together, Kuki told Shu and Senri to start off the meeting to inform them the new case that they’ll be working on. Senri briefed us that someone had sent in a request to the agency to investigate a haunted house. Both Tsubasa and “me” showed a shock reaction, and Shiro told us that we’re overreacting. Tsubasa answered that it’s normal to be shocked about a haunted house, to which Kuki happily replied that he had taken on this case just because he wanted to see our reactions to it. 

Senri continued on talking about the case, saying that this request was sent in by people who had lived around the haunted house. Even though currently there isn’t anyone living in that house at the moment, the neighbors had heard some eerie sound and voices from it, and thus wished to get someone to investigate it. Tsubasa wondered whether it was called as “the haunted house” due to the eerie sound and voices, but the main reason was because the owner of the house had passed away, thus making it an empty residence currently. 

Rui joined us and informed that other than the person who had sent in the request, multiple people around the neighbourhood had also seen some shadows that moved and voices in the haunted house, and was sure that there must be “something” in that house. Thinking that since this was a haunted house we’re investigating anyway, Kuki announced that Class 7 shall also help to get rid of the ghosts as an add-on to the case. (Erm... how exactly are you going to do that, Kuki?)

Tsubasa, on the other hand, wanted to make friends with the ghost, as long as it is not an evil ghost, which Kuki agreed with him and even proposed bringing it back to the agency to make the agency a “unique” agency.... ^^; (It’s meant to be a joke and ”I” just smiled weakly along with them like “I’m” forced to ^^; Even Senri dissed Kuki about it that Kuki felt that Senri was just adding salt to his wound.)

Shu finished off the briefing by telling Kuki that he hoped that he doesn’t cause any unfortunate incident in this investigation. In summary, the case this time was to investigate a haunted house, and Kuki told us that it’s going to be a very fun case. Shiro denied and remarked that it sounds like it’s going to be a very boring case, but Tsubasa told him that it’s actually rare that they might meet a ghost actually. (Tsubsa sounds very excited ^^;) 

Shiro claimed that he doesn’t believe in ghost and deemed the case to be cause by some children’s mischief definitely, but Kuki thinks otherwise and felt that Shiro actually believe in ghosts even if he claimed that he doesn’t. (i guess he already knew that Shiro was actually quite afraid of ghosts.) Shiro said that he’s not going to investigate the haunted house, and told the rest of us to investigate instead before he left the room. In the end, it was decided that we shall just take a look at the haunted house tonight, (the official operation shall start tomorrow) as Kuki told us to gather in the living room at night time.

However, at night time, Shiro was pulled to join us in the investigation as much he rejected to join. He ultimately conceded to investigate the haunted house, but stated that he would investigate it alone and told us not to follow him along. Kuki was surprised with Shiro’s change in attitude and asked him whether he secretly wanted to meet the ghost very much. 

Kuki asked Shiro to bring “me” along with him for the investigation, to which Shiro denied and said once again that he had planned on heading there alone and that it would be hard to escape from the place if he had to bring “me” along if anything were to happen. However, Kuki stated that as the class leader he would not allow anyone to perform an investigation by himself and even offered that he shall follow Shiro himself if he doesn’t like “me” to go along with him. In the end, Shiro agreed to bring “me” along to investigate the haunted house, and Kuki told us to be careful while he sent us off.

Chapter 2: 開かない扉 / The Door That Can’t Be Opened

After we had head off, Tsubasa worried for “me” as he’s afraid that Shiro might leave “me” unattended, but Kuki was being very positive, suggesting that perhaps we might even ended up being friends with the ghost and bring it back here. Tsubasa noticed that Kuki still seems hung up about his joke regarding the ghost just now, but Kuki just answered him not to open his old wounds instead XDD

The two started talking about ghosts, where Tsubasa said that he’s actually looking forward to meeting one since he had never met one before, and asked Kuki whether he believe in ghosts. As Kuki was one who would only believe in something if he had seen it, he found ghosts to be very unrealistic since he had never seen one. He assured Tsubasa that we’ll be alright since unlike his appearance, Shiro was actually someone who would take good care others, and thought that he’s actually quite suitable in training and teaching newbies ^^ (Shiro Sensei? XD) He also remarked that Tsubasa was suitable too since he’s someone who could have a good relationship with anyone, to which Tsubasa commented that he’s the latest newbie in the agency (before “me”), and thus he understood the feeling of being a newbie the most in all of the members in the agency. (So I guess Shiro entered the agency earlier than Tsubasa~)

In the meanwhile, Shiro and “I” had arrived at the street where the haunted house was located. As there were many empty houses nearby, Shiro told “me” that there’s nothing much to look at even if “I” was looking around at the area. The place we’re at was pretty dark, that Shiro complained that it’s hard to go around the streets at night. Thankfully he had brought along a torch light and told “me” that we’re just going to quickly investigate this place and head back to the agency. (Shiro seems that he just wanted to get it over and done with it =w=“) He told “me” to be careful since anything could fly out at us when we’re inside the building, and to also refrain from making a loud noise too. 

When we entered the house though, the doors just shut behind us suddenly.... or what Shiro had thought so, since “I” was the one who had shut the doors actually, and Shiro told “me” to do it more quietly. (Since I guess it gave him a scare when he heard the doors closed that loudly ^^; But he claimed that he’s not scared but just abit shocked by the closing of the doors...) Shiro got yet another scare again when he walked straight into a spider web, but felt that they seems to be some mischief done by a child, and told “me” to be careful not to trip over anything. (Though he claimed that he’s not worried for “me”, just that he would found it troublesome if “I” had fallen.. ^^;)

“I” was scared when “I” saw an arm hanging in the mid air, but Shiro investigated and realised that it was just a mannequin’s arm being hung up by some red threads. We walked down the long corridor, and didn’t opened any of the doors since the door knobs were untouched over the years. Finally, at the end of the corridor was another door, which was locked and since the knob looks clean, Shiro guessed that perhaps there was something behind that door. (The door knob being clean was an evidence that someone actually opened the door recently +W+) 

Shiro was glad that as it meant that it wasn’t the work of a ghost that had made this place haunted, as ghosts would be able to go through doors without even opening it. He guessed that perhaps the person who had cause these eerie happenings was behind that door and decided to keep a look out at the door to see if anyone would come out from the room. In the end, we decided to hide in a room next to the corridor which offers a view that we can keep a look out at the door. Shiro was sure that he would catch the “ghost” and reveal his real identity, blaming that ghost that it was because of it that he had to do such a job right now. 

Just then, we heard the sound of doors opening, but Shiro guessed that it was just the wind that had opened the doors and he didn’t sense the presence of any humans either, claiming that it’s definitely not ghosts who had made the doors to open. We waited for awhile, but it doesn’t seems that anybody was going to open the door and come out from the room, Shiro decided that we shall head back for tonight and write our report instead.

However, suddenly there was the sound of the door from the entrance closing, along with the sound of it locking! Shiro started to get worried that we might get locked into the house, and thus hurried “me” to run along with him back to the entrance. Just as what he had expected, the door to the entrance was locked when we arrived there...

Chapter 3: 超自然的なもの? / The Supernatural?

Even though the door looks old, it was actually strong, and Shiro guessed that it would be hard to break it down in order to escape from the house (besides he doesn’t want to destroy the house actually). He was pissed that “I” was in the mood to laugh and confirmed once again that regardless what Kuki had said, Shiro himself wasn’t scared of ghosts AT ALL, and claimed that he had no interests in such area either. (okay... if you say so... =w=“)

However, the thing was... it wasn’t “me” who was laughing. Shiro thought that “I” had used ventriloquism, but since obviously “I” do not have such a skill, Shiro guessed that it may be coming from the person who had locked us in this house. It started to get spookier when the plates started to move by themselves, and Shiro, feeling unable to stay in this house anymore, quickly asked “me” to get away from the door as he broke down the door. As he left the place with “me”, Shiro bellowed back at the “ghost” that he’s not leaving because he’s scared, he’s going back to think of a plan and would be coming back to defeat it next time XD

We ran for a long while after we’ve escaped from the haunted house, and finally stopped at somewhere along the street, which Shiro commented that the ghost won’t be coming out from the house to chase after us since we’re now quite far away from it. He warned “me” not to mention anything about him facing the ghost to Kuki and Tsubasa. 

Back at the agency, Kuki and Tsubasa were still continuing their conversations about the ghost, where Kuki asked Tsubasa what games he would want to play with the ghost if he had befriend it, and even suggested playing a test of courage with it. But Tsubasa felt that it would be very boring since the ghost would be the one in charge of scaring people instead like usual, and suggested hide and seek instead. Kuki felt that hide and seek would be hard since the ghost would have an advantage since it could hide in places that are hard to find for them.

Suddently, Kuki got a shock when he realised that both Shiro and “I” had returned from our investigation. Noticing that our faces looked green, Kuki asked us what had happened over at the haunted house. Shiro answered that we’re fine, but he’s sure that there’s something at that house, and that he had felt digusted that something was getting close to him even though he could not see what was it.

Even though Kuki was worried about it, he decided to give it a rest for now and told Tsubasa that he can be happy now that it seems like there’s really a ghost over there ^^; Kuki asked Shiro that whether he had heard any sound of the water in the house, since he had read that in the report which was passed to him by Senri. Shiro remarked that he indeed heard something that resembles the sound of water, and thus Kuki decided that they should investigate more about the house.

Tsubasa was too excited and wanted to go straight away though XD Kuki had to tell him that it was too late and that they would go there tomorrow instead.

(Shiro was too tired from the investigation today that he had fallen asleep while sitting on the sofa~ Aww~ So cute~ ^////^)

Taking out a map, Kuki asked “me” whether it was the same as the layout of the house since “I’ve” went inside it. “I” reported to him that the map actually showed rooms that we had not seen at the house and that made Kuki quite interested about it...

Chapter 4: 1班の推察 / The Investigations by Class 1

The next morning, Shu was quite happy to receive a new case, as it was case that was requested by their own species - Kenrouzoku. Shu was glad that they finally had a chance to help out their comrades, and that made Senri happy for him too, and guessed that the other “Kenrouzoku” who had lived in the town must have seen Shu as someone reliable to request him for help.

Shu decided that this new case from Kenrouzoku would be handled by Class 7 and told “me” (who was there) that this would be my first time in handling a case by “Kenrouzoku”, and thus thought that it would be a learning experience for “me”. However, Senri mentioned that Class 7 was working on the case regarding the haunted house currently, and the two of them started talking about that case instead.

Shiro had not handed in his report for yesterday night, to which Shu thought that he’s facing difficulty in writing it since writing report was always not Shiro’s forte. Senri explained that it seems that quite alot happened during the investigation yesterday that Shiro was burned out when he had returned. He made a guess that perhaps we had really met a ghost over there, but Shu started to get really worried about Shiro and mentioned that perhaps he would pay a visit to him later on. (Shu was actually really nice to his comrades and cares about them~ +////+)

Rui entered the room and told them that he had compiled the reports from Class 7′s investigation at the haunted house yesterday, and from the reports... it seems that the two of us had been in contact with the “other party”. We’ve heard the weird laughter and the sound of water just like what was written by the person who had requested this case to be investigated, however, we could not know what had cause those sound to happen. The laughter was determined to be coming from a young male who was in his 10s-20s, and there’s still information lacking to know what had been making the sound of the water. Rui also reported that in the midst of our investigation, we were locked up in the house and got into trouble over there. Sensing that there might be further danger, Shiro broke through the door and we escaped from there. The culprit had not shown himself throughout the investigation and had not chased after us after we had escaped from the house.

Rui guessed that even though there’s a possibility that the sound of the laughter and water could be caused by supernatural, he thought that there’s a higher possibility that they were made by a person. It was also found that there were traces of a room being used by someone in the house, and thus Rui guessed that someone must have layed these “traps” to trigger those sound. Shu then deduced that other than the owner of the house, it seems that somebody else also had a key to the haunted house.

Continuing on his report, Rui mentioned that even for someone who was alert like Shiro didn’t sense any presence of a human, and though this also meant that even though the “other party” had no evil intentions in dealing with us, these “traps” in the house also meant that the “other party” doesn’t want anybody to bother him/her/it. 

Shu decided that we shall put the case of the haunted house on hold first and work on this new case instead.

Chapter 5: 雛守と都市伝説 / Hinamori and the City Legends 

At night, Class 7 had gathered in the living room. Kuki talked about the seven mysteries in D.O.G agency, with Tsubasa commenting that the city legends told by Kuki were really interesting that it had gotten him into “occult mode”, since it was regarding werewolves and thus Kuki remarked that as “Kenrouzoku” themselves, they’re definitely very interested in such topics. 

However, Tsubasa noticed that “I” hardly spoke anything throughout the night, and wondered that perhaps “I” had felt bored by them chatting. Back to the case regarding the haunted house, Kuki decided to tidy the information they’ve gathered so far, and head to the house again tomorrow for more investigation. He noticed that Shiro doesn’t seems very enthusiastic to which Shiro denied it, since he wanted to catch the culprit whom had locked us in the house. 

Just then, Hinamori appeared, as he had heard about the word “city legends” and was really interested about it. Tsubasa told him that the old man from the “Kenrouzoku” who had requested our help today had told us alot of interesting city legends after we’ve finished their case for the day. One of the city legends was regarding werewolves, which Hinamori had heard of it before and mentioned that he really like it due to how bloody it was. Kuki was scared by it though Hinamori likes that it was scary since he was a huge fan of the horror genre. He likes the feeling of being scared and thus the werewolves legend was one that he would not forget about it.

Since Hinamori was a fan of horror, Tsubasa asked him whether he had heard about the “haunted house”. Seeing that all of us were really interested in the haunted house, Hinamori decided to reveal to us what he had knew about it... He mentioned that there would always be gossips about this house at this period of time usually, but after a period of time people would forget about it and thought that those gossips were just being made up in the end. However, even though it was just a gossip, Tsubasa felt that this had been going for quite a long while, as it had been a month that the house was being rumored as a haunted house and this time, there seems to be more witness than as per usual. Hinamori felt that perhaps it had escalate past the level of a child’s mischief and may become a real legend in the end...

(Tsubasa got even more excited about heading there after listening to what Hinamori had said though XD)

Chapter 6: 7班始動前夜 / The Eve Before Class 7′s Operations

Shiro wanted to go to the haunted house by himself again, and got nagged by Kuki that the last time he went there, he had slept straight away after returning and skipped out on writing his report ^^; Kuki felt that Shiro had just went around the house once and didn’t delve into anything much before returning the last time, though he guessed that there must be a reason why Shiro had done that. 

He agreed to let Shiro head to the haunted house by himself though, but on one condition, this time he had carry a video camera on himself so that the rest of Class 7 could monitor what had happened in the haunted house, and could also relay information to him. Shiro rejected that idea, to which Kuki felt that it wasnt’ a ridiculous request since they’ve always put on a camera on each other during investigation. He started talking about how Shiro had to lit up a little light to brighten up the room when he’s asleep, and also seems to have taken the salt from the kitchen... (He’s trying to hint that Shiro was actually afraid of the dark and ghosts, that he had to get salt from the kitchen to ward them off ^^;)

Since Shio doesn’t agree to the condition Kuki had set and thus unable to head to the haunted house by himself, Kuki told him to just give up and let all 4 of them to head to the haunted house and investigate together. He remarked that it was the basics in detective work that more people investigating would get a better result than just one sole person investigating. He wondered perhaps than being concerned in the investigation, Shiro was more concerned in his own pride and even guessed that perhaps the person who was here wasn’t even Shiro at all.

Tsubasa was very excited about investigating, and told Shiro that he would try his best, and even if he failed, the others would be around to aid him. Since everyone insisted on tagging along, Shiro had no choice but to concede to them ^^;

Tsubasa was curious in why Shiro had denied to put on a camera when he’s heading to the haunted house by himself, but guessed that perhaps Shiro had felt that he doesn’t look good on camera and complimented that he’s good-looking actually~~ XDD

It was decided that we shall head to the haunted house the next day instead, and thus Kuki asked us to rest up well, and not to stay up later tonight. He also told us to prepare for the investigation, and Tsubasa asked whether the ghost would be able to eat some candies, since he wanted to bring some as a present XDD (This guy... is so adorable >////<) Kuki smiled weakly and guessed that it might be impossible for them to eat, so Tsubasa wondered that pehaps he sould bring something inedible instead.

Chapter 7: 謎のベールに包まれた屋敷 / The House That Was Surrounded By Mysterious Veil

Shu was drinking tea at the office when he realised that the taste of tea has changed. He initially thought that Rui had used a different set of tea leaves, but Rui guessed that perhaps his way of preparing tea was different to how Senri does it usually, and that changes the taste of the tea in the end. 

The two started talking about their research about the haunted house, which they’ve found out that it was a building that was a hundred years old. This was out of Shu’s expectation, and he remarked that doing research on this house made him feel like they’re archaeologist. Just then, Senri came into the room and showed them something that he had found in his research just now. It was a document regarding the ownership of the house, where the last remaining owner of the house had not transferred his ownership to anyone before he passed away. As it had been a long period of time since he had passed away. there isn’t much information that they could find out about the him. There isn’t anybody around the town who knew him, and there’s no lead in finding who might have inherit the house either. 

Rui mentioned that this was around the time when Class 7 was heading towards the haunted house for an investigation once again, and prayed that nothing would happen to them when they were there.

As Class 7 and “I” were nearing the haunted house, Tsubasa asked “me” whether “I’ll” feel afraid of the place. However, “I” wasn’t really afraid as “I’ve” been to the house before once. Nearing the entrance, Kuki spotted the door which was broken down by Shiro, as the part where the door knob had spoiled could be seen clearly.

Heading into the house, Kuki remarked that it felt chilly in here. Tsubasa also noticed that there were some spider webs around, which Kuki remarked that it wasn’t that extraordinary since the house had been really old and untouched for years. Wanting to give a thorough investigation of the house tonight, Kuki started giving out instructions to the members. As there were three routes which they had yet to explore in the house, Kuki proposed that we split into three different teams, with Kuki himself investigating the middle route. Tsubasa would investigate the route on the left, and Shiro would take the route on the right.

However, once investigation starts, Shiro noticed that Kuki was following him and asked him wasn’t he the one who told them to split up and investigate the house. But Kuki mentioned that he had realised that there seems to more rooms that were showed in the floor plan of the house than what they could see in the house, and made a guess that perhaps there’s some hidden rooms in this house. He wondered whether they should all split up and look for the hidden rooms, or stay and wait for the eerie scenarios that we had encountered the last time to take place. 

Kuki started teasing about Shiro that he had headed back halfway through the investigation, hinting him that he’s a scaredy cat. This pissed off Shiro that he ended up destroying the walls of the house... and exposed a secret corridor that way OWO Turns out that Kuki had actually deduced that there’s another path behind the walls and purposely angered Shiro to make him destroy the wall ^^; Heading into the corridor, they also found a wall that could turn and reveal a secret room, which Kuki remarked that they’re lucky to have spotted the secret room by chance.

Chapter 8: いにしえの扉 / The Ancient Door 

Back at the detective agency, Senri had compiled all of the information which Class 1 had gathered regarding the haunted house. He hoped that in these information, there may lie a hint which would lead them to solve the mystery behind the haunted house. Rui remarked that the information was hard for them to read and decipher as there were parts that were hard to understand due to how old the information were. They then started talking about the times where this country was just being developed, and guess that the house might have been built at that time period. The people who had lived around the house were mostly old citizens who had viewed how the country and town had prospered throughout the year.

Looking at one of the information, Rui realised that the way of the name of the owner was written was different to how names were wrote now in the modern days. He deduced that they might have gotten the name of the owner wrong due to mistaking the way his name was written. Now that they had the correct name of the owner, Shu told them to quickly start researching for more information of the owner using the the correct name.

Back at the haunted house, Kuki started commenting that he could smell a really strong smell from the other side of the room and guessed that it must be very dusty on that side. He told Shiro and “me” to head to the secret room and take a look at it. When Shiro asked him why doesn’t he want to go along with us in the secret room, Kuki explained that if everyone were to go together, there might be the possibility that we were all end up missing. Besides, if anything were to happen in the secret room, Kuki was confident that Shiro would be able to escape together with “me”. He told us that he would be staying behind as back up and would definitely help us if we called out for help, so we should head there without worrying too much. 

In the end, both Shiro and “me” decided to head into the secret room by ourselves. (Shiro is unexpectedly kind of sweet here asking “me’ to stay by his side and not leave him ^///^)

Heading into the secret room, Shiro commented that the room was indeed really dusty, the dust had stacked up on the floor like a layer of snow, and our footprints could be seen clearly as we stepped into the room OWO Kuki told us to be careful as we head our way inside the room, and that he would be joining us later as soon as he found a way to make sure that the hidden door (part of the wall) stays home without anyone supporting it. 

Shiro looked around the room and remarked that bed and wallpapers of the room were really worn out and seems that they’ve been moved to this room from the other parts of the house a long time ago. He soon reached to a dead end at the end of the room, but found that there’s a big wall over there that looks really suspicious, and thus deduced that perhaps there’s something over there...

Chapter 9: 不審な影 / The Suspicious Shadow

Suddenly, a shadow appeared and escaped from Shiro’s side. Shiro started to chase after the shadow, asking “me” to follow him but try not to fall and hurt myself along the way. (So cute that he actually called “me” assistant-chan! O/////O)

As we chased down the shadow down the corridor, Shiro realised that the path was getting larger. He wondered whether the shadow was really a ghost but thought that a ghost won’t be able to move at such a high speed. Deducing that if the shadow was really a ghost, it doesn’t have to escape from them, Shiro guessed that it wasn’t a ghost at all and decided to chase up to it.

He noticed that the shadow had went through a door crack, he told “me” to quietly opened the door to aid him in catching it. Shiro planned to catch this “ghost” before Kuki arrived to finish this “boring / lame” case (as said by Shiro), though he was abit afraid of the mice in there ^^;

However, just when he dashed into the room, someone called out to him not to step forward! It was actually Tsubasa (who had went off investigating the house himself earlier on), and he told us that there’s a cat by Shiro’s feet and he’s afraid that Shiro was going to step onto it. Turns out that the black shadow that we’re chasing after was actually a black cat, and Shiro remarked that his heart almost stopped just now due to what had happened. Tsubasa apologised for his actions, as he didn’t thought that he would have scared Shiro non-intentionally ^^; (Aww~ This CG of Tsubasa pleading with Shiro is really adorable~ >////<)

Shiro was confused on why Tsubasa was here as he had head towards the left corridor to investigate the house. Tsubasa answered that he guessed that the left corridor was connected to the right and created a loop in the end, and thus we would meet each other halfway along the corridor.

Back at the detective agency again, Senri and the others had finally found out the truth regarding the haunted house. Rui guessed that this might be a trick set up in the past that made it hard to be discovered by them Kenrouzoku, but Senri replied that he guessed that even the humans themselves who had lived in this town might not have known about this “truth”. They had also researched about the person who had requested them to investigate this haunted house, and was able to find out about his identity. However, Shu wondered about the reason why the person had decided to hide his identity, to which Senri and Rui unexpectedly had the same deduction towards the reason behind it. 

They guessed that somebody might be inside that house, but it definitely can’t be the owner of the house, since according to the information that they had found, the owner had already passed away. 

However, according to Kuki’s investigation earler on, there were traces of items around the house which Senri deduced that they might have belonged to someone who has some sort of relationship with the owner of the house. But the person was not someone who was related to the owner, as Rui’s research showed that none of the owner’s relatives were staying here, nor were there any traces of them having visited the house at all.

(This entire part sounds really confusing to me actually. I tried my best to write down what I could understand and translate from the screenshots I had ><” Sorry if it ended up really confusing Orz)

Chapter 10: そして,真相の扉 / And... Towards the Door of Truth

Shiro asked why was there a black cat doing here and who was the person who had brought it here. Tsubasa answered that he had came across the black cat during his investigation, and while following it, he realised that the black cat actually had a whole family staying in the haunted house. Shiro then wondered why Kuki had not followed us even though he told us that he would be catching up earlier on. (Hmmm... I wonder where is he exactly....?)

Tsubasa was worried whether “I” was injured, and heaved a sigh of relieve when he knew that Shiro had been protecting “me” very well all this time ^^ He was also glad that Shiro had paced himself to my speed of running when chasing after the black cat just now (even though Tsubasa commented that it was still very fast), and praised him that he’s really behaving like a good senpai taking care of me ^^

Talking about Kuki, Tsubasa suddenly remembered that he mentioned that he had found a key when they were searching around the house in the afternoon. Shiro guessed that Kuki must be trying to use that key to open the locked door that Shiro had came across just now, and was pissed off when he realised that Kuki had lured him off into investigating the right side of the house, and mentioned that he’s going to beat Kuki off to the sky when he returned XD

The two went back to the topic about the cats again, where Shiro asked Tsubasa that the cats were being reared in this house. (So perhaps someone is taking care of them...?) Tsubasa mentioned that there’s even more cats than the ones that were here currently, and asked Shiro whether he had came across any of them. Unfortunately, the only cat we had seen was the one that Shiro and “I” ended up chasing.

Just then, even more cats appeared (up to 5 of them), with Tsubasa mentioning that he had also came here while chasing after one of them. Shiro deduced that perhaps the sound of items banging into each other and the laughter might be caused by these cats, while Tsubasa guessed that it could be the wind too, since it had been blowing ever since they had stepped into this house. Shiro decided that they shall now have to the owner of the cats, who could be the culprit that was behind the haunted house.

Suddenly, laughter could be heard in the house, and Tsubasa who was hearing it for the first time, asked Shiro whether this was the laughter which we had heard the last time. It was then Shiro realised that one of the doors near them seems to be connected to the room with the locked door that we had came across the last time. We heard voices coming from behind it, and thus Shiro decided to open the door slowly to hear more of the conversations, as the voices currently sound really muffled and hard to listen.

However, the door creaked as Shiro complained about it, but Tsubasa was very excited, saying that his heart was racing and remarked that he was actually quite afraid of this reverse situation of being in pressure. (But... Tsubasa you look really happy though? ^^:)

Shiro in the end decided to open the door forcefully and shouted at the people inside to show themselves (or say show their true selves). However it was too dark in the room that Tsubasa had to diss that he can’t see the “culprits” true selves due to how dark it was XD

Just then, Kuki appeared and told us “That’s it!” He decided to reveal the culprit and that would be.... himself! (Ku...Kuki?!)

Chapter 11: 最奥の部屋 / The Innermost Room

Shiro was confused and demanded Kuki to give an explanation about it. But, Kuki told us that he was actually joking when he said he was the culprit, and assured us that the culprit wasn’t really a ghost actually ^^; He reminded us again that he had mentioned that he's someone who would only believe in whatever he had seen, and revealed to us the “real” culprit - Hinamori!

Kuki asked Hinamori what was he doing here, laying out all the grotesque objects out of the floor. Hinamori answered that they should be called as horror goods instead of grotesque goods and explained that he was actually laying out his collection and deciding what body organ to be put next to the heart. (In other words, I think he’s just rearranging his collection in a way.) Surprised by us who had came here, Hinamori asked us if we’re here to look at his collection ^^; (So cute that he’s asking this naively but... Hina~ Nobody would come here for no reason and visit your collection ><”)

Kuki answered that unfortunately we aren’t here to look at his collection, instead we’re here due to our work, which is to investigate this house, as there were spotting that people had heard laughter and water sounds from this house, and also poltergeist happenings in this house. Hinamori revealed the reason behind these sounds and happenings, they were caused by the traps that were layed out by him. He further on explained that reason behind why the mannequins hand would float in the air (controlled by fibre threads), and the origin of the water sounds (water coming out by itself from the tap - probably leakage?) As for the laughter, it was coming from Hinamori himself when he was in glee whenever he had gotten blood from Suzu-kun when he was preparing the chicken... ^^: 

The key which Kuki had picked up actually belonged to Hinamori. He had lost it recently but turns out Kuki had found it in the end. Hinamori happily showed us the chicken blood which he had gotten, but ended up dropping it by accident. In the end, even Kuki doesn’t understand whether Hinamori was laughing or crying when he remarked that it’s a waste of the blood and the world is going to end. (Just because of spilled chicken blood...? o.O)

Tsubasa offered to clean up while getting Hinamori to calm down, comforting him that he would definitely get his hands on some beautiful blood again. Hinamori calmed down, but he was in low spirits that Kuki remarked that he seems scarier like than when compared to when he was laughing or crying just now. “I” also tried to help to comfort Hinamori by handing him a handkerchief to wipe his tears. This seems to cheer him up a little as he complimented that “I’m” really a person with beautiful blood. (Erm... Thanks... I guess? ^^;) "I" even rolled up “my” sleeves to show “my” arm to Hinamori and that seems to be cheer Hinamori alot~ (Or say... was too much as he totally got too excited over seeing “my” blood pumping in the arteries O////O) There was also blood on the handkerchief actually so Hinamori got even more excited... Kuki and the others quickly tried to clamHianmori down once again, before he gets too excited to the point he collapsed =w=“

Shiro was pissed as he realised that this was all Hinamori’s fault in the end, though Hinamori was more interested in asking “me” whether he could have “my” handkerchief and add it into his collection. (Tsubasa was quite worried whether it was alright for “me” to give the handkerchief stained with blood away to Hinamori... ^^;)

Regarding Hinamori’s key which Kuki had picked up, he explained that he had actually borrowed it from the owner of this house. This came as a shock to us as we were told that the owner of the house had been dead since a long time ago?! Hinamori wondered whether the person he had saw was actually a ghost in that case, and apparently this pissed off Shiro too much that he almost beat Hinamori up. (Violence is not good Shiro!) In the end, Kuki decided that we head back to the detective agency to talk about this incident and get Hinamori to follow us back too.

Chapter 12: 幽霊屋敷の主 / The Owner of the Haunted House 

Back at the detective agency, Kuki told Shu that as what he had earlier text him about, they had managed to solve this “mystery” behind the haunted house. He remembered that Hinamori had behaved quite weirdly when he was talking about the city legends the last time they were discussing about that topic, and realised now that it was Hinamori himself behind it. Tsubasa was impressed that Kuki had already suspected Hinamori back then, to which Kuki answered that he had found out that Hinamori was usually out and came back later in the nights when the eerie spotting were encountered as well. 

Hinamori apologised to everyone for causing inconvenience to us, and Senri comforted him that it wasn’t anything to apologise about actually. However, he was curious why Hinamori had specifically went to that house to layout his horror collection. Hinamori explained that his room were already full of horror items, and thus he initially wanted to display the rest of them in the laboratory.  But Naoto had found the items to be obstructing and demanded Hinamori to take it away. He was pondering what should he do with his horror collection when he unexpectedly met the owner of the haunted house, who had told him that if he had made the house to have the legend of it being a haunted house, no one would dare to come near to it, and allowed Hinamori to put his collection there.

Shiro changed the target that he should be pissed off to Naoto instead, saying that Naoto should the real culprit XD (If Naoto hasn’t demand Hinamori to move his stuff away, all these won’t have happened ^^;)

Now what they found puzzling was that the owner of the house was known to have already passed away in the information given to them, so Kuki asked Shu if he had knew whether the owner was still alive or was really dead. Shu answered that the owner was indeed still alive, as the owner’s name was written in another way as he was born in another era different from them, and thus led to Shu and the others to read his name wrongly initially. Therefore, the person that they had found to be dead in their initial research turns out to be another person instead. Senri added on that other than the fact that the owner was still alive, he had also become the head of a really huge company. The person who Hinamori had met wasn’t a ghost, since there were records of the owner returning to the country within this month. 

However, Shu realised that there was still one mysterious part that he couldn’t understand. The person who had sent in the request to investigate the haunted house was actually someone who doesn’t exist in this world. Shu and the rest of Class 1 had searched for the name, address and age of this person to find out about his identity, but they could not find there’s such a person and thus deduced that this person was someone who doesn’t exist in this world. Kuki guessed that it’s most probably a prank set up by someone, (someone made up a fake identity =w=“) whereas Hinamori felt that it’s something more like an occult / supernatural case that he’s a fan of~ 

Class 1 had also asked Class 5 to do a fingerprint test on the letter they had received regarding the request to investigate this case. Other than the fingerprints of the detectives in the agency, they had located a new fingerprint. However, comparing with the fingerprints in their database, the fingerprint doesn’t belong to anyone in the database either. Kuki deduced that the fingerprints might belong to a criminal and suggested to them that they check with the “secret” (or say hidden) database as well, which Senri answered that they did check using some underhanded methods, but the results ended up to be the same. Therefore, Senri came to the conclusion that the fingerprint doesn’t belong to anyone in this world, but according to Class 5, they were sure that the fingerprint belonged to a human, and definitely not a fingerprint that was made up. Even if the fingerprint was in fact something that was made up to such a high quality, Senri guessed that the person must have a large database of fingerprints and had the sick hobby to collect them =w=“ Even though the power of science had allowed them to be able to analyze fingerprint, it’s hard to create one to mimic the look of human’s skin and the little injuries as seen on the fingerprint.. 

Senri made a little joke at the end, saying that there’s a possibility that the real identity of the person who had sent in this request was actually the ghost who had stayed at that haunted house. However, he realised that he might have taken the joke too far when he saw that he had scared Shiro instead XD

Kuki just thought of the case as being a weird case overall and just wanted to close the case, even though he knew everyone would have felt spooked and intrigued by the mysterious part behind the case. (Kuki you sound you just want to get it over and done with ^^;) He lectured Shiro to write his report this time round (since he skipped out the last time) and was glad that this case was closed in the end~

And that was it for this spooky mystery~ It’s actually kind of interesting in the end, especially that last part of that was yet to be solved in the end~ Nobody would knew who was it who sent in the letter I guess ^^;

As this case focused mainly on Class 7 (and of course Class 1 as the support), it satisified me greatly seeing that I’m a fan of Class 7 ^^ Hinamori also get some chance to shine since he usually doesn’t appear much as compared to Suzu-kun or Naoto~

Next case would also be a happy case~! I hope I’ll be able to write about it next week, so please look forward to it~! ^^

#viidog code #event story #summary #translation #otome game #vd:event #vd:translation #class 7 #class 1 #hinamori

[momorabu]

14.10.2017

Viidog Code Event Story - 黃金のアルパカを探せ! / The Search for the Golden Alpaca

Was pumped up today and thus finished writing up this post in a day ^^ Now I’m on track with my translations for Viidog Code and should be in time for the Halloween event story next~ But first, let’s go on a trip with Class 2~! +W+

As always, the summary of the story can be found below. Translation may not be 100% accurate due to my poor Japanese skills~

Chapter 1: 牧場へ行こう / Let’s Go To The Farm

It was the long awaited holiday break for the detective agency, and Ryohei was all hyped out as he announced that they should plan where they should play during this long break. Hijiri invited “me” to come and join them for their trip, and in the end, both Ryohei and Yu got into a debate on where they should go for their trip. Ryohei had wanted to head to the amusement park, whereas Yu wanted to go to the zoo instead. 

It was impossible for the group to head to both places in one day, and thus this had became a problem for Class 2. Hijiri asked Yu whether he would be alright in heading to these places as they would be very crowded during the holiday, but Yu assured him that he’ll be fine if Hijiri is by his side ^^ Yanagi reminded the others that there’s still a possibility that there’ll be jobs coming in for them even though it’s a holiday, to which Ryohei remarked that Yanagi was still strict as ever ^^;

Hijiri told us that it was Senri who advised us to use this holiday break to relax for the day from our daily work. (So cute that he actually called Senri “Sen-chan” XD), and since this was what Class 1 had instructed us to do, Hijiri said that we should follow their “orders” and enjoy ourselves~ ^^ (Ryohei said that he’s already in his “break” mode once Senri gave his “okay” for them XD) 

Chihiro asked Yanagi to just relax for the day, and even Ryohei remarked that if they’re too tired, they won’t be able to perform well at their job later on. (This was what his grandma had said to him ^^) 

Now it’s back to the trouble of deciding the venue to go for their trip. Hijiri suggested that why not we head to an amusement park that has animals in it, and showed us a flyer.... to a farm OWO It was not just a normal farm (as stated by Hijiri), as it also had a corner which allows visitors to touch the animals, and also various "big toys” there too. (Look at Yu and Ryohei’s shock faces here XDD)

This gets both Yu and Ryohei’s approval, since for Yu he would want to feel the fur of rabbits and capybara, and Ryohei would be able to try out those huge toys that reminds him of athletics. Reading the flyer, Hijiri mentioned that there would also be alpacas over there too, and the farm even had their own “idol”, which was an alpaca who had golden fur. Chihiro was deeply interested in this golden creature and said that he had to go there and see for himself +W+ 

There was also other workshops in the farm which allows visitors to make butter and yogurt using the fresh milk in the farm. Chihiro suggested to Yanagi that they attend these workshops together since it would be an unique experience for them to make their own food. Yanagi blushed as he admitted that this experience could be useful for them in the future if they knew how to make those products. (Seems that Yanagi was actually interested but... he’s too shy to admit it >////<)

Since it was decided that Class 2 shall head to the farm for their trip, Hijiri announced that we shall make our preparations and head out in the morning the next day. As it was the holiday break, there was also a gourmet fest held at the farm, so Hijiri predicted that we would be able to eat some delicious food for our lunch. 

Just then, Suzu-kun heard us mentioning about “gourmet” as he was passing by, and was interested to know why we had gathered in the living room. Yanagi informed him about the gourmet fest which would be held in the farm which we’re going later on, and Suzu-kun was surprised to know that a very famous shop would be at the event, as this shop had not yet opened its outlet in this town. 

Even though Suzu-kun was very interested in the event, unfortunately, their break day was only tomorrow so he only had one day to head to the event. He wondered whether he should shift some of his work and plans around and told Class 2 that he would greet them if he ended up meeting them at the farm there. Suzu-kun asked for a copy of the flyer from Hijiri and waved good bye to them as he started making his own plans for his break day tomorrow.

(Even Yanagi had started to look forward to their trip, and told the others not to expose their tummies in the night when they sleep in case they get a cold XD)

Chapter 2: 電車の旅 / The Train Journey

The next morning, Ryohei and Yu greeted “me” as Class 2 get ready for their  trip for the day. Yanagi had to nag at Hijiri for sleeping while standing, while Hijiri was murmuring in his sleep instead. (He was talking about how he needs to hide and let the monster passed by him first before heading over to save Yanagi... I wonder what kind of a dream it is ^^:)

Chihiro remarked that Yanagi seems to be already tired before they even set off, to which Yanagi revealed that he indeed felt abit tired as he was waking Hijiri up since 5AM OWO” (That’s early... Yanagi, but what time is it now and Hijiri is still yet fully awake? Orz) Yu was surprised at how early Yanagi had woke up, since he was still in his dreams playing with the alpaca at that time ^///^ (Yu’s dream is adorable~ <3) Yanagi said that it was something he was used to do doing already, and asked Ryohei and Yu whether they had gotten a good night sleep rather than getting too excited that they’re unable to go to sleep the night before XD 

Hijiri finally woke up and thanked Yanagi for waking him up so that he would be able to get up earlier than usual today. Yanagi was just relieved that Hijiri had not overslept today and reminded him that since “I’ll” be joining them today, he hoped that Hijiri doesn’t cause any trouble for the group ^^;

We got on the train, and Yu happily announced that he wanted the corner seat and Hijiri to sit next to him ^^ (Ryohei sat on the other side next to Hijiri) Yu asked Hijiri to show him the flyer of the farm again, and he started to get excited wondering where they should explore first. (The petting corner or to see the golden alpaca first?) Ryohei wanted to watch the alpaca first since the flyer was in black and white so he doesn’t know how shiny the alpaca would look like, and thus wanted to know as soon as possible XD 

As Hijiri had brought along a video camera, he decided to use it to film the group. But Hijiri wasn’t good in handling the camera, and Yanagi worried that he might ended up pressing the wrong thing and spoiling it instead. In the end, “I” offered to help Hijiri to operate the video camera, as Hijiri asked Yu to speak in front to the camera and tell everyone what we’re going to do today at the farm. 

The reason why Hijiri wanted to to record down Class 2′s outing today was to showcase them as part of Class 2′s growing record at the end of the year, but Yu found that to be too embarrassed and rejected to do it. (Aww... Yu~~ TWT) But in the end, Yu decided to do it seeing that “I” was interested to watch it XD (Yu just can’t win against “me” I guess XD)

Yu said shyly that we’re going to the farm today, and he was looking forward to seeing the golden alpaca. Hijiri complimented that he’s cute, but Yu said that he should compliment him to be “good-looking” instead as “cute” XD (But you’re too cute Yu >///<) As the train started to approach the farm, the train started playing music related to the farm ^^; Chihiro found the music really calming and soothing though, and even requested “me” to film the scenery outside of the train.

As the train was coming to a stop at the station we’re supposed to alight, Yanagi reminded Ryohei and Yu to sit at their seats and wait for the doors to open before alighting. (Yanagi sounds like a mum XD) 

Chapter 3: 牧場の楽しみ方 / Fun Times at the Farm

Yu started to get really excited when he reached the farm, exclaiming that there’s an area where one could feed rabbits over there and wanted to run there. Yanagi stopped him and lectured him that he shouldn’t be running off by himself, while Hijiri asked Yu whether he was alright with the crowd as the place was very crowded. Chihiro was surprised that how lively and crowded the farm was, since he was expected it to be calming and relaxing. 

Suddenly, Chihiro shouted out in surprised as he was shocked to see a cow walking on two legs. Ryohei laughed and remarked that it’s just a mascot and there’s actually a person inside the cow’s outfit. The mascots (turns out that there’s two of them) approached them, and Yu recognised them as “Ussi” (a male cow mascot) and “Capybara”. Ussi and Capybara introduced themselves as the friends of the golden alpaca - Mohun. 

Yu timidly asked the mascots whether he could shake hands with them, which they agreed, and even offered to take a photo with us too. Yanagi offered to help us take the picture, but a staff appeared and offered to take the photo for us instead, so Yanagi also joined in the photo taking. The mascots encouraged us to pose in the same pose as them, and everyone followed~ (It was quite an interesting pose, right foot kicking out, left hand placed on the waist, and right hand posing like one is drink a glass of milk XD)

After the mascots had left, Yanagi asked Yu whether he was afraid of the two mascots. Yu answered that he’s not afraid of them, since they were really adorable looking. (Yu is more adorable than them~ <3)

Ryohei remarked that he had the desire to drink milk now that he had posed that pose, and got Yu to join him. Yanagi initially wanted to stop Yu since Yu always had dislike drinking milk, but Chihiro stopped him from doing that as it might be a good chance for Yu to get over his dislike of milk this time. Yanagi felt that it might too much to expect Yu to get over his dislike of milk suddenly, but Chihiro suggested that they attend the workshop and made products made of milk, since Yu might be interested to eat them instead. In the end, Yanagi, Chihiro and Hijiri decided to make them while Ryohei and Yu went off to the petting corner and to look at the golden alpaca. Yanagi was worried about leaving the two youngest members off by themselves, but “I” volunteered to go with them too, so Yanagi felt more at ease letting them go in the end ^^

It was then decided that we’ll all meet up again at 12PM. Ryohei started pulling “my” hand impatiently towards the next area while Yanagi called after them not to cause any trouble for “me” ^^;

With Ryohei and Yu gone, the rest of Class 2 could finally get started with their workshop to make some delicious butter, though Yanagi reminded Hijiri that he shouldn’t touch those electronics if it’s required to use them XD (I guess Yanagi is really afraid that Hijiri is going to break them or something ^^:)

Chapter 4: キャンディを召し上がれ / Here’s Some Candies

Ryohei and Yu pulled “me” towards the green field, where Yu exclaimed that he’s glad that he’s now free to explore the place. Even though Yu had seen the website of the farm and knew how shiny the golden alpaca is, he read that the actual creature was even more beautiful than what was shown on the page and thus wanted to see it for himself soon. 

However, the place where the alpaca could be seen isn’t listed on the map, and thus Ryohei challenged Yu to compete who would be the first to find the golden alpaca. Yu agreed to the competition, on the condition that “I” would go with him, but Ryohei felt that it’s unfair seeing that it seems like 2 VS 1 situation with this arrangement ^^: 

Suddenly, Ussi appeared again and apologised to us that the map that was given to us was an old version. He gave us a new map in exchange of the old one, and even offered us some milk candy that was made by his girlfriend - Hanako. (It sounds like an advertisment, saying that they’re made by fresh milk and really delicious. And if they like it.... they could always come to the store and buy them +W+)

Yu didn’t want the candy after hearing that it was made of milk, but Ryohei tried it and said that it was really delicious to the point that he considered buying them at the store later on to share with the others at the detective agency. After seeing Ryohei’s reaction and asking “me” whether it was that good, Yu decided to try one for himself. Even though Yu found that milk had a weird taste when he tried it usually, unexpectedly this milk candy doesn’t have that weird taste and was really delicious. He claimed that he had actually tried eating something he dislikes, and asked for a praise from “me”. This made Ryohei jealous and he told Yu that he’s being unfair XD (*Gives Ryohei some love too~ *pats pats*)

Looking at the new map, Yu identified that there’s a place called “Mohun’s place” and realised that it’s where we’re at currently. However, the golden alpaca was nowhere to be seen, and Ryohei wondered perhaps it was hiding from them. There was a crowd creating a commotion at the area, as they wondered whether the alpaca was on break today. (That would be sad for them if it’s really true TWT)

Suddenly, Ryohei smelled something really good from a distance away and decided to ran to the place instead. Yu hurriedly ran after him, telling him that if Ryohei get lost, Yu and “me” would be lectured by Yanagi for losing him, and Yu would hate to get nagged on by Yanagi ^^;

We ran into the woods, and realised that the place we’re at was where the gourmet festival would be held. Ryohei called out to us as he spotted Suzu-kun and Naoto over there. Yu was still shy before Naoto, that Naoto had to ask him to please get used to him since they’re colleagues for quite a while already ^^;

Suzu-kun explained that Naoto was actually in a bad mood and probably aimed at Yu just now with his sarcasm, since he didn’t get what he was looking for. The item which Naoto was looking for was a knit sweater made by the fur of the golden alpaca, but he realised that it was not an item that was sold at the farm, but instead a prize at the food contest. Naoto wanted to participate in the contest and win the first prize, if not he won’t feel happy about it. (Imagine seeing that item you had wanted being given to others in the end ^^;)

Suzu-kun informed us that the contest starts at 1PM, and it was 12PM now so there’s still one more hour to go. We realised that it was time for us to meet up with the others and thus quickly left the place to make our way back.

Chapter 5: 2班印の乳製品 / The Milk Products Made By Class 2

On the other hand, Yanagi, Chihiro and Hijiri were participating in the workshop, where they could make butter and yogurt. There were also workshops teaching them to make soft serve icecream, but since they could not eat it right away, they decided not to participate in that workshop. 

Yanagi offered to be the one handling the utensils in the workshop, as he’s afraid that Hijiri might broke them. In return, Hijiri decided to the cameraman instead, recording down the moments where Hijiri was hard at work in making these products ^^ Yanagi told Hijiri that there’s no merit for him even if he filmed him (sounds like he doesn’t want to be filmed that much), and Chihiro added that Hijiri could film him more instead XD

Chihiro got a surprise again when he saw the mascot again. However, the mascot greeted them as if it’s seeing them for the first time, that Chihiro found that it seems abit cold seeing that they’ve just interacted moments ago. Yanangi guessed that it’s a different person inside the costume and asked Chihiro to just forgive them and let go of it. 

Turns out that the tutor of the workshop was also a mascot (Hanako), which Yanagi pitied the person in the costume, as he guessed that it must be difficult trying to teach while wearing the costume. However, the appearance of Hanako gets a huge and happy reaction from the kids that participated in the workshop, that Hijiri felt that perhaps they should have gotten Ryohei and Yu to join them afterall.

Hijiri asked Hanako whether there’s any products that’s suitable for children who dislike milk, to which she assured them that the products that they’re making today was definitely suitable for children who dislikes milk. (Really...?)

First up was the lesson of making butter, where they poured cream into a jar and started shaking it. Amazingly the cream started to solidify and turned into butter as they shake the jar, which made Chihiro felt really surprised and accomplished at their finished product.

Next up was Yanagi’s turn to be making the yogurt. Hanako complimented that Yanagi’s cute and that ended up making him blushed as he was embarrassed >///<

Yogurt would require the cream to go through a round of removing bacteria first, and after that it just needs to go into a special container to be mixed. Yanagi was amazed that the yogurt was creating just by mixing, to which Hijiri remarked that Yanagi looks really happy. This made him embarrassed as he claimed that he’s just surprised since he had never seen such a process before ^////^

Hanako asked them whether they would want to participate in the contest to be held later on. The contest was one where they would get to compete against other team by answering quizzes and playing games as a team, and the prize for winning the contest would be to take a photo with the farm’s idol - Mohun! As Mohun was really popular it was hard for visitors to take a photo with it usually, and thus ultimately chosen as one of the grand prize for the contest.

Chapter 6: 目指せ, モフーンと記念撮影 / Goal: The Souvenir Photo Taken with Mohun

After their workshop, Yanagi was impatiently waiting for us to get back as we’re late to the meeting time. Chihiro remarked that perhaps Ryohei and Yu were actually having too much fun riding on the back of the golden alpaca. (That’s quite something to imagine about.)

We finally arrived back at the meeting spot, with Ryohei apologizing for being late as we’re talking with Suzu-kun and Naoto just now. 

(Yanagi was glad that “I’ve” taken good care of Ryohei and Yu, and he thanked “me”~ No problem Yanagi, always glad to be of service +W+)

Hijiri asked us whether we had a chance to meet Mohun, which unfortunately nope, since Yu mentioned that even though we had head to Mohun’s place, it seems that it wasn’t there. A large crowd of people had gathered at the place though, and Yu wondered whether something had happened. Ryohei also informed them about the contest and the grand prize was the knit sweater made by Mohun’s fur, to which Yanagi added that one could also take a photo with Mohun as part of the grand prize too.

Yu wanted to participate in the contest, saying that he could just hide behind Hijiri. Unfortunately, Yanagi informed Yu that Hijiri would not be participating in the contest since one of the rounds in the contest was cooking. (And there’s no way Yanagi would let Hijiri cook I guess ^^:) However, Chihiro told Yu not to worry since he would be replacing Hijiri and appear in the contest, so Yu could always hide behind him ^^ (Nice to see Chihiro being a reliable big brother here~) 

As the most members a team could have was up to four person, it was ultimately decided that the four members would be Yu, Chihiro, Ryohei and “me”. Hijiri encouraged “me” to join in the contest, saying that the others would be motivated to work hard if “I” was there with them, even Chihiro said that he would feel more at ease with “me” accompanying him since if not it would seems that he’s the only one leading the two kids ^^;

Soon the contest started, with the announcer talking about the grand prize that the winners would get to take a photo with Mohun, and also the young children would be able to sit on it too. Ryohei said that Yu would definitely be small enough to sit on Mohun, which pissed Yu off though as he rebutted back that Ryohei’s tiny too XD

The announcer assured the contestants that even if they lose they would still get entrance tickets to come back to the farm again next time. Yanagi deduced that it won’t be a loss to the farm if they had given out free entrance tickets since the tickets aren’t that expensive, and the farm would still get to earn some profits when the visitors bought more of their products. (Business strategy~)

The first round would select only four teams to head to the second round, and the second round would eliminate another two more teams, leaving the remaining two groups to face off with each other to win the grand prize. 

Ryohei noticed that Yu seems to have lost his spirit after seeing the audience, and thinking that his shyness might have act up again, he told Yu that the audience were all looking at Ussi and Hanako, and not at him instead. Chihiro joined him and told Yu that he could always hide behind him, and told them to all work hard together so that they could take photo with the golden alpaca in the end ^^

The first round required the contestants to catch as many rabbits as they could within the time limit. Ryohei remarked that this was such a “service” round for them, since Class 2 were really good at catching animals XD Even Yanagi felt that they might be playing cheat since this was technically part of their job, but Chihiro told them that they had practised such skills for this day actually XD Even Hijiri agreed with what he had said, and told us that he’ll be filming us in action as we catch the rabbits ^^ 

Turns out that our team (Team Dogs) performed really well, working in combination to catch the rabbits, and made it beautifully through the first round~

The second round would require the contestants to answer some quizzes, where the topic would be regarding the knowledge of animals and farm life. Team Dogs also made through it easily and thus made it to the final round, where we had to go through a face off with our competitor through cooking!

Chapter 7: 負けられない戦い / The Battle Which Can’t Be Lost

As the final round was about to start, the crowd were cheering really loudly, making Chihiro felt like he was a popular person XD For Yu it was a terrifying experience though, as he doesn’t want the limelight to fall on himself. 

The announcer showed off the two teams that would compete against each other in the final round. One of them were Team Dogs, which was our team, and the other team was... “Suzu-kun is mine!” Team! (From that team’s name you could guess whose team it is ^^;)

Naoto and Suzu-kun appeared, with Suzu-kun commenting that the team’s name sounded really weird since there’s his name in it. Ryohei was surprised to find that Naoto and Suzu-kun had entered in the contest and even went onto the finals, to which Yu had to diss him that he had not discovered at all seeing how Naoto and Suzu-kun were obstructing them already in earlier rounds ^^; Chihiro felt that rather than obstructing, it’s just Suzu-kun’s team were faster in pressing the button and answering the questions before them during the quiz round earlier. 

Seeing that Suzu-kun was in the opponent team, Yu felt that it was impossible for us to win them, but he still wanted to work hard to win in the end since he wanted to take a photo with Mohun~ 

As the last round would be a cooking contest, both teams had 30 minutes to prepare a dish suitable for the kids, as the children in the audience would be the judges of this competition. They could use anything that they could find in the farm for their dishes, and anything that was brought in from outside of the farm was not allowed. 

Chihiro found that the name of Suzu-kun’s team was kind of ridiculous, but Ryohei found it very suitable for them since this was a catchphrase of Naoto~ (”Suzu-kun is mine!”) Naoto overheard them and agreed with what Ryohei had said XD

Suzu-kun in the meanwhile was already deciding which ingredient to use for their team’s dish. Naoto said that he wanted to eat pudding made by Suzu-kun, with eggs specially produced by this farm. Suzu-kun gave a glum face as he told Naoto that they’re supposed to think of what they should make for the audience to eat, not for Naoto to eat instead XD However, Naoto rebutted saying that the children likes pudding too, so it’s fitting to make it for the contest.

Suzu-kun ignored Naoto’s request and continued looking through the ingredients available to him. He stretched out for some sausages, and got the attention of Hanako who complimented him that he had some really good taste of what to choose. This triggered Naoto’s jealousy though, as he stepped forward and told Hanako not to talk to Suzu-kun so casually, since she already has a partner called “Ussi”. He claimed that Suzu-kun is his and thus if one wants to talk to Suzu-kun, they would need to get his permission first ^^; Since Hanako already has Ussi as her boyfriend, Naoto advised her not to set her eyes on other guys since Ussi would feel sad about her actions. (Why are you suddenly giving people relationship advice Naoto? XD) In the end, Naoto ended off his lecture by telling Hanako not to get near to Suzu-kun. (Naoto’s overprotectiveness and obsession over Suzu-kun is showing here ^^;)

However, Hanako doesn’t seems scared of what Naoto had said earlier on, and continued to talk about the sausages to Suzu-kun. The sausages were a product the farm was very proud of, coming out from their ham and sausages factory here. She explained about the spices used in the sausages to increase the appetite of the people eating it, and claimed that it’s very popular among the kids. 

Suzu-kun wanted to use the sausages after that, but Naoto insisted on making pudding, saying that the children loves pudding too, and even insulted Hanako. In the end, Suzu-kun agreed to make pudding for Naoto’s sake, and hoped that he would stop insulting Hanako. Hanako praised Suzu-kun for being such a gentle guy to protect her (from being insulted ^^:), and told him that she’s getting even more interested in him. Even Suzu-kun realised that Hanako seems to be saying that on purpose to agitate Naoto ^^;

Chapter 8: 事件は突然に / A Sudden Incident

Even though there were some happenings occuring during the contest (as stated by the announcer), both teams had completed their dishes in the end. Naoto approached Ussi and told him to control his girlfriend, since she had set her eyes on “his” Suzu-kun. Hanako introduced the pudding made by Suzu-kun to the audience, saying that they look as delicious as the person who had made it (Suzu-kun), and that pissed off Naoto once again ^^; 

On the other hand, Team Dogs had made a simpler menu, which is cooked hot dogs! It also had a special sauce to go with them, the special yogurt made in this farm~ It was now up to the audience to try out both dishes and vote for the one which they had found to be more delicious. 

Suzu-kun talked about the dish which he had prepared, which was pudding. Even though pudding was one that everyone was used to eating, Suzu-kun felt that with the fresh ingredients available in the farm, it would taste abit different from the pudding that one would normally buy. He had also changed the amount of milk and sugar used in making the pudding, and created a specially made version of pudding in the end. Suzu-kun was confident that his pudding would definitely be delicious, and told the audience that he even had hand-written recipe available for anyone who was interested to try making it with the ingredients found in the farm. (Way to promote the farm’s product Suzu-kun ^^;)

The announcer was amazed by the service provided by Suzu-kun, and said that the pudding might even ended up being a new product by the farm. (Please give credit to Suzu-kun if you decided to use his recipe for a product Orz)

Chihiro and Ryohei were next in introducing the sausages to the audience, saying that though the yogurt sauce was something most would not expected to be, it actually goes well with the salty sausages. Both sides were really popular with kids as they were swarmed with them. Naoto remarked that the kids had low taste in food and thus would be surprised by how detailed and delicious the food made by Suzu-kun, to which Suzu-kun said that Naoto being a picky eater shouldn’t be saying this about the children ^^; (That’s mean, Naoto ><”) 

The voting period was soon over and now it’s the time to announce the results. However, just before the announcer announce the winner, Capybara (one of the mascots from earlier) appeared and told the audience a bad news. It seems that Mohun had escaped! She asked anyone if they had spotted it, since it would be very obvious to see it if it was walking around at the venue. 

It was indeed bad news for both teams, as who would have expected that their grand prize would disappear. Yu immediately volunteer to find Mohun, and Naoto also offered to help too, since without Mohun, he won’t be able to get his hands on the knit sweater made by Mohun’s fur too. The announcer was surprised that we’re actually detectives, and was wondering whether he should find the owner to talk about the payment with us. However, Hijiri assured him that we’re doing this as a service to them, the memories that we’re getting this time would be enough for the repayment ^^

The announcer told us that if we’re able to find Mohun, he would offer us the chance to all take photo with Mohun. And thus, we decided to split into two teams to search for Mohun.

Chapter 9: 結成! アルパカ搜索隊 / Set Up! The Alpaca Search Team!

Yu, Ryohei and Yanagi searched the fields, but couldn’t manage to find Mohun even though it wasn’t such a small animal. Chihiro felt that it was weird that Mohun couldn’t be spotted at all since it should be very easy to see it since it was a “golden creature”. Hijiri told us the information provided by the staff who took care of Mohun. The door to its shed was opened, and it seems that Mohun had escaped when the staff had his / her eyes off it for just a short moment. Hijiri guessed that perhaps there was a reason why the alpaca had escaped, with Yanagi being all pumped up since this would be their first time searching for a alpaca.

As Yu had done some research on the animals before we came to the farm, Chihiro asked him whether he had knew anything about the lifestyle of alpaca which could aid their search Mohun. Yu remembered that alpaca would vomit out grass if they want to scare anyone away, which Ryohei found that it wasn’t a very nice act to do by the alpacas ^^; Yanagi thought that it was something alpaca would do to protect themselves from danger and didn’t think it was a rude act to do, though he agreed with Ryohei that it was quite a smelly act to do though ^^:

Yu also remembered that alpacas would always live in groups, to which Chihiro deduced that Mohun must have wanted to meet its friends again and thus escaped from his shed. Ryohei remarked that Mohun must have felt lonely after being separated from its friends, since the others were able to live together in a group yet it was the only one left out from them. 

In the end, everyone decided to head to the alpaca pen in search of Mohun, while Yanagi thanked and prasied Yu for his knowledge, and said that even if it’s not for a job or work related task, it’s still very important to read up on stuff. “I” patted Yu on the head to praise him, and Ryohei and Chihiro also joined in, wanted to be patted by “me”. Hijiri asked Yanagi whether he would want to be patted by “me”, but he blushed and asked why Hijiri was asking him this, and also urged us to head to the next place XD (Yanagi is seriously adorable when he’s flustered~)

When we headed to the alpaca pen though, we could only find white coloured or brown coloured alpaca. Ryohei started to suspect that perhaps the golden alpaca was actually dyed gold, but Yu told him that he had read on the website that Mohun’s fur had started to turn gold one day, and thus considered a really rare and special case in this world. Chihiro urged us to quickly find Mohun, since if it wandered out of the farm, there’s a great possibility of it being captured and taken away by anyone. 

Yanagi informed us that Suzu-kun had contacted him earlier on, and they couldn’t find Mohun either. Hijiri suggested that all of us here split into two groups to further search for Mohun, and to contact each other frequently and share any information which we could find along the way. Hijiri, Ryohei and Yanagi would form a team, while Chihiro, Yu and “me” would form the other team.

As both teams made their way back to the fields, Chihiro opened his eyes wide to look for any clues that would lead us to Mohun. However there wasn’t even a speck of Mohun’s golden fur on the ground. Yu started to worry whether Mohun had left the farm, but Yanagi assured him that the farm was surrounded by high fences to prevent animals from escaping, and thus deduced that Mohun must still be in this farm somewhere. 

It was soon sunset, and Hijiri was sad to inform us that we would have to stop our search for Mohun once the sun had completely set into darkness. (I guess it would be too dangerous to search for Mohun as it was too dark by then.) Ryohei felt disappointed and regret, as searching for animals was Class 2′s forte. Yu told us not to give up now, and that he would definitely find Mohun before the sun completely sets. 

Chapter 10: 消えた理由 / The Reason It Disappeared

We ended up splitting into two teams again to search for Mohun, and Chihiro thought that we seems to have missed out a place while we’re looking for Mohun. However, he was tired and couldn’t work his brains, and hope to drink a cup of tea at this point of time.

Suddenly, Yu suggested that we used Mohun’s favourite grass and waved it around to see if it would attract him out to us. Chihiro thought that it was a good idea, and felt that Mohun would definitely come after smelling the smell of the grass. However, it ended up attracting a bunch of sheeps instead, that Chihiro was fully surrounded by them, and was surprised that the grass had such an attractive power to these herbivore ^^; 

Yu was also surrounded by the sheeps on the other side, and quickly asked for help in saving him. We did managed to save him in the end, but his clothes were all stained with fur all over it by then ^^; The sheeps had all ran away once the grass had ran out for them, but Mohun still didn’t appear at all. 

We met Suzu-kun and Naoto, who was also still searching for Mohun. Naoto complained that Mohun was quite a troublesome alpaca, since it had tortured “his” poor Suzu-kun to search for it. However, he guessed that this was the attitude of an “idol”, and confessed that Suzu-kun was his idol actually. Naoto won’t be able to reject any work which Suzu-kun asked him to do XD (Naoto’s sudden confession XDD) Suzu-kun just felt that Naoto was speaking weird things now that he’s tired ^^:

Suzu-kun said that they had found everywhere which they could find, to which Chihiro suddenly remembered where they had left out from their search - The shed which Mohun stays in and had escaped from. Saying that the culprit would definitely return to their crime scene, Chihiro deduced that perhaps Mohun had returned to his home. However, upon arriving there, the staff was disappointed to inform them that Mohun had not returned at all D:

Naoto started to get fed up regarding the search and wanted to go home already. Yu didn’t want to give up as he thought of how Mohun must have felt so lonely and crying at this moment. Naoto tried to comfort Yu not to worry, since if the alpaca had escaped into the streets, it would definitely cause a huge commotion and would be reported all over the social network. He couldn’t say anymore comforting words though, and gave a “baton touch” to Suzu-kun to do that instead. Suzu-kun laughed and remarked that he had seen a rare scene where Naoto would actually encourage someone XD

Chihiro asked the staff whether the shed they’re at now was Mohun’s private shed. The staff answered yes and that as Mohun’s popularity exploded, alot of people would take photo of Mohun once it came out from its shed. Chihiro deduced that there has to be another shed inhabited by the other alpacas and guessed that Mohun might have headed there, since even though we had went to the alpaca pen, we had not head to their shed yet.

As expected, Mohun was there at the shed with the other alpaca. Seeing this scene, Chihiro felt bad about taking Mohun back to his own shed since it’s obvious that Mohun had escaped here as it wanted to be with its friends. Yu said that he could understand Mohun’s feelings seeing its lonely face, and admitted that he had felt lonely and sad when he was first separated from his family and came to the detective agency. He had felt worried and scared since he was surrounded by people he doesn’t know back then, and have to do these work provided by the detective agency. Yu had read that Mohun could perform alot of tricks from the farm’s website, and guessed that Mohun must have worked really hard all this while. (Aww~~ TWT)

Yu assured Mohun that it would be alright, since he would inform and beg the staff to let Mohun stays with its friends, and so Mohun won’t feel lonely anymore when it’s with them. 

Suddenly, Mohun started kneeling, which Naoto explained that it meant that its heart had opened up to Yu. Chihiro praised that Yu had really grown as a detective, as he was able to read the expressions of the animals now. (Yu definitely suits to be a pet detective ^^)

Chapter 11: ニットのめくもり / The Warmth of the Knit Sweater

It was night time when we returned to the staff and informed them Mohun’s whereabouts. The staff assured it that they would not let it be lonely anymore, and told us to get ready to take a photo with Mohun. Chihiro remarked that this was a photo opportunity that took a lot of hard work for them to get it, so they would definitely be able this experience when they looked at the photo in the future. 

Ryohei asked the staff whether a small child would be able to sit on Mohun’s back, and assured Yu that he’s asking him for his sake since he had wanted Yu to ride on it in the first place and Yu was the person who had found Mohun in the end. (Aww~ Ryohei sound like a such a sweet big brother here caring for Yu~ ^////^)

The staff requested everyone to pose the iconic pose that was taught to them earlier, but Naoto refused to do it. Suzu-kun encouraged him to do it together with us but Naoto told him that this sort of things was something Suzu-kun should know that he’s bad with it. Since Naoto didn’t want to be do that pose and be in the photo, Hanako suggested that she shall stand next to Suzu-kun instead. That immediately pissed off Naoto as he claimed that the spot next to Suzu-kun was his special spot. (I guess that means Naoto had no choice but to join in the photoshoot in the end ^^;) 

There was also another gift given by the staff, the knit sweater made by Mohun’s fur. Ryohei said that Yu should take it since he had worked the hardest, but Yu decided to give the sweater to Naoto instead, as he knew that Naoto had wanted the sweater very much. (That’s so sweet of Yu ^^) He was scared to approach Naoto and talked to him by himself though, but Hijiri encouraged him to do that, and told him that Naoto would definitely be very happy to receive the knit sweater. 

In the end, Yu decided to approach Naoto and gave him the sweater. The scene was a touching one for Hijiri, that he remarked that no matter how many times he had seen it, he would get touched over and over again ^^;

Hijiri told us that he would showed us the video that he had taken today when we get back to the agency, while Ryohei told Mohun that we’ll definitely come back to the farm again on another day ^^

Chapter 12: 旅の終わり / End of the Trip

It was the next morning when we took the train back. The farm had given us entrance tickets to the farm as a reward for finding Mohun too, and Hijirir had also bought lots of souvenirs back for the others at the detective agency. (Milk manju and fluffy cakes) Yanagi sighed as he remarked that Hanako was a character which left a strong impression on him, to which Hijiri happily announced that he’s going to show everyone the embarrassed expression of Yanagi when Hanako flirts with him ^^; 

It was the first time for Yu to stay overnight at somewhere other than the detective agency, so he admitted that he was too excited to fall asleep the night before. He had found the trip to be really enjoyable, but also very nostalgic at the same time. He had remembered the time when he had first joined the agency when he met Mohun, and Chihiro remarked that Yu had cried every night at that time. Ryohei added that even though they had started working together at that time, Yu had not spoken a word to him at all. Yanagi also said that if he spoke to Yu at that time, he would ran away and hide behind something instead, and that made it difficult for Yanagi to look for him. The only person Yu had gotten close easily and fast was Hijiri, and Yu explained that it was because Hijiri was big and easy for him to hide behind him, and even if Yu ran away from him he won’t get angry either. (I guess perhaps Yanagi and Ryohei would get angry at Yu initially for his actions ^^;)

Hearing this, Hijiri was glad that he’s huge as it provided the opportunity for him to get close with Yu, and further leads to Yu being in a good relationship with everyone else later on. He hoped that Yu would further be closer with others from the other classes as well in the future, that Yu told him that he would work hard for it even though it won’t be something that would happen suddenly~ (Ganbatte Yu~!) 

Chihiro remarked that Naoto wasn’t a bad person. Even though he may seem like a problematic person, he’s someone who could be relied on as a class leader. Even Yanagi agreed and said that Naoto was a good class leader that had fulfilled his responsibility if one ignore the attitude problem of his, and hoped that Hijiri would learn more from him XD Hijiri complained that Yanagi’s gaze on him was painful XDD

Yanagi praised “me” for doing a good job as an assistant, and had even helped Class 2 alot on their work. Ryohei guessed that at this rate that “I’m” improving, “I” might be able to attain a detective license in the near future, and asked “me” whether “I’ll” like to join their class when that happens. However, Yanagi deduced that Kuki would be mad at them if they gotten “me” over to their class. Yu was glad if “I” joined them though, even though he won’t like if it’s someone he doesn’t know. 

Hijiri said that there would be times where work can be hectic, so he hoped that “I’ll” join them for outings like this in the future to relax, since there’re still places which we can go in the future, like the zoo and the amusement park. Chihiro felt that he was satisfied in seeing animals for now and would rather to head to the amusement park, since there’re rides that he’s interested to get on~ +W+

As we arrived at the entrance of the detective agency, Yanagi reminded us that we had to write a report since the detective had knew about the commotion yesterday at the farm. Hijiri mentioned that Kuki and Tsubasa had expressed envy at our situation, saying that they wanted to go to the farm too. Chihiro said that he’s going to make them even more envious by telling the tales of what happened at the farm to them, and got Yu to join him too. Even though Yu was still shy about talking about his trip to the others, he said he would work hard if “I” stayed next to him~ ^^ (Of course I would, awww~ Yu is seriously so adorable here ^^)

And that’s the end of the event story~ Overall it was quite a fun time to interact and enjoyed on a trip with Class 2, it totally feels like a class outing to me XD Great that we get to see Suzu-kun and Naoto along the way too, though Naoto’s obsession... I’m not sure whether I want to laugh or cringe or both ^^;

The spotlight for this event story was none other than Yu, he was seriously so adorable being shy at times, but really hyper and expressive when he’s all bubbly like that~ This other side of Yu was adorable too, though sometimes he can be quite demanding too XD (I like how he suddenly gets all angry and serious when talking to Ryohei at times too) 

Listening to the others talking about Yu’s initial days at the detective agency was interesting too, it’s like knowing abit of his back story and wanting to know more~ Too bad his past won’t ever get revealed TWT TWT I wanted to see more of Yu~~

Next up would be the Halloween event, which is also a fun yet thrilling event story~! Hoping that I’ll be able to finish by Halloween~ *Finger cross*

#VIIDOG CODE #event story #summary #translation #otome game #vd:event #vd:translation #Class 2 #Suzumori #Naoto

[momorabu]

27.05.2017

Viidog Code Main Story - Episode 2 - 迷子の小犬搜查隊 / The Search Team for the Missing Puppy

Decided to translate my next episode of Viidog Code since it’s nearing the end of May now and I still haven’t translate it yet~ It’s nice as a little break before I start on my next Ensemble Stars’s story translation~ This story was fun because it has two of my favourite class - Class 7 + Class 2 <3

As always, the summary of the story can be found below. Translation may not be 100% accurate due to my poor Japanese skills~

Chapter 1: 平和と退屈は紙一重 / Peace and Boredom is Just a Difference of a Piece of Paper (meaning just a slight difference)

Early next morning, “I” woke up and went to “Cyan” for some breakfast, and unexpectedly met Kuki there too. He mentioned that Shiro and Tsubasa were still sleeping, and that “I” should also get more sleep too since “I” was still new here, and that being almost late for once or twice won’t be that serious. Shu who was nearby, came forward and mentioned that we should obey the rules even if being late isn’t that serious nor will cause much trouble for others. Kuki tried to change the rule such that if one worked hard for a month, then they are excused from being late for one time. (Haha, that’s a “nice” idea, but somehow I don’t think Shu would allow it ^^;)

They started talking about the other groups and Kuki mentioned that he actually didn’t have much chance to interact with other groups much recently. It’s actually rare for everyone to gather together in the detective agency, since every group has different case that they are working on, and thus such rare times only happen when everyone was called upon to gather to work on a huge case together. (That would sound very serious if such a mode is activated OWO”)

Kuki thought that it’s still best to communicate with other members as much as possible and have a better relationship overall, and thus requested Shu to give some work that requires Class 7 and other class to work together.

It seems like there’s a new case which came in this morning, as the meeting room was booked by Rui earlier on, and thus he was abit late when joining Shu and Senri later on. Kuki doesn’t like the fact that Class 7 was being looked as though they aren’t the type of people who would start work early in the morning, and claimed that if there’s such a case that requires them to, they too can start their operation in the morning. (That’s not really convincing when you have class members still sleeping now, Kuki... =w=“)

Rui ended up revealing a secret of Kuki, saying that there’s indeed a time where Kuki was still drowsy while sleeping and ended up falling off from his bed ^^; (Why are you revealing Kuki’s secret suddenly ^^;)

The topic changed towards Class 3 (since I guess they’ve already started working too this early), and Kuki mentioned that from their appearances they do seems like the morning type of person~ XD

Rui was interested on how Kuki could tell if someone’s a morning type of person or a nightife type of person, to which Kuki didn’t really tell him how he could tell but guessed that Rui’s a night type of person. (Which is partly correct I guess, since Rui didn’t really deny it ^^:)

The conversation continues, with Kuki asking Shu once again to let his class be involved in the upcoming case. Shu seems really bothered, and thus Senri wanted to help solve his trouble by… offering to carry Kuki’s seat out of the shop since he was bothering Shu XD (He even started lifting off Kuki’s chair ^^; That made Kuki panicked as he pleaded for Senri to at least let him listen to Shu’s answer XD)

Obviously Kuki was abit pissed at Senri even after he put him down, and asked Senri had he forgotten that Kuki was actually older than him. (So in terms of seniority, Senri should respect people older than him ^^;)

Senri cheekily answered that he didn’t and won’t forgot, as long as Kuki doesn’t bother Shu. (So obviously Shu’s interest > Respect for Kuki in Senri’s mind ^^:)

Kuki and “I” were planning on going off to find Leo to get today’s jobs when Rudo appeared in the cafe. He asked to speak with “me” for a moment, and handed “me” a packet of cookies, saying that he had received it from his client and decided to give it to me instead, thinking that “I’ll” be glad to get them actually. Initially “I” felt bad about taking it from Rudo, since it’s something meant to be given to him in the first place, but he claimed that he could make more… nope, he didn’t want it XD (So… I guess the cookies were actually made by Rudo himself and he wanted to give it to me instead? XD)

In the end, Kuki was still begging Shu to give him work with other classes… ^^;

Chapter 2: 手のかかる班長 / The Troublesome Class Leader

Class 2 arrived next, and Kuki seems interested to know what case they were working on. Hijiri was still half asleep, with poor Yanagi trying to wake him up. He complained that bringing Hijiri here to the cafe was hard, and asked him to please consider for his sake since Hijiri was quite big-sized ^^; (Well, he’s big and tall so it’s going to be hard for small Yanagi to carry him around while he’s sleeping ^^;)

He called for Yu to bring some cold water for him to wake Hijiri up with, but Yu was too shy and was hiding instead from Kuki and “me” instead. Seeing that seems shy and afraid of us, Yanagi assured him that they’re not strangers to him and apologised for his behaviour to us.

Hijiri tried to sit on “me” somehow and was quickly prevented by Yanagi/ He apologised once again, explaining that usually he would only bring Hijiri out when he’s slightly more awake, but since they’re being called out to here (probably by Shu) suddenly, thus Yanagi didn’t get much time to prepare for Hijiri to be more awake this time ^^; Passing the glass of cold water to him, Yanagi urged Hijiri to drink it up and wake up.

Hijiri finally woke up, and he wanted Yu to come sit next to him, but Yu was wary as he’s afraid that Hijiri might fall asleep again XD (and ended up crushing him hahaha) Yanagi proposed that he shall sit between Yanagi and Hijiri instead, so that at least Yanagi could help him if anything would to happen to Hijiri ^^;

Finally they started to talk more about the new case Class 2 was assigned to by Shu, and Kuki quickly jumped at the chance to want Class 7 to work together with them to solve this case.

(Random scene: Seems like Hijiri dirtied his hands and Yanagi was all being like a mum demanding him to stretch out his hands so that he could wipe them properly ^^;)

Chapter 3: 迷い犬を探せ / Search for the Missing Dog

Class 2′s job of the day was to search for a missing dog, which is a light brown pomeranian. Yanagi called for Yu to take out the photos to show it to Kuki and “me”, but Yu was still shy and he was standing quite far away from Kuki, and that made Kuki had to diss him on the fact that he can’t see the photo if Yu stood so far away from him XDD (In the end, Yanagi helped to save the day by saying he’ll send a copy of the photo to Class 7 later on… ^^;)

Ryohei arrived next, and Yanagi scolded him for being late, however Ryohei said that he’s not late yet and it’s just them being early. In fact, there’s still one more person from Class 2 that had yet to arrive…

And that’s Chihiro~ (He’s the last to arrive this time again ^^;) He has arrived just “on time” though (just one minute more and he’ll be late ^^; but seems like Yanagi didn’t nag him more on that though XD), and has also brought along the cage that they would use later on to capture the pomeranian.

Yanagi leave the task of setting up the cage with Ryohei and Chihiro, saying that he’ll accompany Class 7 along with Yu and Hijiri to collect the relevant information they needed for this case.

We headed off to the laboratory which is Class 5′s territory to retrieve the information from them, and met a guy with his fringe down that his eyes won’t be seen. He remarked that there seems to be alot of people entering here, which Kuki explained that’s because Class 2 and Class 7 had come here at the same time which made the lab seems crowded. Kuki also introduced “me” to him, and vice versa. This guy is Hinamori Kiyoto and he asked “me” whether “I”…. like blood? (That’s a weird first question to ask when you met someone new, Hina…)

Seeing that “I” seems to be quite afraid of him, Ryohei assured “me” that Hina is a good guy, except… that he seems to like blood alot. (And Hina got abit sad since he wondered if he had said something bad… Well, that kind of topic is abit “no-no” ^^;)

Later on, when all of us moved towards the company office to talk more about the case, “I” ended up hurting my finger and blood oozed out. Hina got really excited when he saw “my” blood that Chihiro had to ask him to calm down. Hina wanted to see more of “my” blood and even volunteered to treat my injury. (Why did I feel more unsafe knowing he’ll treat my injury… He’s not going to end up sucking all of “my” blood right? ^^:)

Hina ended up feeling disappointed when he knew he has to stop looking at “my” blood and start treating my injury. He expressed that even though he wanted to see more of it, he shall give up today. (Whew! If he had started getting more agitated, I have no idea how the situation is going to be… ^^;)

Chapter 4: みんなの住手 / Everyone’s Assistant

Finally we decided to start our operation on finding the missing pomeranian! Initially it was planned that all of us shall split ways so that we could find it sooner, but Kuki said that someone might ended up being lost if they’re alone, and so Yanagi suggested that we split into 4 groups, with two people in each. Since in total there’s 9 people and one person will be left out, Kuki suggested that “I’ll” be that person and took turns in helping each group instead. (And that’s how “I” ended up being everyone’s assistant ^^)

The arrangement of the group was to be decided via kuji, but Yu felt that this arrangement is being bad to him since he isn’t good at dealing with people he’s not close to, especially Shiro, who looks really scary to Yu ^^; Yanagi sighed and told him that if Yu had really gotten Shiro as his partner, he’ll swap with him so that Yu won’t be paired up with Shiro. (Obviously that didn’t make Shiro very happy, since it sounded totally like he’s someone “not wanted” actually ^^;)

They carried out the kuji, and those with the same number will be paired up together. Yanagi wondered who would be “sacrificed” to be pair up with Hijiri though~ (That totally sounds like Hijiri would be a burden with whoever he’s paired up with =w=“) Hijiri revoked him by saying that nobody will end up being a sacrifice since Hijiri would take good care of his partner definitely. (Really…? o.O)

Yu was still scared and he asked “me” to actually replace him to go around and let others draw the kuji since “I’m” an assistant. However, “I” assured him that “I’ll” be by his side helping him instead, and that made him want to work abit harder in doing this task himself in the end. Yanagi was impressed that Yu was actually able to talk to others that are not in his class by himself for the first time, and Hijiri actually wanted to record a video of such a moment~ (Hijiri totally sounds a dad on his child’s first day of school XD)

Yu managed to approach Shiro in the end, and even got him to pull the kuji. Hijiri actually did record it all down in the end, saying that he’s making a record of how the kids grew up XD

(Yu was so cute that he’s glad he did it in the end, and asked for “my” praise~ *pats his head*)

Everyone checked on their kuji to see who they’re paired up in the end, Kuki wasn’t happy that he got Shiro, since he wanted to have a new experience by pairing with one of the people in Class 2, but then again, it maybe best this way since he can control Shiro from running rampage XD

Yanagi had never expect that he would pair up with Hijiri again ^^; (Ended up the “sacrifice” he was talking earlier on was actually himself in the end XD)

Ryohei and Chihiro were in a pair together, and that left with… Yu and Tsubasa in a pair. Yu was standing in a far away distance away from Tsubasa, that Tsubasa had to try to assure him that he’s not going to bite him ^^;

“I” shall tag along with Kuki’s group at first, and after awhile “I’ll” head off to another group to assist them and so on. Shiro wanted “me” to carry the cage initially, but Kuki insist on Shiro carrying it, explaining that it would be much more efficient this way. (Or maybe he felt bad letting a girl carrying the heavy cage… ^^;) He teased Shiro that maybe Shiro finds the cage heavy and thus too heavy for him to carry, of course that ended up trigger Shiro’s button and he’s going to carry the cage to prove to Kuki that it’s not heavy XD

Chapter 5: 犬探しも樂じゃない / Isn’t It Happy to Search for a Dog

Kuki and Shiro ended up calling for the pomeranian’s name along the street (Its name is “Mimi”), with Shiro dissing Kuki that the dog won’t be replying to his shouts even if he had hoped for a response. After awhile, Kuki said that it’s best for “me” to go take a look at the other members, especially Tsubasa and Yu who Kuki felt worried about.

And thus, “I” headed off to Tsubasa’s side~ Even though Yu and him were still maintaining a distance away from each other, they’re still searching for the missing puppy together. (I guess…?) Tsubasa said that the distance they have between them is 2M, if Tsubasa ended up going within this limit and Yu realised it, he would quickly run away from him to maintain the same distance away again ^^;

Tsubasa was sad and wondered if he’s really that scary, but “I” assured him that he’s actually a really good person and it cheered him up ^^ He asked for “my” help to take a look at Yu and see if he’s tired, since he would always replied that he’s okay even when Tsubasa asked him.

“I” headed off to Yu’s side and asked about him. He was surprised to know that Tsubasa was worried about him, and clarified that he’s indeed alright and not tired right now, and quickly sent “me” away to Tsubasa’s side to help him instead. (Aww, Yu, why are you pushing me away~ TWT)

The two of them decided to split ways for awhile to search in a circle, with “me” accompanying Tsubasa. But even when we meet up again in the center, there’s still no sign of “Mimi”…

We ended up meeting Chihiro’s and Yanagi’s group too as everyone ended up meeting at the same area from their search. Yanagi proposed that we tried another kind of way to search for Mimi, since even when everyone has split up and searched in a large area for a long time, there’s still no sign of “Mimi”.

Ryohei started to get worried for Mimi, since the longer it gets, the more lonely it’ll feel, and if it started to get panicked and scared by other things outside, it might ended up running even further away and that will make the search harder and harder.

However… at this time, “Mimi” appeared!

Chapter 6: 追いかけた先に / What Lies Before the Chase

Everyone began to chase after Mimi, with Ryohei in the lead. Yanagi quickly called for Hijiri to come with them, and stop sitting in front of the cage. (Is Hijiri just sitting there waiting for Mimi to come into the cage…?) Yanagi even realised that Hijiri had put his own snacks into the cage hoping to lure Mimi into it, and told him that this is not something meant for a dog to eat since it’s for human. Hijiri still thought it was a pretty good idea since that was really a very delicious omanjuu XD (He even happily suggested that everyone should eat omanjuu together later on ^^:)

Tsubasa and Yu was trying to catch up with Ryohei’s speed, but it was hard since he was so fast. Ryohei’s spirit dog / animal was a Dachshund, which was a hunting breed and thus it feels like Ryohei’s on a hunt acually.

Chihiro was running with Ryohei initially, until he got distracted when he saw some robot dogs on display at a toy shop. Ryohei even joined him in looking at the robot dogs and in the end they were too engrossed in it and forgot about their chase ^^; Thankfully, Ryohei snapped back and realised that they were still supposed to chase after Mimi, but at this time Yu and Tsubasa finally caught up with them.

Yu scolded Ryohei for running off by himself, saying that this would anger Yanagi definitely, but Ryohei felt that it’s better to chase after Mimi rather than losing sight of it again.

Yu was actually worried about “my” legs being tired since “I” had to run along with them too, and Ryohei praised him that he had grown up to take care of others now. (*Pats Yu’s head~*) Yu shyly replied that it’s just because he doesn’t have a good stamina before and thus had such experience before… Chihiro had also thought that Yu had grown up to even think for others, and pat his head since he thought that Yu had wanted one as he was hanging his head down. Yu denied but still ended up complaining that if Chihiro wanted to pat his head, he should do it more gently XD (Aww, these two’s interactions are funny XDD)

We spotted Mimi once again and chased it down, but Ryohei stopped his steps suddenly when we entered a dark alley…

Chapter 7: 迷い子ん込だ暗閤 / Lost in the Dark

Ryohei replied that he had saw some weird people gathering at the spot where Mimi had stopped at. Yu started to get really scared when he saw alot of scary people, and Chihiro started to feel that something’s weird with this people, and thus suggested us to hide and see how the situation was like first.

Tsubasa urged for “me” and Yu to hide behind while Chihiro urged for Ryogei not to pop up his head too much in case we get discovered.

Just then, Yu noticed that Mimi had went near the foot of one the person, but our attention was diverted when we saw a person coming out from one of the building.

On the other hand, Yanagi and Hijiri had also came to this alley and noticed the person walking out from the building. Hijiri guessed that the person seems to be related to the casino, since the building belongs to the casino. Yanagi had noticed that Ryohei and the rest of us hiding at a distance in front of them, and they deduced that we must be there while chasing after Mimi. Thinking that it’s best to let us know that they’re here, Yanagi proposed to call one of them. But then he realised that Ryohei may ended up being loud while he’s surprised by the call, and decided to send a message to Chihiro instead.

But… turns out that Chihiro’s phone started ringing in a very loud sound, and that alerted the weird group of people instead ! (Ah! Bad choice there, Yanagi! ><”)

Chihiro quickly urged everyone to escape, but Yu was worried, saying that they shouldn’t leave Mimi behind in a situation like this.

Yanagi realised he had made the wrong choice, and might even cause his comrades to be discovered because of him… ><” (Since he didn’t realised that Chihiro’s phone would ring…)

However at this time, Hijiri seems to have a plan on his own, as he picked up a stick on the ground and then threw it towards us. Mimi noticed it and quickly ran to chase after the stick, and straight towards the cage Ryohei had with him. With Mimi caught safe and sound, we made a dash to run away from the weird people who were chasing after us.

Chapter 8: それぞれの思い / Thoughts Here and There

The weird people began to chase after us, claiming that they’re going to force us to say which organisation we’re from when they’ve caught us. Tsubasa asked Ryohei to pass the cage over to him since it might be heavy for him to carry it and run at the same time. He was surprised that Yu was running away at a really fast speed, that Ryohei just laughed and replied that it’s a special trait of his, that his speed of escaping from something was always 2 times faster than his usual running speed XD

Suddenly, “I” stopped and picked up something from the ground. It was a pin badge, but this was a really dangerous time to stay put so Tsubasa quickly asked “me” to hold onto his hand as we escape together. (This may seems like a very shoujo scenario… if only we aren’t running for our lives along with a bunch of people and scary people chasing after us ^^;)

We’ve finally escaped in the end, and also managed to contact Yanagi and Hijiri, informing them we’re safe. (We also contacted Kuki they all to relay the news that we’ve found Mimi.) Yanagi apologized once they’ve met up with us, saying that due to his negligence, him contacting us ended up causing us almost to be caught. Chihiro said it’s partly due to his fault too, and he shall put his phone on a softer volume next time ^^

Hijiri was worried about Mimi, since it doesn’t look so good. Yanagi realised that it must be really thirsty and thus quickly asked Ryohei to open the cage so he can put some water into. Hijiri praised Yanagi for his quick decisions, but Yanagi still felt sorry for what he did just now and said that his decisions aren’t always correct, and thus he doesn’t felt worthy of the praise. But Hijiri said that he trust Yanagi’s decisions, and if anything crops up, there’s always him to help out. (Wow… Hijiri suddenly sound alot more reliable OWO)

Chapter 9: 搜索隊,歸還 / Return of the Search Team

We returned to the detective agency, and after checking Mimi to make sure that it’s healthy and unhurt, Chihiro went off to call its owner so that he/she would be able to come and pick it up. Shu came into the office at this time, and realised that there’s only “me” from Class 7 there and asked Chihiro where are the others (Kuki, Shiro and Tsubasa). Kuki and Shiro was on their way back but Tsubasa… was gone…?(Not sure where he went at this point of time ><”)

Yu was tired and didn’t really want to continue writing the report actually, but since Senri said that they are free to rest once they’ve finished the report, Yu felt motivated to work on it a iittle bit longer ^^ Hijiri offered to help Yu, but got scolded by Yanagi saying that he should settle on his own report first ^^;

Hijiri reported on what had happened just now to Shu, telling them that they had met a group of weird people and that one of them had came out from one of the doors leading to the casino. Even though Shu did cautioned them not to jump into conclusions that the man was related to the casino, he and Senri can’t help but to feel abit suspicious since Class 7 did report that the casino was suspicious on their last visit to it.

Just then, a new guy appeared, saying that this is the time for him to shine. Senri actually opened his eyes and the new guy felt threatened by it (haha, does Senri’s eyes look like they’ll kill people? ^^:), saying that he’s just sleeping here by chance and overheard their conversations. Shu gave him the permisson to dig out information regarding the casino, though he cautioned him not to get too deeply involved as they only wanted to know whether the casino is related to the “missing people case” that they are working on now. (Imagine if he ended up digging all the dark history and secrets of the casino, wouldn’t it be too much? XD)

The new guy noticed “me”, commenting that “I’m” a sheep among all the wolves, and after knowing “I’m” the newcomer at Class 7, introduced himself as Hodaka Mahiro, the leader of Class 4. He even handed “me” his contact information, saying that “I” could find him if there’s any information that “I” wanted to find out about.

Realising that “I” gave him a confused look, Mahiro laughed and explained that Class 4 is responsible for collecting information and tracking down leads, and requested “me” not to give away his identity as a detective if “I” ever meet him outside. He even welcome “me” to find him even if it’s for private matters. (This guy totally sounds like a flirt straight from the start XD)

However, Kuki returned and Mashiro quickly backed off, saying that “the father” has returned and thus went off. Kuki complained that he was tired and he finally knew what Shiro had felt last time since the two had worked hard today yet didn’t manage to do anything instead. (They must have felt that what they did today was a waste of effort TWT) He noticed that Tsubasa was missing, but brushed it off in the end, and guessed he had just wandered off by himself and won’t do anything weird anyway.

Seeing that we’re all tired, Leo said that he has a new invention that could be of use and thus ran off to retrieve it. Kuki explained to “me” that Leo actually had a hobby of inventing stuff, and was always showing the stuff that he had invented to them when he has finished them.

Leo soon returned and it was a machine with three buttons to select from. He explained that the buttons are in the order of “tiredness”, and thus asked Kuki to select one that he felt suitable to his tired level right now.

(The buttons were: “Abit Tired”, “Quite Tired” and “Almost Tired to Death”. Can’t say I didn’t smile when I read the last option XD)

Kuki thought that the last option “Almost Tired to Death” was interesting, and thus picked that one. A cup appeared after he pressed that button, and Shiro could smell a really sour smell when a liquid started pouring into the cup. Handing the cup over to Kuki, Leo smiled and said this is a special lemonade, the machine will adjust the amount of lemon to be added to it based on the tired level. (If you realised what Kuki had pressed just now, you would know how much lemon it was added to it by now… ^^;)

Kuki tried drinking it nevertheless, and it was…

Very very sour! XD

Shiro tried to make a run for it, but he got caught by Kuki, saying that he won’t let him run away (not without drinking that lemonade too XD). Leo was smiling and requested that Shiro and “me” to pick a button too, claiming that the lemonade was really delicious.

(How can you reject him when he’s all smiling and cute like this >////<)

Chapter 10: 落とし物にはご注意を / Taking Notice of the Dropped Item

Kuki felt that he seems to feel less tired after drinking the lemonade, though his mouth was still full of sourness ^^; Leo noticed that Shiro still seems tired and was worried for him, and Kuki tried to provoke him by saying that he’s definitely lying when he picked “abit tired” option just now, and wanted him to drink even more. (I don’t think Shiro wanted to drink more sour stuff though ^^:)

“I” showed them the pin badge which “I’ve” picked up on the ground while escaping from the weird people just now. Kuki took a closer look at it and commented that it had a mark that he has never seen it before, and decided to pass it to Class 5 to let them do an analyse on it, though he understood that “I” wanted to find the owner of the badge actually. Kuki had a feeling that the badge might belong to one of the guys that was chasing after us just now, and think it’s best to check on it first.

Thus, Kuki decided that we shall head off to Class 5′s lab now, and told Shiro to call Tsubasa and get him to return soon.

Heading to the lab, we met Naoto and Suzu-kun, and “I” handed the badge over to them. Even though Naoto grumbled that they’re closed for the day, he still asked to take a look at the badge from Suzu-kun, and remarked that the badge looks pretty normal and seems like it was dropped from one of the workers who worked at an organisation. Kuki guessed that perhaps it might be the casino, which Suzu-kun agreed since there might be related staff who worked at the casino.

Initially Naoto didn’t want to take up this task to further analyse this badge, but since Suzu-kun encouraged him by saying if he helped him, they would be able to eat sooner (since two of them working on it is definitely faster than just Suzu-kun alone), Naoto had to agree in the end, saying that Suzu-kun was always being sneaky like that XD (What can I say? This guy’s weakness is Suzu-kun ><”)

Kuki felt bad for troubling them as it’s late already, and realised once again that Naoto was actually the class leader. He commented that he would feel that Suzu-kun would seems more suitable, but Class 5′s situation seems similar to Class 2 too, with Yanagi being the more responsible one ^^;

Hina finally returned to the lab, as Suzu-kun urged him to stop slacking and helped them with the task on hand. Realising “I” was there, Hina asked on “my” injury, even suggesting to open the wound and treat it again if it still hurts. Kuki had to quickly stop him, since even by hearing the suggestion already made him feel how hurt it is to open the wound again ^^; (Yeah… That sounds painful ><”)

Suzu-kun gave a weak smile and commented that Hina had been claiming that he had wanted to see “my” blood again when he saw “me” hurt “myself” in the morning. But he assured “me” that Hina meant no harm actually, and wondered that “my” blood must be really beautiful to get Hina this excited. (Yep, Kuki’s expression is my expression too when I see how excited Hina is over “my” blood ^^:)

Naoto couldn’t stand us talking in the lab, and shooed us away, saying that if we don’t go, they won’t be able to continue with their work. Suzu-kun wanted Naoto to stop saying such rude things, since other people won’t really understand Naoto and might ended up disliking him, but Naoto doesn’t care, saying that as long as Suzu-kun understands him, everything’s okay for him. (This guy just really really likes Suzu-kun that much huh…?)

Naoto even wanted to pass his work over to Hina, saying that analyzing fingerprints could be done by him, but Suzu-kun insist on Naoto to work on it, saying that he could check on the design and many other information regarding the badge and said he’ll make dinner for both of them when they are done. In the end, Naoto still have to go on with his work, but asked Kuki not to anticipate too much on the results since he’s just doing his job because it’s requested by Suzu-kun ^^;

Chapter 11: 迷子犬,家に歸る / The Lost Puppy Returns Home

Kuki and “I” returned to the office area of the company, and was welcome by Tsubasa who had returned. Kuki dissed him that he should be the one who should be greeted “welcome home” instead, and asked where he had been just now. Tsubasa answered that he just returned to his room after writing his report just now, so Kuki didn’t question him anymore.

Kuki asked all of us to go for dinner together, since if they just left Shiro by himself to settle his meals… most of the time he’s going to just eat instant meals D: (And that’s not good for the body!) He said that “I” could go over and join the rest of Class 2 in writing the report for today’s incident, as he went off to get Shiro instead.

Seems like Hijiri had fallen asleep while writing his report, that Yanagi, while angry about it, said that he would let Hijiri to take a nap for 5 minutes. But it was really only limit to 5 minutes, since he claimed that he would wake him up by force even if he had to get him to wake up ^^:

This was actually a rare sight for Yu, as he commented that this maybe the first time that Yanagi actually let Hijiri be a spoiled child for once…^^; (This sounds like Hijiri is the child and Yanagi is his mum ^^;)

Tsubasa asked that if we could join them, and Yu said that we could sit next to him, surprising Yanagi since Yu had never sat with any other people before other than those from his own class. He wondered what had happened to Yu to let him have such a major change, and that made Yu flustered as he claimed that it wasn’t that rare since he had worked with “me” and Tsubasa too today.

“I” wanted Yu to be more natural when interacting with us in the future even though he warned “me” that he’s quite different when he’s not really an obedient child actually. “I” was okay with it thus Yu said he’ll try to be more like his normal self when he’s with us next time ^^

Tsubasa was curious about Mimi’s whereabouts now, and Yanagi told him that Sosuke was the one taking care of it and playing with it now. Noticing that “I” seems to want to see Mimi too, Yanagi encouraged “me” to go along with Tsubasa to visit it. Yu wanted to tag along too, but got stopped by Yanagi as he told him to continue writing his report.

Sosuke was glad that we’ve came to play with Mimi, though Tsubasa said we’re just going to stay for awhile since we still have a report to work on. Realising that the owner was going to come soon and pick it up, Sosuke urged for us to quickly hug it while we had the chance to ^^; Tsubasa was glad to have this chance though, since even though we had been protecting it today, we didn’t really have much of a chance to interact with it much.

The owner came in the end though, and Sosuke was sad to send Mimi off, even though he called it as “Miminosuke” which isn’t the correct name. Mimi seems to even remembered that as its name instead, which Tsubasa said it’s going to give the owner a trouble later on ^^; (Imagine it only responding to the owner if he/she calls it Miminosuke in the future XDD…)

Chapter 12: 真夜中の報告 / The Report in the Middle of the Night

Senri, Shu, Rui and Mahiro were at the cafe talking about the case. While Senri offered to refill Shu’s green tea, he doesn’t care about Mahiro when he asked for his serving ^^; (Omg, Senri is being mean to Mahiro XD)

The group noticed that Izana was at the cafe too, deeply engrossed in a book that he’s reading, and Shu suggested to Mahiro that they should let Izana assist them in this case too.

Just then, a report from Class 5 has arrived, and it was regarding the pin badge which “I’ve” picked up earlier on at the casino alley. Even though they didn’t manage to pick up on the owner that the badge belongs to, they’ve managed to track down on a sighting that there’s a man who has the same badge entering the casino building.

Izana finally snapped out of the book he’s reading and approached them, as he seems really interested in finding out more about the casino. It was said that nobody really knew who was the big boss operating the casino actually, and Izana had already knew that the operation’s members had the same badge as the one “I’ve” picked up.

Izana said that he would checked more about the organization members where they have the same badge as the sample, though he remarked that Shu seems to have a good idea what organization it was from… However, that ended up with death glares from Senri, and thus Mahiro asked Izana to keep it down and that they aren’t going to dig too much while researching more about the organization.

Mahiro noticed that Rui was really quiet today but Rui said that he’s just a newbie and thus felt inappropriate to share his opinions. Mahiro thought that Rui was just being humble since he had managed to be in Class 1 though he was still a rookie.

Talking about “rookie”, Izana said that he had heard about Class 7 having a newcomer and wondered when he would be able to meet him/her (which is the "me”~) Mahiro dissed him that the problem Izana wasn’t able to meet “me” was because he hardly comes to the agency and even if he comes, it’s usually late at night. He asked him to please kindly return either in the morning or during the evening XD (Mahiro sounds like a storekeeper here XD)

Yeah! Episode 2 is done~! Even though this episode is pretty much a filler episode since it doesn’t really touch much on the main case they’re after (which is the missing people’s case), we still managed to find some clues that hopefully track down who was this organization going around making people disappear? Is it really related to the casino?

Nevertheless, it was fun to go on a case with the Class 2 members, and interacting with Class 5 as well~ (Finally we get to see Hina here ^^) More characters had appeared too, which are the new Class 4 members~ (Weird that we haven’t met anyone from Class 6 though…? OWO)

Class 2 and Class 7 are my favourites (with Class 5 trailing just abit behind), so you could probably tell that I really enjoyed reading this chapter~ Yu is so cute~ Yanagi is so cute~ Ryohei is so cute~ >///< Seriously the whole of Class 2 is a joy to be with too, same with Class 7~! ^^ (In fact I’m just glad to have so many moments with Tsubasa this time~ >///<)

Hopefully I’ll have another episode translated for next month soon~ (Hoping to get it done earlier in the month since this was pretty late ^^;)

#viidog code #main story #summary #translation #otome game #vd:main #vd:translation

[momorabu]

12.04.2017

Viidog Code Main Story - Episode 1 - 風变わりな探偵たち / The Detectives That Changed Like The Wind (Part 1)

Finally I decided to dedicate time to do some translation of this game - Viidog Code~! I’ve started playing this game from mid December last year, however unfortunately the game closed in February this year due to lack of funds. I really enjoyed the game since it’s pretty much the same as Ensemble Stars, and they too have a range of interesting characters and stories~ <3

I find it a shame that such wonderful characters and fun stories are being buried forever, seeing that I’m a fan of mystery and detectives actually, so I decided to share what I’ve managed to unlock and read over the short one month I have to save all the stories TWT TWT (I didn’t manage to read all the character stories I have, but did cleared all the main and event stories +W+)

So this is pretty much a side translation project that I decided to take up, with a schedule of one story per month (even though I wanted to start last month actually ^^;) So please read on if you���re interested in the world of “Viidog Code”~! +W+

Anyway as always, the summary of the story can be found below. Translation may not be 100% accurate due to my poor Japanese skills~

PS: Since this game asked the user to set a name for the heroine without a default name, I’ve shamelessly used my nickname “Momo” ^^; For the translation, I’ll use “me”, similar to how I translate Ensemble Stars stories~

Chapter 1: 本物の探偵 / The Real Detective

The story starts where a detective(?) talked to “me”, asking me to talk about the incident “I’ve” asked his help for. And thus “I” started talking about “my” past to him.

What “I” remembered from “my” past was heading out to the woods with “my” parents in an outing, and we’re heading home in the car. However, we met with an accident along the way where the brakes won’t work, and the next thing “I” know when “I” woke up, “I” was in the hospital with “my” grandfather looking worriedly over “me”. He was really grateful that “I’ve” woken up, saying that he had thought he might never see “me” again same as “my” parents. (”My” parents have passed away from the car accident unfortunately)

It seems like after the accident happened, someone has brought “me” to the hospital and had looked after “me” up till the point “my” grandfather came and took over. But “I” have no memory who was that and didn’t even know “I” was saved until “my” grandfather told “me” about it. And by the time “I’ve woken up, two months had already passed since the accident. (Seems like “I” was unconscious for a really~ long time…) Since then, “my” grandfather became the one who took care of “me” even though he knew that “I’ll” be lonely since “my” parents are now gone… (Why is it so sad already in the beginning?~ TWT TWT)

Now back to the present after “I’ve” finished talking about my past, what “I” need the detective to help “me” with, was to find the person / people who had helped save “my” life back then. And since he said he’s someone who only take payment first before starting work, “I” was just about to pass him “my” payment when…

A guy (Tsubasa) burst through the door, shouting at us to stop the transaction!

Quickly another guy (Kuki) entered the scene too, and the first guy asked “me” to quickly hide behind him, defending “myself” from the detective. The detective wasn’t happy that his business deal got interrupted and demanded what these “kids” are doing, ruining his plans.

Tsubasa took this chance to diss saying that even though Kuki looks young, he’s definitely not though ^^;

Anyway, they’ve stopped the transaction saying that it’s not valid, and asked the detective to come along with them, as they’ve been searching for him - a trickster who pretended to be a detective to cheat money out of people! (Which is actually pretty much true since the “detective” was just about to get “my” money at the moment)

The detective is obviously not pleased that these two guys were suspecting him and thus denied about it saying that he indeed in a detective. It was then demanded that it’ll be best to show his detective license to prove himself. The detective reluctantly took out his license, and Tsubasa peered and sniffed at it, saying that even though it looks just like a real one, it has a different scent to it. (Does Tsubasa have a really good sense of smell? O.O”) So he deduced that the license is probably made of a different material and not a true license.

It’s actually kind of sweet that Tsubasa was assuring “me” that it’ll be safe to be with them for now as they’re the “real” detectives, but that angered the fake detective instead saying that they don’t dress the part like one XDD

This made Tsubasa thinks that maybe they should have changed their outfits to be more like a detective, since it looks like the fake detective seems like a detective than them in appearance XDD (Tsubasa… Looks are not everything since in this case, I think it’s more suspicious wearing a trench coat style detective outfit outdoors actually ^^;)

The fake detective, being frustrated that this conversation is going nowhere and interrupting his plans, asked “me” to stop hiding behind them and go along with him. He even wanted “me” to hand the money over to him for “safe keeping” =w=“ Tsubasa quickly stopped him though, saying that they actually have evidence of him cheating people of their money. Since the fake detective self pro-claimed that it can’t be and that he have not left any evidence behind (it’s like indirectly admitting you’re a cheater already…), Kuki asked Tsubasa to show the culprit himself what’s the evidence that he had forgotten about.

Chapter 2: 運命の出会い / The Meeting of Fate

Thus Tsubasa began to take out the “evidence”, showing a photo of a pomeranian that was missing (The photo was given out by the owner to aid in searching it). Then he showed another photo of the pomeranian which the fake detective had found, which under close inspection they’ve realised that the two pomeranians aren’t the same and that means the fake detective had “found” the wrong pomeranian back for the owner.

And now the fake detective started to deny that he wasn’t the detective who took up this case of the missing pomeranian ^^;… But it’s no use denying since Kuki said that they’ve managed to trace the fake detective’s fingerprints on the collar of the pomeranian. The fake detective could of course try to prove that the fingerprints on the collar aren’t his by going with them for a fingerprint match, as Kuki asked Tsubasa to call for “Class 5″ to prepare the procedure for it.

Seeing that the situation was not looking good for him, the fake detective decided to make a run for it. However Tsubasa was even faster than him as he quickly caught him and even sat / stepped on him to prevent him from running away ^^; (Funny that Kuki actually gave the “okay” for him to do that XD)

Just then, an unknown stranger actually brushed past “me” and made off with “my” packet of money! Tsubasa had noticed the stranger running away and even though he didn’t manage to catch a glimpse of his face, he might be able to catch up to him following his scent. Realising the stranger is probably an accomplice of the fake detective, Kuki decided to capture the fake detective first and let “others” catch up to the stranger, and thus let Tsubasa handcuff him to the table.

However, Tsubasa is someone who is really bad with handcuffs, that he almost twisted the poor guy’s elbow / hands. (Not that I should take pity on him… =w=“)

Now that everything seems to be settled, the two guys finally had a chance to do some self introductions! The short guy on the left with red hair is Kuki Michiharu, whereas the tall guy with brown hair on the right is Koganei Tsubasa. And different from the guy that they just captured, they’re the real detectives XD

“My” money is gone though TWT, but Kuki is willing to hear about “my” scenario on why “I” wanted to hire a detective, so “I” told them “my” story about wanting to find my savior back then.

Kuki can’t help to hide his shock when he realised that the packet of money consisted of all “my” life savings OAO” (So… now I’m totally peniless…!??) Seems that “I” really wanted to find “my” savior and meet him / her / them that “I’m” even willing to sacrifice all of “my” savings…

(Thanks Kuki, for letting me know that “I’m” indeed broke and peniless… TAT TAT)

They don’t hold onto the hope of “me” getting “my” money even after they catched the guy that took it just now (seeing how he might dropped it off somewhere or passed it to yet another accomplice), and knowing that “I” don’t really have anywhere to go or anyone to rely on now (apparently “my” grandfather had passed away too recently TWT), Kuki decided to lend a helping hand by asking “me” to go with them to their side. They had a workers’ hostel over at their detective agency and other than there’s no other females, there won’t be any problems at all~ (Is it me or when he said that, it’s like advertising they only have guys there… How can there be no problems when it’s just “me” as the only girl there though =3=“)

Tsubasa was also glad that “I’ll” be joining them, saying that “I’ll” definitely be able to get along with everyone there~ (Is that so…)First, “I’ll” be their assistant instead of a detective there, as “I” do not have a detective license.

(Yep, as much as Tsubasa said everyone is a “good” person there, Kuki definitely thinks that there’s a couple of troublemakers there ^^;)

Tsubasa probably called Kuki something that’s considered disrespectful to him, to which Kuki has to clarify that even though he looks young (having a baby face), he’s much more older than him… (Kuki, you don’t have to advertise that you’re THAT old actually ^^;)

And thus “I” followed them back to their detective agency for now, with Kuki saying that meeting “Class 7″ here can be consider a fate as well~

Chapter 3: 人とは異なる者たち / The Human and the Weird Beings

On the way to the detective agency, Kuki did a short introduction about it. The detective agency is “D.O.G. Detective Agency” but “I” have not heard about it at all and thus was very apologetic about it, however Kuki just said that’s because they aren’t as well known yet ^^; The detective agency currently houses 25 detectives and that “I’ll” get to know them when “I” meet them ^^ (since Tsubasa said even if they introduced everyone to “me” at once, “I” won’t be able to remember them all =w=“)

Now for the important part, all the staff in the detective agency are part of the “Kenrouzoku” (literally meaning dog-wolf pack…), including him and Tsubasa~ Kuki is more surprised that “I” don’t even seems to know about “Kenrouzoku” at all actually. More about “Kenrouzoku”, they look like human but they possess some special powers that’s from the wolves, for example running fast or having a very good sense of smell. And Tsubasa used his sense of smell just now to identify whether or not the license card is real or fake just now just by using this power.

It’s best to think of each of them having a species of dog as their spirit animal, which is said that “Kenrouzoku” had received gods’ power in a way. Each person had different species of dog which is according to their families. Kuki’s dog species is “Toy Poodle” (So cute and tiny, just like Kuki in a way XD), whereas Tsubasa’s golden retriever (very similar since he’s tall and hyped like one too~ ^^)

Apparently Kuki hates people calling him small / short, so when Tsubasa mentioned that he’s tiny like a toy poodle, he warned him that if he said anymore he won’t give him anymore snacks ^^;

Finally we’ve reached D.O.G Detective Agency after much chatting, and entering the office on the 2nd floor, Kuki called out to someone named “Shiro-chan”, announcing that they’re back…

And this is Kirishima Shiro, one of their comrades. It’s said that it’s usual that he looks fierce and asked “me” to don’t mind about it ^^;

Shiro also belongs to the same class as Kuki and Tsubasa, and was also on the case of the fake detective. However, he was tailing a different target today which is why he didn’t appear with them before.

Shiro was curious about who “I” am, and thus Tsubasa proudly showed “me” off, announcing that “I’ll” be a part of them starting from today. Kuki added onto explaining my situation, saying that “I’ve” been cheated by the fake detective, and being penniless now, they brought “me” here…

Funny how Shiro just conveniently blamed “me” of him getting the wrong target today,… (Not my fault that the person he tailed wasn’t the culprit =3=“) And he doesn’t like how “I” started calling him “Shiro-chan” like the others, saying it’s embarrassing… ^^;

“I” got nervous / scared that “my” face twitched to making a scared face but no idea why Shiro thought “I” was smiling instead… =w=“ The other guys quickly helped defended “me” from him, saying that Shiro was the one trying to pick up a fight here.

Chapter 4: ようこそ, 探偵事務所へ / Welcome to the Detective Agency

In the end, Shiro left in a huff, saying that he’ll not approve of “me”, just because “I’m” a human and not a “Kenrouzoku” =w=“ Kuki dissed at him, saying that “I’m” not needed to be approved by him actually ^^; (since ultimately it’s Kuki who said “I” can stay here)

A new guy appeared along with another guy with white hair (Shu + Senri) asking what exactly had happened in here, and upon seeing “me”, he thought “I’m” a client who has a new case for them. Kuki quickly clarified that “I” was being picked up by him (sounds like “I’m” an abandoned puppy ^^;), and Shu literally almost face-palm hearing about this, and said that this is not like picking up a puppy or kitten…(Shu thinks the same like me~)

Kuki said he’ll be responsible of “me” though, and so requested that “I’ll” be placed under “Class 7″. Shu noticed that “I’m” a human, and though there’s no rule that humans aren’t allowed to work at D.O.G agency, the agency is now currently under the lead of Shu so he did have the power to decided whether “I” can stay here… or not… OAO” Kuki helped “me” to plead for Shu’s approval for “me” to stay here, saying that “I” already have no where to go back to and it’ll be heartless to abandon “me”.

Thank goodness, Senri (the white hair guy) stepped in to speak up (for “me”… I hope), saying that it’ll be good to train “me” to be the assistant for all the detectives, and he knew that Shu will be worried later on about “me” if he did kick “me” out of the place. So for now “I’ll” be placed under the care of Kuki, while Shu and Senri will supervise and see how things will go on from here ^^

They then started to talk about how Kuki and his team used to break a wall while working on a case, and that made the client angry as Tsubasa and Shiro had to spend a day to fix up the wall in the end~ Shu was hearing about this for the first time but ultimately decided to let Kuki off with a warning, that if he cause a big trouble like that again, he might just fire him without any chance of forgiveness OWO”

And so they called for one of the assistant around here - Leo to guide me ^^ Also Shu and Senri gave their introductions officially, their names are Shimada Shu and Yashiro Senri.

Next, they taught “me” on how the agency is splits into multiple teams, which they call “Class” actually. The class that “I’m” in is Class 7, where Kuki himself is the class leader, and Shiro and Tsubasa are the members. Shu and Senri are in Class 1, with one more additional member called Rui (But he isn’t here now). In total there are 7 classes, but “I” haven’t had the chance to meet Class 2 - Class 6 yet since the members aren’t here.

Chapter 5: 事務所を統べる者 / The Rulers of the Detective Agency

(It’s cute that after listening to “my” story, Leo felt sad that “I’m” all lonely by myself now… But it’s okay Leo, I have you and the rest of the detective agency with me wahahaha~ XDD)

Apparently “I’m” also allowed to stay at the workers’ hostel, as long as “I” work hard to earn my living expenses. Suddenly the guy that they were talking about who wasn’t here finally came into the room (Rui), and upon seeing me, he’s shocked to know that there’s a new member joining them today. (And what’s up with everyone having a problem with “me” as a human =w=“… It sounds kind of racist =w=“…)

Rui had finished his work early for the day, but decided to go strolling around the neighborhood and went to the bookstore to pick up some books. Looking at “me” again, Rui smiled and made his introduction - he’s Mamiya Rui.

Kuki had planned to bring “me” around to the hostel since night is ascending, however Shiro, Tsubasa and him all have reports to work on first before they could go. (Shu and Senri had went off to work on something else in the meantime) In the end, it was handed to Rui to help to bring “me “for a tour around the hostel instead…

(It’s funny how Tsubasa realised that Shiro is using the wrong paper to write the reports instead, and Kuki was like… “Shiro, I know you’re used to writing reflections … =w=” Shiro had written reflections way too many times that he just used that paper due to how used he is to it ^^:)

As Rui led “me” to the hostel, he talked about it, saying that the hostel is actually within the same building as the agency, with it occupying half of first and second storey, as well as the entire third to fifth floors. (Literally more than half of the buildings are for the hostel… O.O”)

However, the mood and Rui’s face changed completely when we reached the hostel’s living room, as he started to confront “me” and wants “me” to come clean with everything regarding the cheater (a.k.a fake detective).

“I” said that “I” do not know anything much about the cheater actually, but Rui did not believe that, and insisted that “I” must be from some unknown informant… (What did “I” do to let you suspect “me” like this?… =w=“)

Chapter 6: 新しい出会い / New Encounters

“I” couldn’t answer Rui’s questions initially, and thus stayed silent. However Rui doesn’t like it either and hoped that “I” wasn’t buying time thinking up of excuses… (since he won’t believe in them). And so “I” told him the truth that “I” get to know about the fake detective because “I” came across a flyer, but Rui isn’t buying that reason either… (so what exactly do you want me to say sir?!) In the end Rui just wanted “me” to confess that “I’m” the fake detective’s accomplice.

At this moment, a bunch of new guys came rushing into the living room, excited to meet “me”. Rui, seeing that his plan to confront “me” has been interrupted, “conveniently” dumped “me” under the care of them, saying that he suddenly has things he had to see to… (This guy is really… D:)

(Yep, as if “I” wanted to talk to you again alone the next time, Rui… Ugh D:)

One of the boys is really very shy (so cute~~ >///<) and thus hid behind the big and tall guy. The tall guy wanted to greet “me” by stepping forward, but almost tripped and landed on “me”, but thank goodness he managed to get his footing back ^^; (If not I’ll be squashed…)

And so they started off introducing themselves to “me”. The big tall guy is Takayama Hijiri, who upon seeing “me” commented that “I” was smaller than he thought =w=“ (I think anyone would look tiny compared to Hijiri though…). He even bent down to look at “me” at eye level, and ended up being scolded by the guy next to him (Yanagi) that he shouldn’t treat “me” as if “I’m” a child.

Next will the guy next to him in red spectacles and hair clip. His name is Hosho Yanagi. You might thought he seems fitting for the class leader’s role but unexpectedly the class leader for them (Class 2) is Hijiri instead XDD

A hyper and active boy next popped up to give his introduction, he’s Uzuki Ryohei.

And finally it’s left with the tiny shy boy to give his introduction. Hijiri initially wanted to help him but got stopped by Yanagi, saying that this was a good chance for the boy to get over his shyness, and said that “I” won’t eat him so don’t be afraid ^^;

In the end, the boy gathered his courage and introduced himself as Azuhata Yu.

Hijiri was glad that Yu had made a step forward, and patted his head. He also patted Yanagi’s head, but that made him embarrassed instead ^///^

Since there’s alot of CGs for the first main story, I’ve decided to split into 2 parts. And the first part is already packed with characters! (We have like 10 new characters to remember?!)

Personally I’m already quite fond of Class 7, since they’re primarily the class I’ve chosen when I started the game (I wish Shiro will get warmer with me over time though~), but Class 2 is pretty fun even though we’ve not met all the characters in that class. For me, I’m not too fond of Class 1 that much, but probably alot has to do with me not liking Rui. Why do I feel like that guy is targeting me for no reason…

More characters will be introduced in Part 2, which hopefully will get translated by me soon =)

#viidog code #main story #summary #translation #otome game #vd:main #vd:translation

[momorabu]

Viidog Code - Stories’ Summary Translations (Compilation List)

Newly Added (Updated: 29.07.2018)

*Sequence: New -> Old

ホーリーナリト . ギフト /Holy Night . Gift

無人島に隱された秘密 / The Hidden Secret on the Deserted Island

Main Story (Completed!)

Episode 1 - 風变わりな探偵たち / The Detectives That Changed Like The Wind (Part 1)

Episode 1 - 風变わりな探偵たち / The Detectives That Changed Like The Wind (Part 2)

Episode 2 - 迷子の小犬搜查隊 / The Search Team for the Missing Puppy

Episode 3 - 消えた人たち / The Missing People

Episode 4 - ベート / Beto

Episode 5 -  目的と邂逅 / Objective and Encounter

Event Story (Translating...)

*Sequence: Old -> New

ホラーハウス・パニック / Horror House . Panic

黃金のアルパカを探せ! / The Search for the Golden Alpaca

J/Lからの招待状 / Invitation from J/K (Jack-o-Lantern)

狙われた豪華客船 / The Targeted Royal Cruise

恭賀新春 行く年來る年 / Happy New Year! The year which departs, the year which arrives 

ショコラ.コンテスト / Chocolate.Contest

#viidog code #main story #summary #translation #otome game #vd:translation #vd:list

[momorabu]

27.08.2017

Viidog Code Main Story - Episode 5 - 目的と邂逅 / Objective and Encounter

August is soon to be over and thankfully I managed to finish translating the last episode of the main story for Viidog Code before the month is over ^^; Finally the big case and mystery is getting to an end, but would everything be solved? Or would there be more questions leaving to be answered?~

As always, the summary of the story can be found below. Translation may not be 100% accurate due to my poor Japanese skills~

Chapter 1: 見知らぬ犬狼族 / The Unknown “Kenrouzoku”

Upon entering the room, Class 7 and “I” saw two mysterious men in the strange room. Tsubasa was already defensive from the start as he noticed that the two men were “Kenrouzoku” just like them. One of the guy remarked that this was the first time that people actually called them by this name for their first meeting, that Kuki just had to reply sarcastically that it’s because they do not know of any names to call them ^^; (Which is true...)

The man introduced himself as Fenrir, and said that he allowed us to call him by this name as a reward for us to come so far to arrive here. He told Kuki and the others that there’s no need to introduce themselves though, as he doesn’t plan to remember them anyway XD

Shiro demanded to the other man to hand over Leo and stopped hiding him.. However, the man just laughed and answered that they’re not hiding Leo as he isn’t here, and told Shiro that his ability as a “Kenrouzoku” had fallen since he should be able to smell Leo’s scent to know whether he’s here or not. Fenrir told the other man, Anubis not to bully them so much. (Erm, so he’s still allowed to bully them, just not too much...? ^^;) He mentioned that their sense of smell might have failed them since there’s an incent burning in this room that affects their sense of smell. 

Fenrir started talking about Leo, giving them a hint to let us guess why they had wanted to capture him. Why was Leo able to create a duplicate card from an incomplete card system? Fenrir already deduced that the detective agency might try to do that (as in creating a card key to break through the system) when he detected someone had accessed their site. Even though the plan was missing some vital parts for the whole system, Leo was still able to create a perfect duplicate card in the end... Why? The group started to get confused, but Kuki told us not to listen to what Fenrir was saying, as his plan was to make us shaken and create doubt regarding Leo.

Just then, Fenrir started talking about how “I” seems to not remember who he and Anubis is when they’re standing in front of “me”, and that made Kuki questioned him on how did he knew “my” name. (Since “I” had not even done my introduction...) 

Anubis:”Don’t you remember who I am?”

Kuki asked “me” whether “I”knew these guys, but suddenly “I” started getting flashback to my past... In the flashback, “I” could hear two people commenting after they’ve found a group of people had fallen from such a high height and were all dead. However, they realised that even though the adults were dead, the child was still breathing. In the end, they decided to rescue the child...

“I” awoke back to the present, where Kuki worriedly asked “me” whether “I” was alright. He told “me” not to force myself from thinking too much, as “my” face had turned pale after having the flashback.

(Even Tsubasa was being sweet by telling “me” that “I” could lean on him if “I” wasn’t feeling well >///<)

Fenrir seems glad that “I” seems to have not forgotten everything about them yet. Kuki demanded Fenrir to return Leo to us, but unfortunately got rejected by Fenrir, saying that he had no plans to return him to us and told us to use our “strength” to get him back instead. (Totally sounds like a challenge, Fenrir =w=“)

Chapter 2: 知りたいことはひとつだけ / That’s Only One Thing That I Wanted to Know

Over at the dock, Senri reported that Class 7 had interacted with the people at Beto, and began sending the voice recording to Class 5 for analyzing so that they could understand what was being said in that room.

Back at the “boss room”, Fenrir asked us what do we plan to do now that the negotiation was off, warning us against from fighting them as they’ve already analyzed our strengths and weakness and claimed that he trusted us that we won’t make a stupid decision by fighting them. (In other words, he’s already convinced that we’re weaker than them ><”)

Tsubasa asked why Fenrir was able to know and analyze us, to which he answered happily that this was because there was a spy among us in the detective agency. Shiro just thought that Fenrir was lying to bluff us instead, since there’s no evidence proving that at all. Fenrir decided to reveal some stuff that he had knew to prove himself in the end...

Back at the dock, Shu asked Rui to focus as their main goal was to save Leo. Rui realised that Shu seems to have known that he was the spy (since he’s been feeding others with information about us all along D:), but Shu asked him to save his explanation for later as they had to save Leo first, and that he’ll need Rui’s help to do so. (Shu seems so calm and cool even if he knew Rui had betrayed the agency OWO)

Class 4 on the other hand had managed to escape from the casino successfully, though it was still dangerous to stop in the position that they were at now, even if no one was chasing after them.

Izana was curious to know who was the “betrayer” among them, as he had heard rumors of one existing in the detective agency. This also gets Ran’s interests, as he wondered if there’s really one among them. However, Izana wasn’t surprised as he calmly answered that there might be a few among them instead Even though Ran doesn’t really want to believe that there might be alot of “spies” among them, he was bothered by the fact that everyone from the detective agency doesn’t seems to follow Shu’s instructions for the operation today at all. However, it also seems that Mahiro and Shu had conversed in secret, and made a guess that ... perhaps they were doing this to cheat the spy?

Chapter 3: 崇高なる目的 / The Majestic Goal

Back at the “boss room” again, Kuki remarked that it seems like Fenrir was someone who likes to talk alot. Fenrir smiled and answered that it made it all the easier to socialise with others, adding on that he had to be the one talking anyway as Anubis was shy and reserved XD

Anubis doesn’t like the fact that Fenrir was revealing this trait about him, and commented that Fenrir himself was already this talkative ever since he was young. 

Listening to their conversation, Kuki noticed that they seems to have known each other for a long time. He told Fenrir that he knew that he was someone who was very good with words, and was having fun testing to see the reactions of members of Class 7, adding on that this was quite a sick hobby of his. However, Fenrir insisted that he was speaking the truth and not playing around with them. Unconvinced, Kuki warned us not to get affected by Fenrir’s words, as they held no weight at all actually. (Sounds like Kuki was being the mature one here for a change ^////^)

It seems that Kuki had already knew who might be the betrayer among them, as Fenrir praised him for being smart. However, Kuki still had alot of questions that he wanted to ask Fenrir about, since they’re just going to stand around here and talk anyway XD

He asked Fenrir whether he was the one who created Beto, to which he answered that yes he was the founder of the group, and it was a secret society group that only consists of “Kenrouzoku” as he was from one of the oldest clan that had existed from the start. Kuki asked him again that he knew that Beto was the one who made use of the illegal casino to kick out people for the town, and asked him what was their objective in doing so. 

Fenrir decided to reveal to us Beto’s objective, as he believed that perhaps some members in the detective agency might have the same mindset as them afterall. He explained that their main goal was to climb to the top of the country as “Kenrouzoku” and create a country of their own. He believed that them being “Kenrouzoku” were more suitable than humans to lead the country, as they had more strengths and powers compared to them (having better senses and smarter). Kuki answered that even though he understood that was their goal, he still could not understand how was that related to kicking the people out of this town, since they won’t be able to gain the respect of humans if they’re just going to chase people out. Even Tsubasa voiced out that them doing so was going to make everyone had a bad impression of “Kenrouzoku” instead. 

As the conversation continued, Beto’s amin motive in doing such things was revealed, they wanted to chase out all the humans living in the town / island (I didn’t know the town existed on an island until now =w=“), and create an island which only has “Kenrouzoku”. Tsubasa noticed that the people who were being chased out were people who were rich and had high positions in this town, and deduced that that must be why they’re being targeted by Beto.

Fenrir asked us whether we’re going to stop them from doing their “spring-cleaning”, saying that this was their task that they’ve to get rid of whoever that was deemed as unneeded.

Class 6 who was overhearing the conversation, (since this was being recorded and sent to all the classes) was at the park, as Shiki commented that whatever Fenrir was saying sounds crazy and wondered why Kuki and the others had not just captured him straight away. (This was one of the rare chance I might agree with Shiki ^^;) However, Toki had another concern - Why are they here in the park?

Chapter 4: 暗い過去 / The Dark Past

Fenrir asked us whether we knew how we’re being valued by those living in the town, seeing that we’re even willing to protect them. However, Kuki said that we should determine how we should value ourselves just by what others had said, which Fenrir couldn’t understand since he felt that one should be proud of their own race, especially for him as he felt that “Kenrouzoku” surpasses humans.

Anubis brought up a point, remarking that it was humans themselves who started treating people who aren’t really humans like them badly in the first place, asking Kuki whether he had ever been ill-treated or looked down upon by them when they knew he was a “Kenrouzoku”. Tsubasa tried to speak for the humans, explaining that there’ll be definitely be alot people who would understand them once they explain and talk to them. However, that remark got Anubis laughing though, as he said that humans would just start throwing stones at them once they knew that they’re “Kenrouzoku”, stating that it’s impossible to even start a conversation in the first place. 

Shiro wondered if Beto should feel proud that they’re doing the same things as those humans, by throwing back stones at them when people throw stones at them. Fenrir denied that, and instead clarified that for the humiliation that they’re have gotten from humans, they’re going to throw even more back at them, adding on that this was their “right and justice”. 

Fenrir asked us why are we willing to lend a hand to help those who were in a lower class than them (meaning humans), and asked us to stop even if we’re doing it as a charity act, since those humans won’t appreciate it and in fact would just look down on them. (Since mainly who they’re helping would be those rich people in high positions... so to them perhaps the people at the detective agency were considered in a lower class than them ><”)

The reason why we wanted to help them was just this, as said by Tsubasa...

“We just wanted to live with humans normally, that’s all.”

Kuki continued on, stating that he knew that for them as “Kenrouzoku”, it would be hard to live outside of this island, since humans around the world were being very harsh with :Kenrouzoku” and chasing them out. However, Shiro thought that what Beto was doing was the same disgusting act by chasing humans out of this island, since both of their acts showed racism between humans and “Kenrouzoku”. 

This town was the only place that :Kenrouzoku” was able to live in normally, and Kuki was confident that the other “Kenrouzoku” in this town would not want a country of just “Kenrouzoku” like what Beto had planned to be. He was angry that Beto was causing all these troubles around the town under their name of justice, and hoped that they would stop their act now.

After listening to their replies, Fenrir regretted that he had even thought to propose to Class 7 to get them to join his side. As it would just be a waste of time talking to them, Fenrir decided to leave with Anubis and thus they fled. Kuki and the others quickly chased after them, since they have still yet to rescue Leo.

Class 2 who were outside in the streets received news that Beto had escaped. He told Hijiri that this was not the time to relax as Leo was still not rescued yet. Ryohei asked Hijiri whether they should chase after Class 7 to help them beat Beto, but Yu was scared as they’re not capable of fighting against Beto as the two guys were considered really powerful “Kenrouzoku”.  

Hijiri agreed that them going to fight Beto would be useless and would just cause injuries instead, and he would try to avoid fighting them as much as possible to prevent injuries. Instead, he mentioned that he just thought of something that he had to attend to, and passed the map to Yanagi, asking him to take over and lead the group for awhile. (What on earth was Hijiri planning to do? OWO”)

With Hijiri gone, Yanagi checked the map and realised that Kuki’s group was near to them based on the GPS location, which means... Beto may just passed through here anytime now! Class 2 decided to split themselves and patrol the streets around here to keep a look out for Beto, however, that scared Yu as it would mean that he would have to patrol by himself in the night. Yanagi encouraged him and in the end, Yu decided that he shall work hard to do what he can to help Leo, and that made Chihiro remarked that Yanagi was doing really well as a leader. 

After splitting the routes to be patrolled by each member, Chihiro noticed that the route in the center won’t have anyone patrolling it. However, Yanagi decided to leave it unsupervised, as he was sure that there must be a reason why Hijiri had went off and left him in charge.

Chapter 5: 逃亡犯 / Fugitive

Yanagi was patrolling when he spotted the two guys from Beto carrying Leo as they escaped, and shouted at them that he’s not going to let them passed through. 

Leo yelled at Yanagi to escape by himself, but Yanagi refused to give way, and that made Fenrir decided that perhaps they should teach Yanagi a lesson that he had mixed up being “courageous” and “reckless”. Even though Yanagi knew that the world isn’t kind to them being “Kenrouzoku”, but he’s not someone who would run away and leave his comrade behind like this! (Good one Yanagi! +///+)

Anubis found it troublesome and thus decided that they would just escape instead, and even throw Leo at Fenrir, asking him to carry him instead. Fenrir managed to catch Leo, and complained that Anubis was being too violent to throw the “genuis” (Leo) around, even saying that Leo might ended up being an idiot if they’ve accidentally dropped him. 

Yanagi chased after them as they made their escape. Fenrir asked Yanagi that rather than chasing after them, perhaps he should think that the person that he’s trying to save was really his comrade afterall. (Asking Yanagi to be suspicious of Leo I guess?) However, Yanagi was unfazed as he claimed that he would never suspect his comrades. 

Unable to catch up to the speed of Beto, Yanagi quickly contacted the other members, and asked them to gather at the route that was to be patrolled by Ryohei. 

Ryohei was awaiting the two when they came into the route that he was patrolling, but Fenrir was not worried at all as he remarked that he’s tiny and even deemed Ryohei as not useful to him even if he’s a “Kenrouzoku”. (You’re totally looking down on Ryohei! D:) He wondered perhaps he should just get rid of Ryohei but that gets cries of protest from Leo as he asked them not to hurt him. 

As Leo was struggling, Fenrir warned him that he might really dropped him if he continues to struggle. Leo shouted out to Ryohei that it’s impossible for him to defeat the two of them from Beto, but Ryohei doesn’t listen at all, claiming that he won’t know until he tries. Thankfully, Chihiro appeared and stopped him, reminding him that Hijiri had told them to refrain from engaging in a fight. 

(Apparently Chihiro even gave Ryohei a punch or something, as he cried out in pain. Yu who arrived later on said that this was Ryohei’s punishment for almost disobeying Hijiri’s orders.)

Yu shouted at Anubis and Fenrir, demanding them to return Leo to them. (This got a diss from Ryohei that this was the first time he had ever seen Yu shouted so courageously at a stranger he doesn’t know XD) Fenrir decided to let Anubis carry Leo instead, and threw him back at him XD In the end, the two of them fled once more as Anubis decided that they should not waste time to “play around” with these “low IQ” people. (That’s rude D:)

However, their escape was soon halted by the appearance of Hijiri, who had appeared in front of them. He comforted Leo that everything would be alright and for him to trust them that they would save him. Fenrir however, started laughing at what Hijiri was saying regarding trust. The guys from Beto escaped from Hijiri successfully, but according to Hijiri, his plan was a success...?

Making their way into a dark alley, Fenrir realised that they’re being led intentionally down as the route they had ran down was only a one way route. Anubis suggested that perhaps they should call for their comrades, explaining to Leo that they had a dog whistle on hand which they’ve modified, and could be use to call for their comrades, and even hinted that those who had planned on coming here to stop them might even recognised who was the person who was called to help them...

Chapter 6: 心の人質 / The Hostage at Heart

Rudo and the rest of Class 3 soon arrived at the scene and asked Leo whether he was alright. Leo apologised to them as he felt that all these had happened because of him, but they tried to comfort by saying that Leo was not the one at fault here, and the only people who were in the wrong were Beto instead. Sosuke started noticing that there seems to be more people than he had thought, but Kaname pointed out to him who was the main key person from Beto. (Fenrir had really asked for additional help OWO)

Fenrir remarked that these people who had arrived were different from the guys that he had met earlier on, as they’re seems eager to fight him instead of refraining from a fight.  Rudo answered that though they’ll refrained from fighting as much as possible, they would still fight if that’s the only way they could protect their comrades. (Such a cool line from our cool leader +W+)

Fenrir started smiling and mentioning to Anubis that he should leave fighting to their subordinate instead, as it would be a way to see how they’ve grown. However, Rudo started attacking first and had already defeated one of the subordinates in a blink of the eye. Seeing that their subordinates being defeated one by one, Fenrir realised that the situation doesn’t look good to him as it would be 2 vs 1 looking at the numbers from the detective agency and Beto. Anubis threw Leo at him since Fenrir doesn’t plan to fight and would just watch from afar (Anubis was planning to fight), but Fenrir complained that he doesn’t like carrying Leo as it was difficult to run carrying him. Rudo who overheard their conversations, asked them to just return Leo to him if they had felt inconvenient carrying him around XD (I like how he said that “if you guys think so, please return him to us” XD)

Anubis and Rudo started fighting each other, as Fenrir continued watching from afar, commenting that the detective agency had an useful person seeing how Rudo was on par with Anubis in regards to combat skills. Kotaro wanted to help Rudo, but he yelled at him and the others to save Leo instead as Fenrir made his escape yet again. 

However, Fenrir jumped up really high till he reached the roof of the building, which the rest of the class 3 could only looked up in shock as they do not have such jumping powers. Anubis soon escaped too, and while Kaname suggested to Rudo that they should continue to chase after them, Rudo answered that there’s no need to as they were being lured according to what was planned...

Fenrir and Anubis were on the run again on the streets, as Anubis complained to Fenrir why had he called Anubis to escape too when he could have defeated Rudo if he had been given another 5 minutes. Fenrir answered that even waiting 5 minutes for him was too boring. They reached a street full of people and decided to blend into the crowd instead by walking.

Fenrir threatened Leo that if he had tried to escape from them, they would start killing off his comrades one by one as they came to save him. That made Anubis commented that Fenrir really sounds like an evil person, but Fenrir took it as a praise to him instead. 

Fenrir and Anubis guessed that they might still be tailed by others from the detective agency, but among the crowd, they won’t be able to identify who was tailing them either. 

Class 4′s operations started here, with Ran and Izana focusing on either of the party from Beto, and Mahiro would focus on saving Leo instead. As they’ve noticed Leo was not bound by anything currently, Mahiro stretched out his hand and called Leo to grab onto him. However, Leo hesitated, due to the threat from Fenrir before. (He even threatened him once again that he would just cut off Mahiro’s hands and neck if Leo tried to stretch out to him... =w=“)

In the end, Leo gave up on stretching out to Mahiro and getting saved, even when Mahiro urged him too. Fenrir smiled and remarked that Leo was really a kind-hearted and splendid child, unlike his brother.

Chapter 7: フェンリルの血族 / The Blood Relative of Fenrir

In the end, Fenrir and Anubis escaped once again together with Leo. Class 4 were shocked when they saw Leo had held onto Fenrir’s hand instead instead of stretching out to Mahiro...

On the other hand, Class 5 was on the move too instead of staying back at the headquarters to analyze information. Suzu-kun asked Naoto whether it was alright for them to be outside, and Naoto replied and he would rather stay back at the headquarters than to do what they’re doing now, but he had something in mind that’s related to why they’re not at the headquarters that he’s not revealing to Suzu-kun for now yet. He told Suzu-kun that it’s normal for him to have one or two matters that he wanted to keep it a secret from Suzu-kun, though if it happens the other way round, Naoto would be mad instead XD (So unfair, Naoto~^^;) (Even Hinamori dissed Naoto that he was saying conflicting stuff XD)

Just then, a mystierous hooded guy appeared in front of them...  Naoto started getting defensive and asked Suzu-kunto hide behind him. (What about Hina? OWO) 

Turns out it was the weird guy who Suzu-kun had saved the last time. Naoto was still maintaining a distance from him, which Suzu-kun interpreted it as him not remembering who the weird guy was. Naoto answered that he did remember who that guy is, since he was the one who ate Suzu-kun’s meal, and the person who gave the memo that became a hint for them to access Beto’s site. Hinamori approached the guy and asked him whether he was part of Beto’s, since he had something that was related to Beto. 

The guy denied that he’s part of Beto, but Naoto was not convinced, even when Suzu-kun asked him to believe the weird guy. Naoto reminded them about the memo, stating that the amount of text on it was alot that it’s not easy to just remember them at one go. Unless the weird guy was a genius or really good at remembering stuff, Naoto guessed that he might have access to the site itself and copied the address down, which means there’s a high possibility that he’s part of Naoto, and in fact not just a low-ranked member, but someone that’s in a high rank instead. (Since I guess low-ranked members themselves might not be able to gain access to the site?)

The guy confessed that it’s different now sine he had escaped from Beto, but Naoto was still not convinced by him as he asked him why had he came here to find them since hardly a few people knew that they were here. The weird guy answered that he had tracked them by following Suzu-kun’s scent.

Naoto realised that the weird guy’s hood had a mechanism to it, as it seems that once he removed his hood he sensed a different scent from him after that. The weird guy revealed to them that the hood was covered with something that could hide one’s scent, so he was able to hide his scent when he put on the hood. 

Asking Suzu-kun that whether they’re on their way to chase after Fenrir and Anubis, the weird guy offered to show them the escape route which Fenrir would use. However, Naoto was still feeling suspicious about the weird guy, as there might be other people from Beto awaiting for them over them. Hinamori spoke up for the weird guy, suggesting that perhaps the weird guy had his reasons for joining Beto initially, but now that he had escaped from them, they could try to trust him a little. Suzu-kun asked the weird guy why was he part of Beto and became Fenrir’s comrades in the first place, to which he answered that he became part of the group because he was related to Fenrir by blood. (Not really siblings, but some sort of close relatives I guess? Since Hinamori guessed that they might have the same ancestor.)

However, Fenrir had broke the promise that he had made with the weird guy, as even though Fenrir had told him that he would help to look for the weird guy’s missing brother, he ended up ordered him to do other tasks that’s not related to the search for his brother at all. (He must have felt so cheated to join Beto... TWT) The weird guy was not interested in creating a country with Beto at all.

Hinamori wondered if it’s that easy to get out of Beto actually, since it was considered a secret society. The weird guy admitted that when he said he “got out” of Beto, it actually means that he just left by the exit, and guessed that the other people from Beto would chase after him if they realised that he’s missing. He had planned to leave this town for awhile to lie low, but before that, he wanted to look for Suzu-kun to pass him the information regarding Beto. Suzu-kun was touched, though he wondered why the weird guy was being so helpful to them, as if it’s gratitude, Suzu-kun already felt that it was enough for him to give them the memo hint. The weird guy replied that because Suzu-kun had even made dessert for him, he felt that it’s best that he had to return his gratitude twice in the end XD (Such a polite kid ^////^)

The weird guy told them that Fenrir and the rest would pass by the shopping streets, and then head towards the park next. He also gave them his name (finally!) in the end, telling them that he’s called Cerberus. Class 5 bidded good bye to Cerberus, with Suzu-kun asking him to return someday so that he could make a nice meal for him once again. Cerberus answered that he will, and would also bring his brother, Ru together with him. As they watched Cerberus left, Suzu-kun hoped that he would be able to find and reunited with his brother in the end... 

‘

Suzu-kun decided to follow the escape route which Cerberus had told him about, even though both Naoto and Hinamori were sceptical about it as it could be a trap laid out by Beto. However, Suzu-kun said that he believed in what Cerberus had said, and asked them to wait here for him instead. Of course Naoto tagged along with him in the end, (since there’s no way he’ll let Suzu-kun went off by himself) muttering that Suzu-kun is really a kind-hearted person, and complained that he’s leaving by himself even when Naoto asked him not to get out of his sight XD (This totally sounds like... a romance line or something ^^;)

When Cerberus was alone, he recalled that Suzu-kun seems to be mentioning about someone called “Leo”. He was quite bothered about it, but decided that what’s important first was for him to escape from this place.

Chapter 8: 二人のリーダー / Leader of Two 

Class 5 headed to the park in a hurry, though Naoto complained that they don’t have to rush since the park won’t run away. (Suzu-kun had to diss him that even if the park doesn’t run away, Beto would run away XD) Naoto was still quite relaxed though, as he mentioned that it would be alright since Class 6 would be at the park actually, and just nice they spotted Class 6 over there. Toki asked them to hide into the bushes with them, and said that he was here because his brother Shiki, had ordered him to come here with him. 

Naoto explained that Suzu-kun had believed the words from a former Beto member (Cerberus), that Fenrir would escape to the park and thus this was why they were here. 

Toki asked them whether they’re intending to fight Beto if they’ve spotted them coming through here, to which Shiki answered confidently that of course they’re going to fight them. Naoto was shocked that they might ended up having to become fighting members (since usually they’re just working as support in the backend), but Suzu-kun said that this is a must, since they had to fight if they wanted to save Leo. 

Fenrir soon appeared, commenting that his legs were tired from all the running, and Anubis dissed him that the escape route was planned by Fenrir actually. (So it’s sort of like he’s shooting himself in the foot for planning such a long escape route ^^;) Fenrir proposed that they took a break, but Anubis sensed that he could smell “something”.

Spotting Leo was with Fenrir and Anubis, Suzu-kun came out from the bushes, even though Naoto had tried to stop him and get him to stay put. (Too late, Naoto =w=“) Anubis and Shiki soon got into a conflict, as Anubis was pissed that his clothes were dirtied by dirt, and Shiki was all fired up in wanting to arrest Anubis ^^;

(The way Shiki was provoking Anubis... totally sound like a gangster on the streets Orz)

Shiki shouted at Toki to capture Fenrir on the other side, but Toki stood on the spot without doing anything, while Fenrir asked him to give way to him if he’s not planning to fight him. (But the way he talked to Toki was actually giving an order instead... Is Toki under Fenrir? OWO”)

Leo shouted to everyone to stop, as he doesn’t wished to see anyone getting hurt because of him, and started running away from all of them even when he’s already safe and sound with Suzu-kun. Toki wanted to help Shiki who was still fighting with Anubis, but Shiki shouted at him to chase after Leo instead. In the end, Anubis and Fenrir had to stop their break and make their escape once again. 

Suzu-kun was crushed to find out that Leo had ran away from, though Shiki encouraged them not to give up since it’s not over yet.

Class 1 who was on standby at the dock, sense that Beto and Leo were heading their way here. (Rui was seriously good, he could even knew how many people were coming and how long till they’ll be able to see them approaching in their sight... Wonder how he’s detecting them, through hearing or scent?)

Rui was worried whether the three of them would be able to fight them, since both Fenrir and Anubis were strong considering they’re the ancestors / main bloodline of “Kenrouzoku”. However, Shu was calmed as he trust that things would be alright if Senri’s with him, with Senri was all too glad to be of service to Shu ^^ (These two guys and their bromance~~ ^^;)

Shu started giving out orders, asking Senri to handle one of the guys and protect Leo as soon as possible, though Senri warned him that he might disobey his orders if he found out Shu was in danger. (Since for Senri, his first priority was for Shu to be safe ^^)

Rui wasn’t able to assist them much in this operation, but he hoped that they would be able to save Leo in replacement of him. (Aww... I guess as much as Rui was a jerk for the most part of the story, he still cares and worries for Leo TWT)

Class 1 finally met up with Beto, with Anubis threatening them whether they’ll still fight even if they knew that Leo would not be returning to them. Senri answered that this would be something left to Leo to decide, but regardless, the detective agency would still fight as they hoped to change the outcome of the situation now. 

Fenrir faced off with Shu, recognising him as the leader of D.O.G detective agency, and asked him why was he here exposing himself in danger. Shu answered that he’s not someone who would hide himself in a safe area while his members were in danger. (So cool Shu~! >///<) Fenrir seems glad that Shu seems to be someone who he could conversed with, unlike some others who would just fight him straight away. (Is he referring to Shiki? I think he is XD) However, Shu told him that he’s not having a conversation with him just to make him happy.

Just then, Fenrir mentioned about “Viidog Code”, asking Shu whether he had know anything about it...?

Chapter 9: 犬狼族の王 / The King of “Kenrouzoku”

Shu answered Fenrir that what if he said that he actually knew about it. Fenrir smiled as he tried to strike a deal with Shu, suggesting that he would release Leo if Shu was able to provide him some information about it. He asked Shu why was he so bent on wanting to save Leo, since Leo as just a “puppy” that he had picked up by chance. Shu replied that Leo was now treated as a member of the detective agency, and for Shu, he would not let anyone to be taken away from here. Fenrir asked him whether he would still say the same if he had knew about Leo’s true identity, but Shu was firm and said that it had nothing to do with Leo’s past in how he viewed Leo now. 

Seeing that the deal was off since Shu isn’t going to provide any information to him, Fenrir decided to stick to his original plan and decided to leave. He made his way towards Senri, so Shu shouted out to him to be careful. Senri was pissed as he restrained Anubis, complaining that Fenrir shouldn’t come and disturb him when he’s busy XD (And Fenrir was not being helpful to his comrade as he just stood by and commented that it’s rare that Anubis was being restrained by someone actually ^^;)

Anubis managed to break free, as Fenrir told him that they should make their move now, since it seems that “Rudo” was able to read what they’re trying to decipher, and they should stop playing around with the detective agency since more people might be catching up to him. (Erm, I think you’ve already already met pretty much everyone, Fenrir...) However, Anubis asked him to head off first, and he’ll catch up with him later after he had killed “this person”. (I think he’s meaning Senri.) Fenrir warned him against doing that since they might ended up being unable to escape in the end, and even asked him to carry Leo since Fenrir’s arms were tired XD

Realising that they’re going to make their escape, Senri taunted him whether he was going to just run away because his boss had ordered him to. Anubis was not affected as he calmly threatened Senri that he’s going to finish him off the next time he met him. 

However, just Beto was making their escape with Leo, an unknown person appeared and grab hold of Leo, telling them that they should learn to hold hands together when making their escape, in case someone came and snatched one away... like how it is now +W+

Senri was shocked by the appearance of the unknown person, but the person just handed Leo to him and said that he had no time to explain now, making his exit quickly.

Anubis tried to snatch back Leo, but Senri was protecting Leo, so Anubis threatened Leo once more, asking him to remember what Fenrir had told him earlier on. (That he would kill his comrades at the detective agency if he had tried to escape from them.) Senri quickly get to know of the situation, and he ensured Leo that everything would alright, as Shu was with them whereas Anubis was alone, making it a 2v1 battle if they had to fight. (Fenrir had already ran off ahead of them without knowing Leo had been snatched back XDD)

Anubis decided to escape without trying to fight to get Leo back, and Senri asked Shu whether they should go after him. However, Shu answered that there’s no need to, since their main priority was to protect Leo.

Contacting Kuki, Shu informed him that even though there might be a time lapse between the two, both of the Beto members were heading to his “area”. Kuki reported that Shiro was already chasing after Fenrir at this point of time. 

Fenrir and Anubis had escaped to the warehouse, as Fenrir complained to Anubis why had he left Leo behind since it meant that he had wasted his efforts on carrying him, even though Anubis dissed him that he had only carried Leo for hardly even 1/3 of the journey actually. (Anubis was the poor thing who carried him for more than 2/3 I guess ^^;) Fenrir wasn;t pleased that their efforts had dissolved into nothing, and only increased his fatigue in the end. He had wanted to take a break but Kuki appeared before them, telling them it’s still too early to take a break XD (I’m actually starting to feel bad for Beto now, with each class appearing one after another as they run away, and not giving them any break time XD)

Kuki told them the entrance to the warehouse had been shut, so for them to escape, they would have to make through the three of them from Class 7, but other than the tree of them, Kuki warned them that there were still many others surrounding the warehouse preparing to arrest them. 

Fenrir realised that they had been lured here actually. While Kuki was glad that they’ll be finally be able to capture them, he had wanted to talk to them regarding something, and asked them not be so defensive against him. Fenrir told him that there’s nothing to talk about since they’re going to leave very soon. (He still thinks that they’re able to escape.) 

Kuki proposed there’s still a way for them, suggesting that why not they join them at D.O.G Detective Agency? (This immediately got rebutted by Shiro as he yelled at Kuki what on earth was he thinking to suggest that XD)

Kuki explained that they all have the same thoughts that they wanted to live in this town, and hoped that rather than fighting each other, they should try to get along together. 

However, Fenrir rejected his proposal, stating that he couldn’t understand why would the people at the detective agency would want to be under the orders of humans. Tsubasa was pissed by the way he’s saying it, and clarified that they’re not under humans, but living together in harmony at the same class with them. Fenrir asked them that it seems that they’re under the orders of humans seeing how they’re taking commission works from them. Shiro explained that since there’s more humans living in town, the possibility of them getting requests from humans were at a larger percentage than “Kenrouzoku”. (You can’t tell them to only do work requests from “Kenrouzoku” and live humans unattended... ^^;)

But, their explanations still sound like they’re working under humans in Fenrir’s eyes, as he replied that he can’t understand them. That made Kuki gave up on wanting to get Beto to be their comrades, which means they’ll just have to arrest them.

However, Fenrir doesn’t panicked at all, and said that it’s their disadvantage to even brought “me” along, who was still an assistant in training. Tsubasa sensed that they might be targeting “me” next and cautioned “me” to hide behind him and Shiro, with Shiro adding that “I” should never leave them. (Aww... >////<)

Even though Kuki complained that Fenrir was being sneaky by wanting to target the weakest among them, Fenrir just smiled and declared that he shall just have to kill everyone in that case D:

Chapter 10: 戰いの終焉 / The End of the Battle 

Kuki urged Shiro to calm down, saying that it’s pointless if he charged now and fight, as he might ended up being a sacrifice for nothing. 

(Ahh Tsubasa being sweet and ensuring “me” that everything would be alright since they would protect “me” ^////^ I know it’s a serious situation but can’t helped my heart from fluttering ^^;)

Kuki told Tsubasa and Shiro that he would want to avoid fighting them, and if possible to arrest them without any injuries, as even though Class 7 had more people overall, the two from Beto were people whom all the other classes had failed to capture. Even Senri who was considered one of the strongest among them had failed to capture Anubis, and it would be scary if they made any of them angry. 

Tsubasa realised that since they’ve shut the door of the warehouse, it meant that they’re trapped here with them, which doesn’t looks good on their side. Kuki smiled sheepishly as he had thought this operation would “trapping the mice in the sack”, but it turns out that what they’ve trapped was ferocious creatures instead ^^;

Shiro started getting impatient, and demanded Kuki to tell him whether or not they’re going to fight them or not. Kuki sighed and told Shiro that it’s not going to be an easy decision for him, seeing that “I’m” with them. (So it’s my fault? TWT) He noticed that “I” had an uneasy expression and wanted to comfort “me” when he realised something that “I” was holding in my hands. It was one of Leo’s inventions, and that gave Kuki an idea as he said that perhaps they could use this to capture the two guys from Beto. But, in case what Kuki had planned had failed since the invention item might still fail, Kuki was sure that Shiro would be able to handle the situation somehow after that. (Just lumping the responsibility to Shiro after that XD)

Shiro decided to head off first as he passed the rope over to “me”. (I guess they got the rope ready to capture the bad guys initially), asking “me” to show such a worried expression and to head over to Kuki’s side instead. 

Fenrir started getting impatient and asked us what are we doing gathering together in a corner and talking. Kuki honestly answered him that we’re having an operation meeting on what to do with them XD

The invention items was thrown onto the floor, making everywhere a misty white as it was something like a smoke bomb. Tsubasa was planning to capture the bad guys but he realised the rope he was holding on seems to have slipped off elsewhere. In the end, both Fenrir and Anubis escaped in midst of the mist, leaving behind a word of warning that they’ll be back someday to take over and change the town. 

Shiro wanted to chase after them after we’ve came out from the warehouse, but Kuki stopped him, saying that there’s no need to since they’ve already achieved their objective for this operation anyway. Tsubasa was worried as he asked Shu whether the people were going to keep disappearing from town after that, since they’ve let the culprit escaped, but Kuki ensured him that they won’t be doing the same thing again after being discovered. 

Leo showed up before us, telling us that it was enough that he had returned to us, saying that he was actually really happy that everyone had came and saved him. 

Now that the operation saving Leo was over, Kuki was relieved that they could finally head back and rest, since it was a long day for him. Leo happily announced that he’s going to make juice that helped everyone to recover from their fatigue (the super sour lemon juice ><”) Shiro quickly commented that he’s not tired at all that Kuki said that he’s being sneaky when Shiro was showing a tired face actually XD On the other hand, Rui was worried about Leo, and asked him whether he was injured. (Nice to see that Rui cares about him ^^)

Chapter 11: ただいま / Back

Class 7 and “I” headed back to the detective agency and went downstairs to Cyan for dinner, with Tsubasa choosing to eat meat since they’ve worked hard for the day. Sosuke was glad to see us return and asked us to drink in celebration. He asked Shiro to drink with him, but Shiro reminded him that he’s still underaged XD (He’s too cool and behaved like an adult usually that everyone thought he’s of age already ^^;) In the end, Tsubasa offered to drink with Sosuke instead, and so Sosuke offered to get Shiro some juice instead XD (He ever offered to get Leo’s special recovering juice for him XD)

Kuki approached Rudo to talk about the matter where Shu deliberately gave the class leaders the real instructions on what to do. Kaname and Kotaro overheard them and demanded an explanation from Rudo, since he had promised them that he would explain about it after the operation. Kaname asked him what exactly had happened at that time that the orders were different and he couldn’t even discuss about it with them. Kotetsu and Ran soon joined them as well, as Ran wanted to know the reason as he felt that he had been toyed around, but Kotetsu suggested him to go complain to his own class leader instead ^^;

Just then, Kuki asked for a person called “Haru”, commenting that he had heard that “Haru” was the one who had saved Leo. (So the unknown person was “Haru”?) Upon hearing that “Haru” was soon gone after that, Kuki hoped that he would return to them someday... (Seems like this would another story for another day~)

Chapter 12: 終幕,そして......1 / The Closing, and then......1 

Mahiro approached Izana at Cyan, asking him not to read his book at such a time and come and celebrate with them. However, Izana was cold to him so Mahiro guessed that perhaps he was mad about him not revealing the actual operation plans to him. He apologised for keeping it from them, saying that he would have to apologise to Ran later on as well. 

Hijiri ran to Kuki, asking him to let him hide behind him, but Kuki smiled weakly that even if Hijiri hid behind him, almost his whole person would still be spotted though XD (That’s how tiny Kuki is) Hijiri was sad and asked Kuki to grow bigger, but that just pissed him off as he replied that he would have grown bigger a long time ago if he had knew how to do that ^^; (Poor Kuki getting dissed by Hijiri unknowingly about his height XD)

Hijiri explained that Yanagi was pissed with him and was going to lecture him, but Kuki thought that was the usual everyday scenario anyway. Yanagi appeared and said that he was going to lecture Hijiri even more than usual, as he was angry that Hijiri had lied and cheated the whole of Class 2 to let Beto run away. (Hijiri had confessed that he had deliberately let them run away to head towards the next location). Ryohei said that the others and him were really worried at that time.

Hijiri wanted to get Kuki to help him explain about the matter where the class leaders had received a different order from the one that was announced to all the staff, but Yanagi was relunctant, lecturing Hijiri that he should explain it himself. Hijiri tried asking Chihiro for help, but even Chihiro confess that he isn’t going to stand on his side this time XD In the end, poor Kuki was stuck in the middle of Hijiri and Yanagi as they continued their commotion...

Finally getting away from Class 2, Kuki spotted “me’ with an empty glass and asked “me” what “I” would want to refill my drink with. Class 6 approached us as Kuki asked Shiki whether his face was beaten by Anubis. (Seems like Shiki was slightly injured from the fight) Toki seems worried for Shiki, saying that it hurts more for the person who was looking, and that Shiki won’t be able to understand what he’s feeling. (Somehow I just want to give Toki a pat on the head here, aww~ TWT)

Chapter 13: 終幕,そして......2 / The Closing, and then......2

Kuki noticed that Suzu-kun seems to have headed into the kitchen, and Hinamori explained that that was because this was Naoto’s request to get Suzu-kun to make him something to eat. Kuki sighed since he knew that Naoto was a picky eater, and wanted to get Suzu-kun make some food for him too, but that gets denied by Naoto as he declared that he had already reserved Suzu-kun for the day to only make food for him XD (Such a possessive guy!!)

Suzu-kun emerged from the kitchen and apologised to Kuki, saying that he had agreed to Naoto’s request since he was angry at him for disobeying his order an got everyone to follow him to the park instead.

(Hinamori seems to be quite happy of the fact that Suzu-kun had fall and hurt himself when they met the people from Beto... =w=“ Control yourself, Hina!)

Though it was disappointed that he couldn’t eat the food made by Suzu-kun, Kuki felt bad that he’s interrupting Class 5′s moments and decided to head off with “me”. He commented that to create such a class and get along well together, it’s really thanks to Suzu-kun in a way ^^ 

Just then, “my” stomach started growling and Senri came up to us, saying that the karage were ready and just coming out at this moment. However, Shu approached us and said that he saw Class 3 had already surrounded the dish so he’s not sure whether there’ll be anymore left over ^^; Senri had already gotten Shu’s share of karage, offering to him to eat before it gets cold. (Senri... he’s fast OWO) As it was quite a large portion that Senri had gotten, Shu suggested him to share it with Kuki and “me”, but Senri answered that he had never even thought about it OWO (Senri, sharing is caring....)

Senri told “me” that it seems that Rui was looking for “me”, and asked “me” to stay here and not moved about as he gets Rui to come over. And thus “I” was alone after that when Leo spotted “me”, Knowing that “I” was waiting for Rui, Leo offered to call him over.

Rui arrived, but clarified that he wasn’t really looking for me and it was just a misunderstanding by the others. (Really... =w=“) He realised that “I” had not told anyone about him betraying Beto, but for Rui, his motive had yet to be fulfilled. He thought he might had gotten a hint recently but seems that it’s just a dead end in the end. Rui decided that he shall stay here at the detective agency for abit longer since he’s still on the hunt for the information that he’s looking for. (Shame that Shu didn’t kick him out... It still pissed me off that he planned on staying here, kind of shameless? =w=“)

A month soon passed after the big operation, and Class 7 was too relaxed to the point that they’re just playing games in the agency =w=“ Tsubasa said that it’s probably just a dream to them now to be involved in such a big case.

Kuki suddenly thought of the times where Tsubasa would suddenly disappear in the middle, and asked him what was he up to at that time. Shiro was suspicious as he hoped that Tsubasa was not a spy among them. (I was curious about this too seriously +W+) Tsubasa denied that he was a spy, and decided to reveal that he was actually training himself, and wanted to keep it a secret from them actually. He was training to make himself stronger so that if anything were to happen, he could protect us in Class 7. (Aww~ ^///^)

Tsubasa wondered if Beto had disbanded after that, and Kuki mentioned that the illegal casino, the path to the VIP room, and the exit from Beto had all been wiped cleaning, dissing that perhaps Beto should consider a cleaning company instead. (Considering how good they’re at cleaning and erasing all tracks of themselves ^^;) Shiro just viewed it as that kind of cleaning company would exists to do bad things instead, that Kuki wasn’t pleased to hear about that and asked Shiro to think more positively. Shiro rebutted him, saying that Kuki was the one being too positive instead XD

Now that illegal casino was closed down and the building and casino had changed hands to another company. Life was peaceful again as Tsubasa remarked that he felt that best that everything was normal like now. Even though he really felt that he was a detective when they’re chasing after the secret society, Beto, and found it fun as well, for Tsubasa, he felt that he was the happiest when everything’s over and he gets to enjoy the peaceful everyday life like this. 

Their work for today was to search for a missing dog. While Shiro complained why they’re doing such jobs again, Tsubasa and “I” seems to enjoy doing them as we found puppies to be adorable~ 

However, someone in the dark had something in plan and was pleased that everything was going according to plan, and soon it would time for the next step.

To be Continued...?

Even though they stated it “to be continued”, that was the end of the main story for Viidog Code. The story still sorts of continues in a later side story, which hopefully I’ll be able to get to translating in the future. 

But first, next up will be more happy and cheerful stories - featuring their event stories~! I managed to read through all of their event stories that were released so far for the game, and would start translating them from next month onwards. I might even translate two in a month to keep up with the yearly celebrations like halloween and christmas, we’ll see how it goes later on~ ^^

Some rambling from me regarding the main story. As much as I wanted the last part to be action filled with fighting, it’s kind of disappointing that the action we’re seeing were mostly Fenrir and Anubis running away ^^; Though it was planned probably to get all the classes to interact and involved with capturing Beto, I found it kind of redundant to get some of the classes involved and confront them. (Like if I’m Fenrir I won’t even bother with Class 2 or 5 and would happily go away merrily after that, not drag multiple conversations with them ^^;) Beto didn’t even fight much with Class 3 (which I think could be an interesting battle since they’re the detective agency offense team after all), and Anubis’ fight with Shiki and Senri seems kind of short... Fenrir doesn’t even fight at all, yet he kept complaining how tired he is. Somehow I just don’t really feel that they’re that powerful, and it started becoming like a joke after they’ve run away for 4th, 5th, 6th, Nth times =w=“

Somehow I just feel that Cerberus seems to be Leo’s brother, (I mean their hairstyles and colour seems similar) especially how Fenrir seems to know Leo’s true identity and all, so perhaps he was related to them? Sadly Cerberus and Leo didn’t get a chance to meet so they never reunited with each other. I wonder whether Leo would mention his side of the story / past if the game had continued... Guess we’ll just never know now TWT TWT I’m still hoping that they might do a restart someday in the future TWT TWT

#viidog code #main story #summary #translation #otome game #vd:main #vd:translation

[momorabu]

16.04.2017

Viidog Code Main Story - Episode 1 - 風变わりな探偵たち / The Detectives That Changed Like The Wind (Part 2)

Continuing from Part 1, let’s meet some more of the agency’s members~! Personally, I really like Class 5 who will appear in the below post ^^

As always, the summary of the story can be found below. Translation may not be 100% accurate due to my poor Japanese skills~

Chapter 7: 異人館街に渦卷く事件 / The Case Surrounding The Strange Street

Yanagi and the rest have already heard about “my” name from Leo earlier, so “I” won’t have to do a self introduction again. They heard that “I’ll” be joining Class 7, which is considered the “newbie” class for the newcomers to learn the skillsets of being a detective. Ryohei and Hijiri were very interested in “me”, leaning close to “me” and even patting “me” on the head, and they ended up getting scolded by Yanagi instead XD

Class 2 has just returned from their work today, which is a different case of the “cheater”. The case they are working on was about several people who has mysteriously disappeared from this city (異人館街), and Ryohei was hoping that perhaps the culprit that Kuki had caught today might be the overall culprit for that case too, making it such that they get to solve 2 cases at one time ^^

Just then, the last member of Class 2 has arrived and joined them. He’s Komano Chihiro, and he even went closer and touched “my” cheeks. This cause Ryohei to complain about him to Yanagi, since Yanagi did not scold Chihiro when he was even closer to “me” than how Ryohei was earlier. (Talk about unfair XD) Yanagi warned him to watch his actions and Chihiro defended himself that seeing that “my” cheeks look really soft, he can’t help but to touch them… (Welp, why does this guy sounds like a hentai suddenly? D:)

Class 2 began to talk more about the case that they’re working on, saying that yet another person had disappeared today at around 4PM today. And during that time, the culprit for the “cheater” case has all already been captured, and thus it was deduced that both cases are not related. They suspected that this disappearing case may have something to do with the city’s casino, and while Ryohei thinks that building is beautiful, Yu really disliked it, claiming that the safety of the city has decreased ever since it has been built, with crime rate arising.

As it was quite late, in the end they don’t really have time to bring “me” around for a tour so Yanagi felt bad about it. For Yu, it was still the first time that he met “me”, so he was still quite shy and said to get along well will be too hard for him the first time. In the end, everyone bids good night and head for bed.

Chapter 8: D.O.Gの美味しいご飯 / The Delicious Meal At D.O.G

The next morning, “I” met Tsubasa as “I” headed out into the living room, and he said he was just coming to wake “me” up actually. (Morning call? XD) He invited “me” to go along to the kitchen with him, saying that “everyone” is already there. (Who’s these… everyone? OwO)

Arriving at the kitchen, “I” was warmly welcomed by the chef for the breakfast this morning - Suzumori Takumi. He and another guy who’s sitting by the side waiting for food (Naoto) belong to Class 5. Suzu-kun said with a bitter smile that he hoped that “I’ll” get along well with Naoto…

And so “I" tried sitting next to him. but Naoto doesn’t even know “me” at all, till Suzu-kun has to remind him that “I’m” the newcomer who Shu talked about yesterday. Naoto said he doesn’t care as long as there’s Suzu-kun with him =w=“ (So in his eyes he only has Suzu-kun and no one else? O.o)

(It hurts when Tsubasa helped to introduce “me” to him, and Naoto said it’s annoying and wanted “me” not to introduce myself actually D: He really doesn’t want to know “me” at all TWT TWT)

But after a slight lecture from Suzu-kun, Naoto reluctantly made his self-introduction - his full name is Madarame Naoto, and he claimed Suzu-kun as his and wants “me” not to lay “my” hands on him. (OMG… so I was right, he does only wants Suzu-kun, and somehow “I’ve” become his rival?!)

Naoto also complained alot, asking why on earth Tsubasa gets his breakfast earlier than him, and expressed unhappiness when Suzu-kun wanted us to sit with them. (He only wants to eat with Suzu-kun only ^^;)

Suzu-kun in the end has to ask whether he could join us instead, since Naoto was being stubborn and said Suzu-kun could go and join them and leave him sitting here instead… ^^;

(Not really sure what happened after that since I didn’t took screenshots of that scenario - Did Naoto really eat alone? XD or perhaps he did join others instead?~)

Shiro and Kuki soon joined afterwards, and after hearing that Class 2 has came to find “me” yesterday night, Kuki got worried and asked whether did Hijiri did anything to me XD (Is Hijiri a scary person? OAO”)

Kuki was also interested about the progress of analyzing the fake license that they’ve taken from the cheater yesterday, since Class 5 specialized in dissecting and analyzing objects and evidence. (Think of the jobscope of forensics in crime investigations) Naoto frowned and replied that Kuki has just passed it to him recently, and it won’t be done that quickly. (Kuki seems very impatient XD) Kuki helpfully explained what Class 5′s jobscope is to “me”, and that Naoto was actually the class leader of that team.

There’s still one more member in Class 5 - Hinamori Kiyoto, but he’s currently still busy at work in the analyze room.

Tsubasa noticed that Shiro is avoiding and leaving the green peas untouched in his meal, and asked him whether is it because he dislikes them. (But Shiro denied, he didn’t want to admit he has food that he dislikes I guess?) Kuki took this chance to make a prank on him, saying that since Shiro doesn’t dislike them, he must have like them too much to leave them till the last to enjoy them.

On hearing Kuki’s comments, Tsubasa gave his share of green peas to Shiro, and even Suzu-kun said he shall cook green peas rice for Shiro today since he managed to know his new favourites. (But I bet this will be Shiro’s green peas hell instead ^^;)

Naoto already want to leave this table by this time and go to another table since they are all too noisy for him ^^;

Chapter 9: 変裝は乙女のたしなみ? / Disguise Is A Girl’s Favourite?

After breakfast, Class 7 were just about to start with their daily work when Shu approached them with a grim look on his face, saying that there’s another disappearance which happened yesterday. Kuki asked that perhaps the person mght have left his/her home for other reasons?

From Senri’s report, the missing person was a 46 year old man, and his family had said that after he said he’ll be returning home after work, there’s no news of him anymore and he didn’t return home either. Knowing that the casino is a suspicious spot, Kuki got fired up and decided that Class 7 shall head to the casino today!

However this decision doesn’t sit well with Senri, as he claimed that doing such action will cause trouble for Shu (and since Senri is always on Shu’s side, he’ll prevent it at all cause XD) Kuki found Senri’s expression really scary and quickly changed his words to assure him that they’re going there to be undercover and get some information.

Senri still felt unsure and asked that they are not going to use this chance to play over there right? But Kuki sneakily smiled and replied OF COURSE they’re going there to play, and of course do their job as well XD

After much discussion, it was finally decided and approved by Shu and the rest of Class 1. Seeing that “I’ve” not been to a casino before, Kuki said it’ll be a good chance for “me” to learn more about the society and to try out the casino for the first time +W+

But of course since we’re not just going there to play, Kuki got serious and started to give out the roles and tasks that each one of us in Class 7 has to do. Since Kuki being the main caretaker and has to look after “me”, he’ll be observing and filming the casino overall, whereas Shiro and Tsubasa will talk to the staff and guests who are there to get more information about the place.

Since Tsubasa is always friendly and smiling, Kuki thought that it’s best for him to approach female guests. (Perhaps he’ll be liked by all these big sisters there XD) Shiro will target the dealer instead, by pretending to lose and asking for tips to chat with them. And since from the outside, no one will think Tsubasa and Shiro will know or have a good relationship with each other, so the possibility of them being suspected will be lower.

Even though Shiro said he won’t pretend to lose, Kuki dissed him by saying that even if he wants to win, he won’t. (That’s so mean, Kuki~)

Shiro also said he doesn’t want to work with Tsubasa to ask for information though, that in the end Kuki had no choice but to demand it as a “leader order”. Shiro could also choose to switch with Kuki himself to film the area with “me”, but Shiro doesn’t like me very much that in the end he remained with the role he was given.  (Poor Shiro, as much as he dislikes it, he still has to go along with all of them. I just hope they all get along well though D:)

Hearing about us going undercover into the casino, a girl(?) appeared and offered to dress us up in disguise. She introduced herself as Hanamaki Rammaru and wanted to get along well with me since we’re both girls.

Since Ran likes cute stuff alot, she thinks she’ll like “me” alot too. (Because “I’m” cute too? XD) Tsubasa said that dressing in disguise might make them too “stand out” instead, and that they are just going in the outfits that they’re wearing now.

Kuki pointed out that Ran just wants to help “me” change actually, and upon hearing that Tsubasa got defensive and yelled “it’s not allowed!” (I wonder why though? OWO)

In the end, Tsubasa pulled “me” to go along with him, saying that he’ll teach “me” on what to look out for when filming and what to look out for in case “I” get in danger.

Chapter 10: 潛入調查 / Undercover Investigation

We reached the casino, with the guys all dressed up in suits +W+ Kuki asked the guys not to get nervous as he scanned the room for suitable targets for them to get information from.

Kuki made some observations of a lady at the bar counter, saying that she must have a pet as he noticed there’s cat fur on her stockings. Whereas the man next to her doesn’t have any pet as he has a very strong perfume that animals find it hard to get close to him. He also noticed that the man is a divorcee, the finger on his right hand has an indentation of wearing a ring too long, but now there’s no ring on it anymore. Kuki also noticed a dealer who seems to find Shiro her type, that even if Shiro doesn’t do anything, the other person will get close and say alot of stuff to him. (I’m amazed… how did he get to know all these by observing OAO”)

(While the two guys went off to do their “information baiting”, Kuki talked about the good points of them. I especially remembered that Tsubasa has the aura to make others around him happy, and since his looks are quite good - meaning he’s good-looking +W+, the lady at the bar counter will like him alot. And Tsubasa always praised people honestly, the man will feel good when he talks to Tsubasa too~)

In the end, Kuki just wanted to play in the casino, asking “me” what “I" wanted to try first. But since “I” didn’t played before in the casino and doesn’t know the rules, Kuki recommended trying out the slot machine first.

(Hehe, “I” prasied Kuki and he ended up being shy about it, saying that it makes him feel shy XD)

Tsubasa soon returned, saying that what Kiki had observed and guessed earlier on was correct. The lady did have a pet - a chinchilla, and the guy was a secretary. But he didn’t get much useful information from them, only knowing that the casino was built suddenly. Tsubasa also noticed some guests entered the room but quickly disappeared.

Shiro came back just then and mentioned that those guests must be VIP guests, saying that all the rich guests came and entered a different room and probably betting a totally different amount of money. (Probably alot more than the amount here I guess OWO”)

Kuki noticed that Shiro seems to be really popular with the dealer, that he even got a lipstick mark on his shirt XD That made Shiro embarrassed and Kuki sneakily even said that they should take a photo to remember this occasion XD

In the end, “I” ended up helping the three of them take a photo in the middle of casino, with both Kuki and Tsubasa trapping poor Shiro in the middle to wrap up our casino trip ^^

Chapter 11: 闇に消えた影 / The Shadow That Vanished In The Dark

After a day at the casino, the trio suspected that the casino may be operated by a dark business group behind it, but they have no information or evidence pointing to it. Kuki encouraged them that this is only their first time, and if they go around “sniffing” for clues too much they might get suspicious since they are just newcomers. However, the VIP guest is something they find interesting and planned to search for more information regarding it.

Shiro warned “me”, hoping that “I’ve” took proper photos even though my hands are shaking, to which Kuki said Shiro is quickly becoming a Senpai to bully me XD

Just then someone bumped into “me”, and while “I” wasn’t hurt when Tsubasa was worrying asking “me”, “my” bag was stolen instead, therefore Tsubasa and Shiro quickly ran after the man to retrieve back my bag.

Kuki stayed with “me”, and seeing that “I’ve” tore my tights, with a cut on “my” leg, he offered to carry “me” if I can’t walk. “I” showed him a worried face and though he’s angry about “my” reaction, he assured “me” that he is definitely strong enough to carry “me” on the piggyback XD (I guess Kuki really doesn’t like being treated as a kid XD)

On the other side, Shiro and Tsubasa managed to catch up to the robber, and asked him to return “my” bag before anyone gets hurt. The robber in the end threw “my” bag aside and rushed off. Tsubasa went and retrieved “my” bag but ultimately they lost sight of the robber and couldn’t find him by scent anymore since it got mixed up with the scent of the ocean at the docks.

Tsubasa initially felt sorry, saying that if he had not went and retrieve the bag, they might not have lost sight of the robber, but Shiro consoled him (sort of XD) by saying it’s not his fault, and that made Tsubasa so grateful that he hugged Shiro. Shiro struggled and asked him to get off him though XD

Kuki and “I” finally caught up to them, and seeing them hugging together, Kuki can’t help but to comment that they really get along “well”~ Tsubasa returned the bag to “me”, asking “me” to check if there’s anything missing from it. Kuki asked them if they’ve seen what does the robber look like, but Shiro shooked his head that they can’t see his face since the robber had worn a hood that covered over half of his face, though from Tsubasa’s observations, the robber seems tiny, but is still larger than Kuki. (Obviously that didn’t make Kuki pleased to hear that… ^^;) The robber also seems to have ear popping out from his hood, and the ears seems to be more like wolf ears instead.

They deduced that since the security around the casino area are quite bad, the robber might thought that there’s money in the bag which is why he went and stole it. “I” thanked them for helping to chase after the robber and get back my bag, and while Tsubasa accepted them happily, Shiro was being all tsundere, saying that “he didn’t do it for me definitely” XD

Chapter 12: 賑やかな食卓 / The Lively Dinner

Coming back to the detective agency, Kuki brought us to the cafe (Cyan) downstairs, where interestingly it doesn’t have a menu. This is a cafe that the master will make any food that you order, which is its specialty. While we are eating, a new team which “I’ve” never seen before arrived and came to talk to us.

The first few guys ended up blocking the way into the cafe as they were interested in “me”, and that made the rest of the members abit impatient as they were all hungry for food. One of the member though, got shocked that “I” was there and realising that “I’m” a female, and wanted to back track out of the shop, and almost bumped into the last member coming through the door.

Kuki commented that whenever this team arrived, he found that there seems to be alot of members, seeing how Sosuke (the blonde hair guy) alone seems to have the same feeling of 3 guys around. (To which Sosuke thinks that Kuki must have thought he is very noisy… ^^;)

In the end, Kuki asked Tsubasa to connect the tables together so that we can all sit and have dinner together. The black hair guy (Kotetsu)wasn’t pleased that he has to sit opposite of “me”… (Why do you seem to dislike me so much, Kotetsu? TWT TWT)

When everyone gets seated, Kuki introduced “me” to them, saying that they’re from Class 3, and they usually handle cases that are more dangerous like chasing after the culprits and capturing them. The leader of this team is Sera Rudolf, the tall tanned guy.

He commented that “I” seems to be smaller than what he had heard about. (But I bet that’s just because you are too tall, Rudo =w=“) But then again he thinks that being small isn’t that bad even though there are things that “I” definitely need to get use to…

Class 3 usually separated into pairs when they are on a mission, with Rudo being the leader on his own. The pairs are split as follows: Kotetsu and Kaname, Sosuke and Kotaro.

The next member quickly stood up and gave his self introduction. This blonde hair guy is Suwa Sosuke. He welcomes “me” with open hands, saying that if “I” have any trouble, feel free to call for him for help ^^

The purple hair guy here though is Sosuke’s partner, Kai Kotaro.

Next is the youngest on the team - Takatsukasa Kaname. He also said that “I” could always approach him for help if “I” have anything I don’t know.

And lastly is the unfriendly guy - Aki Kotestu, and he asked “me” to not get close to him TWT TWT (Even Rudo said the way he talked isn’t good… D:)

After we started eating though, “my” hand accidentally touched his while reaching for the sauce together, and he scolded at “me” not to touch him… (What…? “I” wasn’t even doing that on purpose?! D: That really stings Kotetsu TWT TWT)

In the end, Rudo had to be the one apologising to “me”, asking “me” not to mind too much about Kotetsu’s actions, and explained that Kotetsu has a phobia to women. “I” apologised to Kotetsu instead (since I’ve unknowingly touched him when he’s weak to “me”), but Kotetsu felt embarrassed that “I’m” apologising to him, and still didn’t want “me” to be near him…

(*Sigh… * As much as I understand that he has a phobia, some of his reactions does stings and hurts while I’m reading, he really over-reacted abit too much =w=“)

And that wraps up Episode 1! How was it? Initially when I started reading it, I was blown away by too many characers appearing suddenly ^^; Until now there’s 20 characters that has appeared just in this episode, which left us with another 5 more that exist in this agency. Hopefully we’ll get to meet them in the later episodes ^^

PS: I’ve set myself a target to translate an episode every month, but since I’ve planned to start translating in March but was a month late, I may want to translate the next episode this month too, provided if I could dedicate enough time for this (since I have other posts / translations to work on in the meantime). So for now it’s still a maybe~

#VIIDOG CODE #main story #summary #translation #otome game #vd:main #vd:translation

[momorabu]

30.07.2017

Viidog Code Main Story - Episode 4 - ベート / Beto

Finally managed to finish translating this before the end of the month~ Now I’m back on track for Viidog Code’s stories once again. The story starts to get more and more interesting and intense as the investigation continues on…

As always, the summary of the story can be found below. Translation may not be 100% accurate due to my poor Japanese skills~

Chapter 1: 姿の見ない敵 / The Enemy which can’t be Seen

One morning, Class 7 was being summoned to the office of the agency along with other classes. Kuki had thought that everyone would be summoned but turns out it was just Class 2, 4 and 7 actually. (And also Class 1, since they were the ones who summoned them here)

Kuki had wanted to volunteer to relay the information to the other classes, but Rui informed him that he had already done that, so Class 3, 5, and 6 had the same information as them now. Kuki pouted as he wondered perhaps they had thought he was still a kid (when he’s already 29 years old ^^;) and don’t feel safe that he would relay the information properly, claiming that he’s confident in doing a better job than Hijiri who’s bad at it. However, Hijiri smiled and said that he’s very confident of his skills in remembering things~ (And thus won’t forget the important information he had heard about)

Back to the main topic on why they were being summoned, Izana started off by stating that they were sure that the organisation who ran the illegal casino no doubt was “Beto”, and it was hard to search on them after they’ve escaped in the middle of the night. However, Izana still had some information available, the owner of the building where the illegal casino was located as well as the one who provided the funding for the official casino to run seems to be a large and well-known company.

But Mahiro mentioned that trying to fish out any information about the illegal casino from the company gets an answer that they claimed they do not know anything about it. He did managed to get to know that the list of people who were missing matched perfectly with the list of guests who frequent the casino. (So there must be a link there somewhere~) Comparing both lists, Class 4 had also managed to know that they were also known as the VIP guests in the official casino.Ran also piped in and stated that they had managed to know that some of the VIP guests did went to the illegal casino before, claiming that they had managed to know this after talking for a long time with the people they were assigned to protect currently. However, they still didn’t managed to grab hold of any information on what kind of organisation this “Beto” was.

Trying to gather more information, Kuki requested “me” to head to the data room and searched for information regarding the rich people who’s living in this town and any relevant information about their family.

“I” head towards the data room, and overheard Rui talking on the phone there. He was talking to someone, and mentioned that even though he doesn’t know when is he going to launch his next move, he planned to carry it out soon. He mentioned that all the detectives in the agency are all “Kenrouzoku”, and told the other party he would send the information and photo over. (What is he doing? Is he sending other 3rd party information about our detective agency? OAO”)

After he ended his phone call, Rui wasn’t happy to find “me” in the data room with him. He told “me” to promise him that “I” had not met him at all in this room, and had not seen anything at all, mentioning that if “I” had even dared to breathe  a word of what “I’ve” seen to anyone, he would make “me” unable to talk ever again. (Ahh…. he’s threatening “me”?!! OAO”)

Thank goodness, Leo suddenly appeared and told Rui that he had found the book that Rui was looking for earlier, and that interrupted the conversation (or say his threatening) from proceeding any further…

Chapter 2: 1日限定お姫様 / The Lady which exists for a day Only

“I” returned back to the office, and Kuki announced that we’re going to head to the official casino again as undercover, stating that we’re not going there just to play this time, but to confirm something and gain information instead. The mission he had set would be… whether the rich lady would be able to gain access to the VIP room? (Tsubasa dissed that this was indeed a mission name that’s easy to understand.. ^^;)

Since “I” was assigned as the lady who was rich and going to the casino as undercover, Shiro asked what these people would be doing instead, gesturing towards the two guys in the office. (New characters~!! +W+)

One of the guy spoke up and answered that both his brother and him were being assigned to go undercover, where they’ll disguised as “my” SP (security police).

Seeing that this was the first time “I’m” meeting them, Kuki introduced them to “me”. They’ll be the ones who would accompany “me” in going undercover and were members from Class 6. (Finally, the guys from Class 6 had appeared, that’s everyone… for now~)

The guy who answered initially introduced himself as “Mitsui Toki” and asked “me” to just keep quiet and see them at work later on. Kuki gave a weak smile and said that though he might be abit solemn,  it’s alright to depend on him, and asked Toki to protect “me”. (Aww~ Kuki is behaving like a dad asking someone to take good care of his daughter XD)

The other guy, introduced himself as “Mitsui Shiki”, asking “me” to not rely on him as he found it troublesome. (What…?) Kuki brushed it off by saying that even though Shiki had stated that, it was still alright to rely on him in times of needs. As their surnames were the same, Kuki informed “me” that they’re brothers, with Shiki being the elder brother, whereas Toki is the younger brother. Class 6 only has both of them as its members.

Tsubasa asked that whether it’s just the three of us (Shiki, Toki, and “me”), since he was worried as there’s going to be alot of people in the casino and there’s only Shiki and Toki accompanying “me”. Even Shiro mentioned that he found just three people going as undercover abit too little. (…Are they worried for “me”? OWO)

Kuki mentioned that he had called for one more person to come and assist us, and that person is… Ran! He had dressed up as a rich young lady from a corporation, and though Shiro said that he’s too obvious dressed up like this, Ran felt that it’s better the more obvious he is~(You’ll know the reason why later on ^^~)

Ran asked Kuki whether he could do whatever he want, which Tsubasa wondered what is it that he wanted to do. It was then decided that both Ran and “me” would disguised as the rich ladies from huge corporations going undercover into the casino, with Shiki and Toki accompanying us as our SP. Ran was excited as he pulled “me” to go and get dressed up, claiming that he would make “adorable”~

Arriving at the casino, Toki acted his role as the bodyguard, asking what are we going to play first there. (I thought he was escorting “me” actually, but turns out that he’s escorting Ran, whereas Shiki was the one escorting “me”) But Shiki isn’t doing anything, Toki was frustrated as he asked Shiki to escort “me”as his job. Even Ran helped to speak up, stating that Kuki would get angry if he slacked ><”

Kuki had installed a small Erma on “my” hairpin, and thus the rest of Class 7 were able to see and hear the situation in the casino through it. Cameras were also installed on Shiki‘s button and Toki’s cuff, thus Tsubasa warned them to be careful when moving about in case they accidentally dropped them. Kuki warned them to avoid getting int o fights, and their mission in this casino was to become the VIP guests in this casino.

Chapter 3: VIPへの道 / The Path to VIP

Toki was seen congratulating Ran as he won yet another round yet again, and his winnings had accumulated to quite a huge amount. “Me”, on the other hand, had great luck at the slot machines and had yet again get another 3 sevens. (It was “my” 8th time in getting it +W+ How lucky am “I”?)

Shiki called “me” as little chick (Hiyoko), asking “me” that “I” maybe acting too overboard and was making “myself” too stand out with “me” winning again and again. However, “I” ended up spinning another 3 sevens yet again in the midst of the conversation, though Toki who was watching from the other side seems to be glad that Shiki’s side seems to be doing well in gaining attention. Ran was amazed that “I” was really lucky and that’s different compared to him. (I guessed Ran used some tricks to make himself keep winning ^^;) Toki praised him that his skills was really good that he was even able to deceive the dealer’s eyes.

Ran started getting impatient as he wondered why none of the casino staff had approached him yet (in inviting him to be a VIP I guess), since he had already accumulated quite a large amount of winnings by now. Just then, Shiki came over and commented that “I” won’t do. (Why? I thought “I’m” doing a good job by winning?) Toki reprimanded him that he wasn’t supposed to come over to their side as they were supposed to gain attention while they’re separated in two different teams.

Shiki had carried over a large amount of coins, and claimed that they were all won by “me” on the slot machines, and had already cause one slot machine to run out of coins. (Wow… how did “I” do that… OAO”) Even Toki mentioned that this was pretty much impossible, as nobody had ever able to win consecutively on just one machine. Shiki wanted to exchange to playing cards next, and asked Ran to change with him.

Just then, the manager of the casino approached them as he introduced himself, and after knowing that Ran was a rich lady from a power corporation (which I bet they just made up the family name ^^;), he wanted to introduce him to a place that’s more fun since Ran mentioned that this casino is too easy to win till he had lost patience and had wanted to leave. (Haha, no way the manager would let you off easily after you won so much of their money I guess ^^;)

Kuki who was watching from the office was glad that they had been “upgraded” to VIP status finally. Tsubasa was impressed with Ran’s card skills, but he was surprised at how good “I” am too. Kuki was sure that the manager would let them go off from the casino after they’ve won so much money and would definitely made a move on them. Kuki guessed that they should be leading to the illegal casino and informed Ran and others about it.

The manager led us (including “me”, since “I’ve” won so much at the slot machines) to the illegal casino, and told us that there were more exciting games to join over here. As the manager turned to leave us here, Shiki wondered if it’s alright to let him go off like this, but Toki thought there’s no point in keeping the manager here either as he guessed that he’s just a normal staff recruited by the casino. (And thus might not know much about the illegal casino anyway)

Looking around, Toki mentioned that there were many rich women / wives and businessman in this casino. Shiki wondered what they should do next, and suggested that perhaps he should grab a staff and force out the information from them. (I don’t think you should do that Shiki…) Toki sighed and asked him to please think over it carefully before making move.

Ran decided to walk around and meet some of these well-known people, and asked “me” to accompany him, though he said that “I” don’t have to do anything but just smile and stand next to him ^^; (Looks like Ran would just handle everything from here)

Chapter 4: 託されたメッセージ / The Message which was being asked to deliver

Ran approached one of the young staff working there, pointing out that he had been looking at “me” since just now. That made the guy blushed while Ran complimented that he’s adorable for getting flustered like this .(Ran, you just enjoy teasing him don’t you…? ^^; Don’t worry, I would too if I were him XD) He assured him that he didn’t call him over just to tease him, and wanted him to introduce “me” to the owner, as “I” was interested in meeting the owner. However, the boy answered that only a small number of staff ever get the chance to meet the owner, and in fact the boy himself had never met the owner himself either. He insisted that he’s not lying as he felt intimidated by Toki and Shiki when they came over, and revealed the owner was always in the VIP room and had never leave the room.

Toki then realised that this hidden casino was still not our final destination, since there was still a VIP room that we’ve yet to enter. The boy continued by explaining that even though everyone in this hidden casino was the “VIP”, there were even more special VIPs who were being invited to enter that VIP room, adding that those who managed to enter were regulars at this casino.

As it would be too suspicious and forced to be requested to be taken into the VIP room on our first visit here, Toki decided that we shall just gather more information at the area we were currently at. Ran decided to rely on Shiki to check out the surroundings as the cameras on us was too difficult to take a good record down on the surroundings.

So thus, Shiki started walking around the casino, and Kuki who was watching through the camera noticed the VIP door and requested Shiki to walk closer so as to take a closer look at it. He wondered whether the door could be broken down and that almost cause Shiki to take action right now at that point of time. It gave Kuki a scare as he cautioned him that this was not the time to break down the door ^^; Upon closer look, Kuki realised that it required a card key to unlock the door.

After Shiki got back from his rounds, we decided to head back for today since like what Ran had said, there’s no point in defeating the dealer as they won’t be invited into the VIP room on their first day here.

We headed back without exchanging the coins we’ve won into cash, since Ran said that Shu would be angry if we’ve did that. As we were being blindfolded when we were being led to and exit from the hidden casino, Ran had no idea where is the hidden casino located. Noticing that “I” seems tired, Ran gave a weak smile and he said that we should hurry back so that he could help to remove “my” make up.

Just then someone appeared in the alley, and being defensive, Toki cautioned “me” to stay behind him. (Aww~~ >///<)

Ran stopped the person who appeared in front of us and asked why does he want to approach us. However, the guy who appeared was the same mysterious guy which Suzu-kun and “I” had saved before, and he said that he had something that he wanted to pass to Takumi (Suzu-kun) and thus asked for “my” help to pass it to him. Even though Toki doesn’t really believe in him, but since “I” said it’s fine they let “me” approach him. Ran decided to let “me” head towards him,and mentioned that if “I” need any help, they’ll be right behind “me”.

Approaching the mysterious guy, he handed something to “me”, and asked “me” to please pass it to Suzu-kun. (I wonder what that item is…?)

Chapter 5: 元.ハッカー / Past. Hacker

Leo greeted us when we arrived back at the detective agency, and asked where Toki and Shiki were. Ran replied that they had left the task of reporting to us and had went back for today. Leo informed us that Kuki had already taken the videos that were recorded by us just now at the casino to Class 5 to have it analyse, and thus won’t return that soon.

Just then, Kotetsu came into the office to ask Leo regarding a document, but he got a shock when he saw both Ran and “me”, that Ran found him very rude to show such an attitude when he saw him ^^; Ran joked that perhaps Kotetsu was just surprised that the two of us were too pretty but Kotetsu was just froze. He did recovered later on, and quickly escaped from the scene, as Ran gave a weak smile and wondered why was he in a hurry to get away XD

Kuki and the rest of Class 7 soon arrived to welcome us back home, and since Shiro didn’t, Kuki had to request him to specifically do so. Ran complimented that “I” performed well at the casino, but Shiro sort of dampened the spirit by stating that he already knew that from watching through the camera. That angered Ran as he felt that all the more Shiro should praised “me” instead.

Noticing that Kuki and the others had just came from Class 5′s lab, Ran asked them whether they had met Suzu-kun over there, as we’ve received a memo (from the mysterious guy) that we need to pass it over to him. Looking closely at the memo, Tsubasa realised that it seems to be made up of just a bunch of alphabets and numbers that doesn’t seems to make much sense together. In the end, all of us decided to head back to Class 5′s lab to look for Suzu-kun, though Shiro grumbled as he thought that just one person is enough to deliver the memo ^^; (Poor Shiro had to stick through with us again ^^;)

Suzu-kun still remembered about the mysterious guy once we mentioned that he was that guy who came and eat over at the agency. He was surprised to receive this memo and he couldn’t understand what was written on the memo either. However, he guessed that these letters must have a certain meaning to it if not the mysterious guy won’t have wanted to pass it over to him specially.

Naoto was about to get some sleep when Suzu-kun stopped him and asked him to help to decipher it, as it was actually Naoto’s forte in deciphering such stuff. Tsubasa informed “me” that before Naoto became a detective, he was actually a hacker. (Wow… OWO”) Even though Naoto grumbled that he’s going to sleep already and in fact his brain had already shut down, Suzu-kun managed to coax him into helping out by telling him that he would make something sweet to reward him later on. Won over by Suzu-kun, Naoto took over the memo to take a look at it.

(Seems that Naoto still didn’t like the mysterious guy from last time as he deemed him as the one who stole his dinner back then, even though Suzu-kun reminded him that he did make his share as well the last time ^^;)

As he pondered what could the letters mean, Naoto asked Suzu-kun whether he had talked about anything with the mysterious guy the last time they met. (He initially guessed it could be a password, but it rang no bells… =w=“) However, he ended up managed to access a website by keying the letters the other way round instead on the computer, and turns out that website was a hidden website of the organization  “Beto”. (Woah! Somehow we had gotten a huge lead this way! +W+)

The rest of us were impressed with his hacking skills, and while Naoto claimed that it was just something very normal he could do, he ended up blushing a little as though he’s not used to being praised. (Aww~ Unexpectedly, Naoto had a cute side XD)

Shiro asked whether we could get any useful information from this hidden site of “Beto”,and thus it became Naoto’s job once again to decipher and analyse this site. (So much for getting sleep, Naoto =w=“) Ran and “I” decided to head off first, as we still had reporting to do later on, and Kuki was surprised by this unexpected lead given to us suddenly.

Chapter 6: 隱れた天才 / The Hidden Genius

Shu came over after knowing that there’s a new lead which had arrived for us, and Kuki also explained that it was because Naoto that we too have high security to prevent others from accessing to our database easily. (How cute Suzu-kun was impressed of Naoto’s computer skills +W+)

Naoto explained to Shu that even if they could access to Beto’s website, they’ll need a user id and password to login to some parts of the website which were off access to them, and Naoto said that part of the site had an even high security that it would be very difficult to hack into it. In the end, he agreed to help Shu to try hack into within a night, and asked Suzu-kun to make some supper for him~

The next morning, Leo was suprised to find Naoto was up so early, but unfortunately instead of getting up early, Naoto explained that he had stayed up through the night. Since Kuki had arrived later on, Naoto handed him a memory card, saying that he had copied everything he could from the site onto it so that they could take a look at it later on. With that, Naoto bidded good bye to them as he head off to bed. Shu thanked him for his help and told him that he would wake him up if anything were to happen later on. For Naoto, he really hoped that nothing would happen though… (so that he could at least take a good nap~)

Looking through the data that Naoto had retrieved for them, Kuki were surprised to find that it consisted of the data of customers who went to the illegal casino. Shu decided to compile the information into a folder, and requested Leo to send them to Class 3 so that they could use it in their investigation.

Kuki thought that the information seems abit too little under such a high security password, but Shu explained that the site might just be a temporary place where the members exchanged information, adding that their main database where they stored their data may be located elsewhere instead. After the members from “Beto” had retrieved the information from the site, they would delete it.

However, even when a file is deleted, there would still be some traces left, and Naoto had already recovered those that he could from the site. Shu and Kuki looked at the recovered files, and Leo who had came back recognised that one of the files was actually a design plan of a card key system. Shu suspected that this maybe the card key system which has just been changed into after the day the illegal casino had been discovered, since “Beto” might have panicked and worried that their other illegal casinos maybe discovered, they decided to change all their locks and upgrade their security.

Shu asked Leo whether he could helped to create a copy of the card  key from this design plan of the system, Leo answered that he could create a copy since there’s the design of the IC chip on the plan itself, but without knowing how the card looks like in reality, he found it hard to replicate the card key. Kuki mentioned that the look of the card key might have been recorded down in the video by Shiki and us yesterday, and requested the help of Class 5 to take a look at it. Even though re-creating the card key by himself would be a hard task for Leo, he’s confident that he would be able to accomplish it along with the help of Class 5.

Kuki was impressed with Leo and apologised to him that he had always thought of him as someone who just make weird inventions. However, that made Leo sad to know that Kuki had always felt this way towards his inventions ^^;

Naoto was awake just after sleeping for 30mins, and grumbled that Shu must have wanted him to overwork to death. (I feel kind of bad for Naoto at this point of time, this guy just couldn’t take a break TWT) Suzu-kun tried to cheer him up by offering a bowl of miso soup to wake himself up, with Leo apologising too since he needed Naoto’s help as it would take him too much time to make the card key by himself.

Just then, Tsubasa and Shiro had arrived, since Kuki had informed them that the case had a new lead, though Shiro wasn’t pleased with how annoying Kuki was by awaking him through the phone. (Kuki just thought of himself giving a “loving” morning call though? XD)

Since Class 3 was in charge of the list of the customers who went to the illegal casino, Kuki explained that Class 7 would be in charge of the other information instead.

Tsubasa wondered what on earth is the organisation “Beto” all about, and what exactly are they doing making these people disappear…

Chapter 7: 追う者と追われる者 / The Chaser and the one being Chased

Over at Cyan, Shu had summoned for all the class, so Mahiro guessed that Shu must have gotten some really huge leads on “Beto” currently. Shu showed a photo, which was actually one that was taken by “me” when Class 7 was going undercover in the casino, and that photo showed the entrance of the illegal casino. Another photo of mine was taken at the time Shiro and “I” were attacked by these mysterious and weird people back then, and “I” had unknowingly taken alot of photo as “I” was pressing onto the shutter. That photo showed the people who had attacked us, and it clearly showed that they had animal ears under their hood.

However, Tsubasa mentioned that these people do not have a smell for them to trace, and Kuki guessed that they must have used something that can helped to erase and hide their scent, since Class 5 had also made something like that. These were used by Class 2 and Class 6 too in the past. Knowing that “Beto” had also used something like this, Toki guessed that the other party must have known that the detective agency have “kenrouzuou” in it and didn’t want them to track them down. (So thus they would erase their own scent and make themselves hard to find.)

Shu even went onto suspecting that there’s a great possibility that the people in “Beto” might even be “Kenrouzoku” like them too, and this is why they would need to treat this matter carefully, since if they’re facing an enemy that’s as powerful as them, it would be difficult to defeat them as they themselves might get defeated instead.

Tsubasa wondered why those “kenrouzoku’ would want to create a secret society like this, but Senri explained that there wasn’t what they should be pondering about right now. The important thing they should do now was to find out the owner of the illegal casino and stopped their actions. However, in order to meet the owner, they would need to enter that VIP room in the illegal casino. Saying that if they took too much time, the suspect might have escaped, Senri proposed that they shall not use the “right” way to enter it. (Haha, talk about breaking the law… ^^;) Shu continued on by saying that Leo had actually created a card key that would allow them to enter the VIP room, and since there’s only one card key being created currently, Leo cautioned them not to lose it.

Kuki wondered how they should even enter the illegal casino this time round, since if they asked someone in the casino to bring them again, there’s a high possibility of being discovered when they use the copied card key. Senri decided that they shall just break into the illegal casino and use the card key outside of the working hours, so as to minimise the risk of being discovered. Kuki was shocked that Senri knew about the location of the illegal casino, since the last time Ran and us exited the place, we were all being blind folded so that we would now know where it is located.

Senri explained that Chihiro had actually came across Ran’s scent when he was out for a walk, and spotted someone holding onto a cloth with Ran’s scent. That person was actually the boy Ran had talked to and lent him his handkerchief the last time they met at the illegal casino! (Wow… so somehow Ran had helped to save the day~! ^^) Chihiro had also spotted a weird and strange entrance near the building too, and so they deduced that that must be the entrance to the illegal casino.

The next morning, Class 7 were awake and had gathered together, even though Kuki himself was still feeling quite sleepy. It was a class rule that the whole of Class 7 should gather for breakfast, as Shiro grumbled that this was a rule with no meaning behind it. Kuki pouted and claimed that this was the time for them to communicate, and it was not a rule that has no meaning~ (I bet Kuki just wanted everyone to be much closer together by having breakfast together ^^)

They had also invited Leo to join them, but since Leo wasn’t here, Kuki guessed that he might have overslept and decided to head to his room to wake him up. However, Leo wasn’t at his room either, and it’s highly impossible that he would went out to have breakfast by himself as the food made by Suzu-kun were really delicious that one would think twice to eat outside actually.

Suddenly, Kuki noticed a familiar object on the floor in Leo’s room - a very familiar looking pin badge…

Chapter 8: 消えたレオ / Disappearing Leo

Kuki quickly got us over to look at the pin badge that he had found, and said this was not the time to feel relaxed that Leo was gone. The pin badge was similar to the one which “I” had picked up at the casino when it was dropped by someone over there, and they’ve get to know later on that the pin badge belonged to people from “Beto”… This was then that they realised that there’s a high possibility that Leo was kidnapped by the people from “Beto”! (Oh no… Leo… TWT)

Shiro wondered why the people from “Beto” would want to kidnap Leo, but seeing that pin badge was dropped at Leo’s room, they couldn’t ignore this possibility, so Kuki got Tsubasa to go and inform Shu about this fact, and Shiro to head to Class 5 to hand them this pin badge so that they could analyze more about it. With the two of them gone, it was just “me” and Kuki left. He noticed that “I” had a really worried expression on my face, and assured “me” that Leo would be fine. (I know he means well, but the situation does seems really worrying… ><”)

Back at the office where Class 1 was already there as they get to know about Leos disappearance, Shu asked Kuki whether they had called Leo through his phone. Kuki answered that Hijiri had actually helped to call several times earlier on but it gets no answer nevertheless.

Rui asked that whether it was ture that “Beto” had really kidnapped Leo, that Shu answered that even though they can’t be 100% sure about it, there’s a very high possibility that it may be that way from how things look like now. Senri was confused that why was Leo the one being kidnapped out of them, since he had never participated in any of the investigations and should be those that had the lowest risk of being targeted. Shu thought that this was not really the time for them to discuss why Leo was being targeted though, since what’s important right now was to find out where is Leo now and to make sure that he’s safe.

Naoto was once again woke up forcefully (by Shiro this time) as he complained once again that just as he thought he was able to sleep peacefully for now. Since there was no one available in Class 5 right now, Shiro had no choice by to bring Naoto over to the office this time. (Suzu-kun had gone to the supermarket in the morning, and Hina was resting for today as he had went to a all night horror show yesterday night…)

Seeing Naoto was here, Kuki handed to him the pin badge which he had found earlier on, and requested him to analyse it for him. Since Leo wasn’t contactable through the phone, Shu worried that perhaps his mobile phone was being abandoned elsewhere. In the end, Shu decided to get everyone to gather once again, as this incident might be a major one if Leo was indeed really kidnapped by “Beto”.

With everyone gathered at Cyan once again, Shu started giving instructions as they planned to rescue Leo. Firstly, Class 1 would be in charge of giving out instructions and overseeing the whole operations. Next, Class 2 and 4 would work together to help to make sure that there’s a clear exit route for the other teams to escape once they’ve rescued Leo. Class 3 and 6 would be acting as security police, to prevent and protect the enemy from attacking them, though Senri told them if they’re capable of catching the enemy, they could do that too XD Class 6 would stay behind to help protect the headquarters, in case the enemy decided to attack here when everyone is gone, and Class 3 would stay on standby at an area near to the illegal casino.

Class 5 would continue with their usual tasks of analyzing information, and as for Class 7… they would be in charge of going undercover into the illegal casino. (Wow… is it really alright to leave such an important task to us?! OWO”)

After the meeting, “I” had met Rui at the data room once again, and had asked him whether Leo would be alright. Rui wasn’t pleased to see “me”, and told “me” that he had no idea whether Leo would be aright or not, since Rui was only giving out information of the detective agency to the other party, and somehow the other party decided to target Leo after they had analysed the information that had been given to them. (Rui is really such a betrayer! D:)

However, Rui had already decided that this was something that he wanted to do and had to do so that he could have his “revenge”, even if it means that he had to sacrifice someone. (What is this “revenge” he’s talking about? O.O”) He soon left as he doesn’t want to talk to “me” anymore, and asked “me” not to bother him anymore too. (Ouch… TWT)

Chapter 9: 奪還作戰 / The Operation to Snatch Back

Chihiro was surprised that “I’ve” tagged along with Class 7, as he had thought “I” would want to stay on standby at the detective agency. Kuki gave a weak smile as he explained that he had felt that it would be dangerous to leave “me” behind and that “I’m” also a part of Class 7 too even though “I’m” just an assistant.  

Seems that Class 2 was defying the orders of Shu by Hijiri getting Chihiro to come and accompany us along the way, with Class 4 too trailing after us. Tsubasa wondered that Class 4 would be discovered by the enemy if they had spotted them sneaking in behind us, but Shiro was worried more about no one helping to make sure there’s an escape route if they’re all just tailing behind us and defying orders XD However, Kuki was sure that everything would work out, and that he himself would definitely not let the rest of Class 7 to do something that they felt troubled about.

Rui was in contact with us through the earphones, and told us that with the security cameras on the street, he would be able to spot if there’s any enemies that had appeared and would notified them if that happens. Suddenly, Senri mentioned that a guy in a hood was spotted around 50 metres away from us, and thus Kuki decided that they shall speed across the road in order not to be discovered by the guy. Since “I” couldn’t run as fast as them, Kuki proposed that Shiro shall carry “me” while he ran, and though Shiro complained that he would be able to run fast while carrying “me”, he still decided to do it in the end, and asked “me” to climb onto him ^^

We’ve finally made our way to the alley, with Tsubasa being impressed that Shiro had actually able to run at the same speed as them even while he was carrying “me”. Chihiro bidded good bye to us as he led us to the entrance he had found to lead to the illegal casino. (Oh, so that’s why Chihiro was with us~)

Though at this time, with the illegal casino isn’t opened yet, it doesn’t mean that there won’t be anyone in it even if there’s no customers. Kuki instructed us that our main priority was to head straight towards the VIP room as soon as possible once we’re inside. Even if there’s a chance that we might meet someone from “Beto” inside, Kuki cautioned us to avoid fighting with them since our main motive in coming here was to rescue Leo, not to fight with “Beto”.

On the other side, Yanagi who was with the rest of Class 2, asked Hijiri on what they’re supposed to do in regarding ensuring the escape route. However, Hijiri aswered that they’re not doing that as he was just awaiting for Chihiro to return currently. You started to get worried for Leo as he wondered whether he would get scared when he was being captured. Hijiri gave a chocolate to You to cheer him up, and asked him to smile so that he could welcome Leo back with it when he had returned.

Chapter 10: ベート / Beto

In the meanwhile, Class 4 who was trailing behind us had also entered the illegal casino, with Izana asking Mahiro whether it was alright for them to stay here and not following them even further inside. Mashiro answered that they should stay here on standby, though they should be careful not to get discovered by anybody from “Beto”.

Even though Ran believed in what Mashiro was doing, he was curious why was Mashiro defying Shu’s instructions and doing something different. (Since they’re supposed to be making sure of the escape route for Class 4, not be on standby here ^^:) However, Mashiro didn’t want to answer that so Ran guessed that it must have a certain reason that he can’t reveal now. Mashiro smiled and praised that Ran was really observant that he’s just like a girl. (Erm? Is that supposed to be a praise… or not…? o.O)

Back at the detective agency, Class 5 was analysing the pin badge, which Naoto was disappointed to say that it was exactly the same as the one which “I’ve” picked up earlier on. Naoto asked Hina on how his progress is on picking up the fingerprint.

Examining even closer on the pin badge, Naoto tried to analyse how was the pin badge being dropped onto the floor, since if one could deduce how it falls, they might be able to get the height of the suspect. However, just analysing the badge doesn’t seems to get enough information for them, so Suzu-kun proposed to them that they shall head to Leo’s room next for more investigations! (Is it me or Class 5 seems to be having fun with this? Or maybe it’s just Suzu-kun having fun with this? XD)

Class 1 was stationed at the dock, with Rui reporting to Shu and mentioned that it seems that multiples classes seems to be defying his orders and doing things differently. Shu was alright in letting them continuing on doing things their way, but Rui worried that they might end up obstructing the operation instead. Senri helped to speak up for Shu by explaining that those who were at the scenes know what they should do the best, since Class 1 themselves were not at the scenes themselves, they might not know everything that was going on there to give the best judgement on what to do.

Rui had another query that he asked Shu about, why was Class 1 giving out instructions here actually? (Yeah… They don’t have to do it at the dock actually, and could just stay at the agency office. OWO”)

Chapter 11: 消えた人たち / The Missing People

In the meanwhile, Class 3 was on standby at a warehouse, and Sosuke was complaining why they had to be on standby since he thought that they won’t be able to protect anyone if anything were to happen at in the illegal casino at that moment. (Since they’re still quite a distance from it) Kotetsu agreed with Sousuke, and asked Rudo for the reason why they were being sent on standby here.

Kotaro tried to asked them to stop asking, since the order was passed down by Shu, and not Rudo actually. But seems that Sosuke’s and Kotetsu’s questioning had Rudo to make a change, as he told them to get ready to move off. Kaname wondered why Rudo would change his orders suddenly when they were being ordered to stay here on standby, since if they were to defy Shu’s orders, they should have started way earlier and not wait until now.

Rudo doesn’t seems to want to answer them yet, but the rest of the Class 3 believed in his decisions, and decided to go along with him.

Class 6 had also defied against Shu’s order, with Shiki heading out of the detective agency and Toki following behind him, asking him why is he not following Shu’s orders. However, Shiki only gave a really weak reason that Toki found it unacceptable, though he agreed with Shiki finding it weird that “Beto” has targeted Leo instead of Shu instead as it would have been more effective if they aimed for Shu instead. Toki sighed as he grumbled that Shiki would never understand about his feelings. (These two just never gets along… =w=“)

Back to Class 7 where we’ve finally made our way into the illegal casino after going a long way down underground. Since the illegal casino was located deep underground, it’s no wonder that the detectives were unable to hear any sounds of it above ground. Kuki instructed us to hide behind the bar counter to prevent anyone from spotting us easily and asked Tsubasa what was the time now. Tsubasa answered that it’s already in the evening and there’s around an hour more to the opening of the casino. Since the staff were cleaning up and getting ready for the working day, more and more people were moving around in the casino.

Just then, Tsubasa noticed that the staff members in the casino all had the same exact badge as the one Kuki had picked up from earlier in Leo’s room. Therefore, we’re sure that these staff members were from “Beto” too. Noticing that there’s a man without a pin badge in the room, Kuki wondered who he is when an incident happened in front of our eyes.

The man was begging to the staff member to please give him more time to accumulate money to repay his debt. However, the staff spared no mercy as he held up a document, saying that they’ve now taken over his land and ordered him to leave the town, never to return again unless he would have to pay for his debt. Seeing this scenario, Kuki finally understood that this must be the reason why there’s people disappearing from this town after they’ve come to this casino, and that this is the work of “Beto”. The people who had disappeared had all accumulated a huge amount of debt from “Beto” and were all threatened and ordered to leave / “disappear” from this town.

Shiro wondered why are they doing this, though, as the people had not pay off their debt, therefore, “Beto” doesn’t get to gain any money from them if they chased these people out of the town. Tsubasa mentioned that he had heard that the man were talking about land from the conversation just now, and thus Kuki suspected that “Beto” was trying to gain more land like how politicians trying to get all their supporters in one area by gaining land in a way.

Chapter 12: 終著點 / The Finishing Point

As the time creeped closer to the opening time, Shiro started to worry and asked Kuki what they should do now, since it’s going to be a matter of time that they’re going to get discovered if they stayed here. However, Kuki asked us to wait for awhile as he contacted Shu, asking him for backup to help support him.

Class 4 who were in the normal casino by now were standby waiting for instructions until they were about to fall sleep XD Since Shu gave the signal to proceed with the operation, Mahiro started giving out instructions to Ran and Izana on what to do. Firstly, Ran would start running to the security alarm to set it off, and if anyone noticed Ran along the way, Izana would help up to stop the person. Mahiro would help both of them to assure an exit route as a support. And thus Class 4 get to work and managed to make the alarm rang off successfully in the end.

Class 7 who were on standby in the illegal casino heard the alarm going off, while Kuki assured us not to get alarmed as this was the work of Class 4 to help and support us. The members from “Beto” started to panic as they thought of the money from the casino above, and all started to leave to head to the casino above. Grabbing this chance, Kuki motioned to us to head towards to the VIP room. With the copied card key prepared, we’re all ready to head into the room.

(Kuki wanted “me” to hide behind him in case anything should happen, but he realised that he maybe too tiny to protect “me” and asked “me” to hide behind Tsubasa and Shiro instead XD)

Once inside the VIP room, we scoured around and managed to find yet another hidden door behind the shelves, and knowing that we’re getting closer to the “Boss Room”, Kuki once again went through the main priority we had for this mission. 1. To find Leo. 2. To save Leo out. There’s no 3 and 4 but there’s no. 5, all of us had to escape safe and sound! With that, we head through the door, and found ourselves facing a new character.

“You are the last boss.” (Kuki, you are really saying it as if we’re in a RPG ^^:)

And that’s all for Episode 4, whew~! I was planning on finishing this last week but somehow only managed to finish writing the 2nd half today instead~ With a new character appearing at the end of this episode, would we get to know who he is in the next epsiode? And Leo still needs us to rescue him~

Next episode would be the last episode for the main story, so this case would come to an end~ I’ll be working on it when August comes around so please look forward to it~! ^^

#viidog code #main story #summary #translation #otome game #vd:main #vd:translation

[momorabu]

03.07.2017

Viidog Code Main Story - Episode 3 - 消えた人たち / The Missing People

It’s a new month and I realised that I have not translate anything for Viidog Code for the month of June so here is it~! Sorry for the late update for this, I was quite busy thins

As always, the summary of the story can be found below. Translation may not be 100% accurate due to my poor Japanese skills~

Chapter 1: さまよえる幽靈 / The Wandering Ghost

After dinner on another day, Yu wanted to return to his bedroom straight away, but Ryohei asked him to stay around for awhile longer since from what his grandma had said in the past, if one moved around too much after eating, their stomach will get a shock XD (This reminds me of Hokuto talking about his grandma~~ ^^)

Chihiro looked around the living room and commented that there seems to be more people from the other classes here with them, though for Class 7 it’s just “me” and Shiro. (Since it’s kind of rare that Tsubasa was actually missing here OWO”)

Suddenly, Chihiro went into spooky mode, talking about there’s “people who doesn’t exist in this world anymore” among them, and that made Yu started to get really scared as he told Ryohei not to listen to it too. Turns out that Chihiro was talking about one of the case which the detective agency was looking into, which is the missing person case in this town. Chihiro mentioned that he has discovered something strange while he was on the trail to track down these missing people, and that is… before they disappeared, it seems that their last sighting were all at the same place. After they were spotted at that place, any further traces of them were gone, just like a gust of wind.

Chihiro wondered that perhaps these missing people were actually ghosts, but Shiro immediately shot down that idea, saying that ghosts won’t have legs and people have heard their footsteps. It ended up making Ryohei interested and Yu even more scared by screaming that he doesn’t hear any footsteps at all. (Poor Yu is really treating this as a ghost story OWO”)

Just then, Class 5 appeared~ But upon seeing the crowd of people here, Naoto proposed to Suzu-kun that they switched place since it’s noisy in here. Apparently Hina appeared when a few of them were scared, making them jump even more… and that cause Yu to hide behind Rudo by accident. Yu apologised while Suzu-kun remarked that it’s rare to see Yu hiding behind someone else other than Hijiri actually~

Both Shiro and “me” were shocked / scared to the point that we were frozen though XD However, Shiro denied that he’s scared and hurried off while saying that this was a boring / lame topic to talk about. (Why are you rushing off Shiro~ Are you sure you’re not scared? XD)

Naoto asked Suzu-kun where is his omelette, but “I” informed Suzu-kun that the kitchen had just ran out of eggs actually. Even though Suzu-kun claimed that “I” didn’t have to apologise since he could still cook without eggs…. but Naoto insisted on his omelette so Suzu-kun decided that he shall head out right now to purchase them. Naoto didn’t want Suzu-kun to go shopping for eggs, claiming that “I” should go since “I” was the culprit who finished all the eggs =w=“ (Woah, Naoto, did you just blame “me” for using something that everyone could use in the agency? o.O) In the end, Suzu-kun proposed to “me” that we shall go together instead, as Naoto whined to him whether he is going to let him starve to death here XD (Naoto,if you would just choose to eat something else other than omelette then probably you won’t starve to death XD Even Suzu-kun dissed him that he won’t get starve to death just waiting for an additional 10 mins XD)

Chapter 2: 大きな拾いもの / The Big “Object” that was Picked Up

Just nice the supermarket had the eggs on sale at 1 pack for 98 yen~ So Suzu-kun was glad that he had made the right choice to come with “me” together, since the eggs were limited to one pack per customer and we managed to get two for two of us~

Along the way, we spotted someone who had collapsed in the middle of the road. Suzu-kun rushed towards the person and upon realising that he seems to be still conscious, he asked him whether he’s hurt. Suzu-kun got scared when the person hugged onto him and said “I’m hungry….” (So… I take it that he’s too hungry to the point he collapse? OWO”) Suzu-kun decided to bring this unknown person back to the detective agency, since he can’t bear to leave him behind unattended like this.

(It’s funny how Suzu-kun was kind of relieved that the unknown person was quite small sized, since at least he could still carry the person back via piggy back~ XD)

Naoto was displeased when Suzu-kun arrived home with the unknown person, asking him what he had picked up and they can’t rear him. (Why is he referring him like a pet dog or something ^^;?) Hina was very interested in the new person, that he wanted to dissect it but Suzu-kun quickly stopped him from doing that as the person was still alive OAO” Suzu-kun decided to make some food for the unknown person while letting him sleep for awhile, and of course, he would make Naoto’ share as well ^^

The unknown person woke up and rushed into the kitchen just as Suzu-kun has just finished making the omelette. He assured the new guy that there’s still some more and asked him to eat up. Naoto got jealous that Suzu-kun had actually drew a picture of a dog on the omelette for the new guy with ketchup whereas his doesn’t have any. Suzu-kun reminded him that it was Naoto who requested that he doesn’t want any ketchup on his omelette =w=“

(Look at Naoto claiming that he’s not jealous of the new guy, he just want a fair treatment between the two of them XD I especially like Suzu-kun’s expression here XDD)

In the end, Suzu-kun told him that he would draw on the omelette with ketchup if Naoto asked for a 2nd helping later on~

The new guy finally spoke up, complimenting that the vegetables were really delicious since the ones he usually eats were disgusting. Suzu-kun was all proud as he told him that they were special dressing made by him, so that Naoto will eat the vegetables. (I guess Naoto is a picky eater ^^;)

Suzu-kun asked the new guy why was he out on the road at night, wondering if he was lost. However, the new guy answered that he was actually looking for his younger brother, and had lost his strength when he decided to head home. (He really wait until he has like 1 HP left though =w=“…) The new guy said that his brother - Ru, was small that it was hard to find him, that Naoto actually dissed whether the missing brother was a mouse =w=“ (He’s definitely not THAT small, Naoto ^^;)

They asked the new guy to provide more information about his brother, but what they could get were very vague details like he has large eyes and he’s really smart. He even emphasized that his brother was really smart like a genius when he’s an idiot himself… (Erm, you don’t have to diss youself like that just to praise your brother… ^^;)

The new guy finished his meal, and Suzu-kun was glad that he enjoyed it so much, saying that it’ll be good if Naoto had ate the same as him. Naoto asked Suzu-kun whether he was joking, since the new guy actually ate 5 omelettes and 10 bread altogether… (and there’s no way Naoto could eat that much XD)

The new guy thanked them for the meal, and told them that if they need any help, they could call for him as gratitude to them. He headed off since he might get scolded if he stayed out for too long (scolded by… who?). Suzu-kun said he would clean up after that, and asked “me” to head back to my bedroom first. (Aww, I wanted to help him clean up though =3=“)

Chapter 3: 亡靈の奥さん / The Wife of the Dead Spirit

On another day, the detective agency had a visitor. It was an old lady who was crying, so Kaname, being a gentleman, handed her a handkerchief while he comforted her. Sousuke was clueless on what he should do at this time so he asked Rudo for suggestions. He wanted to go for a run but knew that it won’t help her at all. Looking at his class members, Sousuke asked them if they had wanted to give a hand to help the poor lady to stop crying, but Kotetsu couldn’t do anything as he stood faraway. (Ahhh… his phobia for females had act up again D:)

Finally, it’s still down to Kaname who managed to make the old lady smile again. She calmed herself down to start recounting. Her husband hasn’t returned since a month ago, and since then she felt unease about it everyday, till she heard that there’s a good detective agency here and thus decided to come here. She described her husband as someone who is really hardworking and works at a bank, and has never stayed outside overnight. He just disappeared on a night a month ago without leaving any messages or hints.

The members made several guessed on what kind of scenario that might cause him to disappear. Did he ran away from home? Or is it because of a woman?(Why are you suggesting that he has a third party, Kotaro? =///=“)

Chapter 4: 行動開始 / Operation Start

After the old lady left, Sousuke remarked that thank goodness she stopped crying in the end. (If not they won’t be able to get any information from her at all =w=“) They praised Kaname, but he showed a weak smile and said that it’s his duty since he’s a man afterall.(Aww, Kaname is such a gentleman~) Rudo commented that the missing husband’s seems to be similar to the other cases of the missing people, as he had been spotted at the same place as the others before they disappeared. Sousuke guessed that perhaps they were all ghosts but Kotaro said that’s a deduction without any evidence or logic ^^; (Guess Kotaro really doesn’t believe in ghosts at all ^^;)

Kaname was interested in the fact that the husband actually came from quite a rich family. The husband actually had a yearly income of 30 million yen (woah, that’s around 250+K USD… OAO), so the police initially suspected that he might be kidnapped because of his money. (But since there’s no phone call from kidnappers so… ^^;)

Rudo decided that they should start by investigating about his social circles first, to check if there’s anyone suspicious. Kuki and Tsubasa appeared, handing over a list of people to be investigate and a map where the missing husband was around on the night before he disappeared. Kuki announced that Class 7 is going to team up with Class 3 for the investigations, and that includes “me” too, being their assistant. Obviously Kotetsu got a shock knowing about it that Kuki had to assure him not to worry since “I’ll” be pairing with Shiro instead. Shiro isn’t happy about this arrangement as he complained that why does he has to pair up with a “baggage” like “me”. (That’s mean, Shiro TWT TWT)

Kuki didn’t like how he himself always seems to pair up with Shiro recently, and if Shiro pairs up with Tsubasa the two of them will end up bickering instead. (I don’t remember Tsubasa quarreling with Shiro though, it seems more like Shiro getting angry by himself ^^;) For the sake of preventing Shiro from going on a rampage and also for “me” to gain some experience, Kuki thought that arrangement would help to achieve these two goals together.

In the end, Kuki even had to use his “class leader’s rule” just so Shiro would listen to his instruction. Shiro didn’t like that and grumbled that Kuki is “acting as a class leader” only at this time, which Tsubasa corrected him that he’s not “acting at this time”, he’s always “acting as the classleader”…. Kuki really wonders whether Tsubasa was helping him when he gave such a statement though ^^;

Rudo announced that he would continue to gather more information and would also give instructions to the rest of the class members on what to do next. He instructed Kuki and Tsubasa to investigate about the old lady who had asked them to investigate the case, and that made Kaname mad since he doesn’t like the fact that Rudo was actually suspecting her. Kotaro gave out a reasonable possibility, even if she was crying so pitifully just now, they can’t rule out the possibility that she might be acting. Sousuke didn’t thought of that at all, so Kotaro dissed him that it seems that even his brain is only full of muscles, but that seems to be dodged by Sousuke as he wasn’t affected by it all ^^;

Rudo instructed Kotaro and Sousuke to investigate on the people who were related to the missing husband, handling them the list of people which Kuki had brought just now. Kaname and Kotetsu were given the same task too, so Kaname encouraged Kotetsu to buck up and work hard, even if the person they investigate might be a female ^^; (How can this guy work if there’s a possibility that he would need to investigate or interact with females?… =w=“)

Chapter 5: あべこべコンビ / Vice Versa Combi

“I’ accompanied Shiro to the train station and he was pissed that “I” had no idea how to tail someone. He decided to teach “me” how to do it, though he warned “me” that he shall only teach “me” once. He explained that one would need to “blend” into the background when tailing someone, and scolded “me” being an idiot when “I” thought it meant blending into the ground. He continued that other than people who already suspected that someone’s monitoring them, usually people don’t take much notice of their surroundings. He warned “me” not to follow someone like hiding behind the lamp post and staring at the person “I’m” tailing, saying that such an attitude from “me” even made him being thought as suspicious since we’re together ^^;

He explained that even though it will be hard to lose track of the person if you’re monitoring / tailing her really closely, it would also be easy to get suspected and discovered by the person easily. “I” thanked Shiro for his lesson but that only triggered his “tsundere” side as he claimed that he’s not teaching “me” specially ^^;

On the other hand, Kotaro and Sousuke had taken a wrong route. They were tailing a bank worker to work and it seems that the person seems to like walking routes that aren’t really routes, like cutting through people’s garden, that Kotaro complained that it seems more like an obstacle race instead ^^;

Sousuke noticed “me” and Shiro and decided to wave to us while Kotaru noticed that we were actually in the midst of tailing someone ^^;(So in a way, Sousuke is interrupting us…?) Sosuke realised that he had made a mistake, but since he had already waved, he decided to just head towards us and talk to us instead ^^; (Since the person we’re tailing has headed into a coffee shop anyway)

Shiro knew that they had just came over to help cover up the fact that we’re tailing someone, so as to make us seems less suspicious in a way. “I” commented that both Kotaro and Sousuke seems to be getting along well together, that Shiro really wonder how did “I” see their relationship that way XD (Since from the outside, one won’t really think that way as both Kotaro and Sousuke were opposites of each other ^^;)

After Kotaru and Sousuke had left, Shiro noticed that the person seems to be heading somewhere in her lunch hour, and wondered where on earth is she heading towards…(Let’s tail~!)

Chapter 6: たどり著いた先 / The Place that was Arrived

Kotaro and Sousuke walked along the residential area, as Sousuke handed Kotaro a cup of coffee that he had commented on wanting to get earlier. However, Kotaro said that he had talked about it as part of a make-up conversation just now and told Sousuke to drink it himself instead ^^; Sousuke still forced him to take it in the end though =w=“ He felt weird being the person who stood in the middle of the road while drinking a bottle of coffee milk… (So Sousuke didn’ even bought coffee in the end, it’s just coffee flavoured milk =w=“)

Shiro and “I” started tailing behind the person as she walked down the streets, as Shiro wondered where on earth is she heading to during her lunch hour. Even when we were quite a huge distance away from the lady, Shiro was confident that he won’t lose track of her since he had his good sense of smell ^^: (They could still track down the person through scent even if they can’t see her anymore XD)

Shiro remarked that the lady had a really strong perfume smell that it was easy to trace as a marking. He found it pungent though and claimed that he’s not being rude and just saying the truth anyway, since at least he knew better than to say it in front of the lady herself. (If he really did that, it’s going to burn pretty bad =w=“…)

Just then, the lady seems to noticed that she was being followed by us, and started to run away in a hurry. We started chasing after her while Shiro told “me” to hand over the map that Kuki had sent to us to “my” phone. Looking at the map, Shiro realised that the path on the right would lead to the person exiting on the left, but he still decided to follow the lady down the path instead of waiting for her on the outside.

We chased her until we reached a dark alley, and Shiro found a door over there. He asked “me” to take a photo of the area, and deduced that the lady must have headed inside the building through the door, wondering that she might have a key to unlock it.

Suddenly, we were surrounded by a group of men, who decided to capture “me” instead and leave Shiro there instead. (Why just “me” though? TWT) Shiro get pissed by what the men were talking about among themselves, and asked them to get away from “me”. (That seems quite a doki doki moment actually >///<)

One of the men remarked that females, unlike males, have a use for them. He decided to use “me” as a product. (That sounds really creepy from the hidden meaning of it… D:) He took out a gun and tried to shoot at Shiro, who dissed at him that he might end up hurting the “product” this way. However, Shiro was knocked out in the end, and the men decided to capture him too since there’s a possibility that Shiro might knew something that they didn’t want him to know actually. And thus, both of us gets captured and taken away…

Chapter 7: 暗い部屋 / Dark Room

Shiro and “I” were captured and taken to a jail cell, and when he awakes, “I” apologised to him, but that only made Shiro confused on why am “I” apologising. He claimed that he’s not shielding “me” specially just now (guess he tried to protect “me” just now T///T), and that it just happens to seems that way. (Shiro… your explanation… just doesn’t really make sense =w=“) He assured “me” that he would treat his injury later on and asked “me” not to get so bothered about it. (Is it me or somehow Shiro seems alot nicer than initially? ^///^)

(At one point, Shiro seems to get worried about “me”, but flustered later on and claimed that he’s NOT worrying about me XD Keep trying to deny it, Shiro… ^///^)

Shiro explained that he had a feeling that Kuki would definitely nagged on him alot if anything would to happen to “me”, so it’s why he’s protective of “me” at that time ^^; Shiro realised that nobody has even came to the cell even when they’re talking like this, and wondered that perhaps there isn’t any guards around. He was fed up when he thought that we would just have to wait until our help has arrived, since there’s also a possibility that the enemy would arrive first before our help does TWT He started to ponder what we should do by ourselves first, but upon looking at “my” worried face, he asked “me” to stop worry about him instead and worry about “myself” first ^^;

In the end, he made a promise with “me” that he would definitely escape with “me” when we get out of this place. (Yeah, “I” won’t feel good if “I” have to abandon Shiro here TWT…)

“I” told Shiro that “I’ve” noticed that the men were all wearing hoods with weird dog ears under it, that Shiro realised that those people might be after “me” because “I’ve” picked up the pin badge. (From episode 2) “I” tried to deny it but Shiro said that it was just a possibility but we should not ignore it anyway. Since there’s no guards around who came to us even when we’re talking, Shiro said the time that we could make a break through is only when someone comes to us in the end. (Which means… we’ll have to wait…? OWO”)

Just then, Shiro heard that there’s are sounds of someone, and deduced that there’s someone nearby on the same floor as us, even though it seems far away. He guessed that they maybe people who were captured like us or someone who has unknown motives. Upon listening to it even more carefully, Shiro realised that these are sounds from a casino, as these were sounds made by the slot and card machines. He realised that there seems to be a hidden casino that were unknown to the public.

Shiro asked “me” to turn around as he untied “me”, and when “I” asked him how is he going to do it, he answered matter-of-factly that he’s just going to bite the ropes off OAO” He explained that some of the descendants from the “Kenrouzoku” have well-developed teeth, and one of them is Shiro, so he could bite through these types of ropes as long as they’re not too thick. He assured “me” that he won’t bite “my” hands though and asked “me” to just turn around XD

Shiro had just managed to untie “me” when he heard footsteps approaching our cell. He asked “me” to put “my” hands behind “me” and pretended that “I” was still tied up. “I” seems to be worried that Shiro is going to ask “me” to run away first but he assured “me” that he would definitely keep his promise and escape together. (Aww~)

Listening closely to the approaching footsteps, Shiro guessed that there’s around 3 people approaching us. However, the 3 people aren’t our enemies, but instead our comrades from Class 3~! Kaname held out a hand to “me”, asking “me” whether “I’m” injured. He admitted that he had worried for “me” when he had heard that “I” was captured by the enemy, that he had felt that his heart was going to stop… >///<

Shiro was relieved that our comrades had finally discovered that we were being captured. Kaname explained that this was because Kotaro and Sousuke were walking around in the same area and realised later on that we seems to be missing. Rudo continued that when they waited for our scheduled call and it didn’t came, they knew that something was definitely off and started to search for us by then. And that’s how they managed to locate us~ ^^

Chapter 8: 脫出 / Escape

Kotetsu appeared and informed Rudo that he had found an unknown person being captured underground. Since both Kotaro and Sosuke were handling things up there at the casino, Rudo decided to go up there and helped them. He instructed Kaname to lead Shiro and helped the person that was trapped below this level… and that left with Kotetsu and “me”. Kotetsu was flustered because of his allergy to female, and while Rudo would want to bring “me” along with him, he knew that it would get dangerous upstairs and didn’t want to do that.

In the end, Kotetsu decided to bear with it, asking “me” to grab hold of his hand as he brought “me” to the detective agency. (Aww~ Even though when he did that, he gets goosebumps all over him, he asked “me” not to worry about it ^///^)

Kaname and Shiro headed to the cell the unknown person was locked in and managed to lead him to safety, as Kaname calmed him down with his words. When Rudo had went upstairs, Kotaro informed him that the guests had escaped from the casino, and the staff denied to reveal any names about them. Sosuke appeared and alerted them that the staff had brought some help (more men) and thus Rudo thought that it’s best that they escaped from the situation now.

Back at the detective agency, Leo asked Shiro whether he wanted some recovery juice (the very sour lemon juice) and informed him that “I’ve” came back safe and sound by Kotetsu’s help. He also told him that Rudo they all were interviewing the missing husband (seems like the unknown person locked up in the cell was actually the missing husband), and asked him whether he would want to take a look at the situation.

In the meeting room, Rudo, Kaname and Kotetsu were trying to get more information from the missing husband on regarding how he had managed to get himself locked up in there. Kotaro and Sosuke had gotten some minor injuries and thus treating them in a different room.

The man revealed that he was being approached by someone to join the hidden casino, and the hidden casino was one where larger bets were being made and were suitable for people who were very rich and had lots of money. The man actually goes to the normal casino everyday after work, and this was a secret that he had not told his wife about, and was later invited to go to a “more thrilling” casino - the hidden casino not known to the public. Rudo deduced that it must be an illegal casino, since the amount of bets were larger than what was allowed by law.

The man continued by saying that though he had won initially, he started losing consecutively after that. And before he knew it, he had landed himself in debts. Rudo wondered why he had not asked his wife for help in repaying the debt since his wife’s family was actually quite rich, and Kaname had felt that it maybe abit too much that the man was thrown into prison and captured like this just because he had landed himself in debt. Upon noticing the expression on the man’s face, Rudo guessed that he had more that he had wanted to say.

Chapter 9: 迷の組織 / The Mysterious Group

The man revealed that he had heard a name, but he had no idea whether him overhearing about this name had much to do with why he was being locked up. The name he had overheard was called “Beto”, and Kaname commented that he had never heard of this name, wondering whether it was a person’s name. The man said that rather than a person’s name, he had felt that they were referring to a group or a guild instead actually. Kotetsu said that they had only managed to locate this missing man and their missing comrades (Shiro and “me”) at the underground prison, so the other missing people were still missing. Kaname tried to assure the man that perhaps it’s just the other people had stopped coming to the casino (but from his expressions, it doesn’t seems so though…)

After the man left, the three of them continued their discussion as Kaname pondered whether the illegal casino was operated by a company in the background. He also wondered why by just overhearing the group’s name was enough to land the man in prison. Kotetsu guessed that if the other people had also been through the same scenario, they would have been captured too, but there’s no sight of them. The case came to a standstill yet again, though Rudo tried to encourage them that the enemy would definitely commit a mistake in the end, and that would be their chance. However, since they guessed that the enemy seems to have a large number of man, they decided that it’s best the whole agency regroups in the morning and head towards the illegal casino.

Kaname decided to send “me” back to “my” room, since “I’ve” been through quite a hectic day, but Kotetsu started to diss him saying that “my” room is actually just downstairs. Even so, Kaname had his own ideals and claimed that it’s a must to escort the “princess” (Woah! Somehow I’ve become a princess? +W+), and he asked Kotetsu whether he wanted to send “me” back instead.

Kotetsu obviously rejected that idea, but assured “me” that it’s not my fault, but more because of him still being unable to interact with females. Kaname thought Kotetsu was alright when he was escorting “me” back to the detective agency, but he admitted that it was not alright as there’s goosebumps all over him when he did that just now. Kaname had thought that Kotetsu would have get used to “me” by now since it has been awhile since “I’ve” arrived at the detective agency, but since he’s not… Kaname thought it’s best that both of them escort “me’ together so as to get Kotetsu used to being with “me” XD (Kaname, I really like how you think about things XD *thumbs up*)

The next morning, Shiro, Kaname, Kotetsu, Rudo and “me” arrived at the hidden casino. However, when they reached there, there was nothing at all at the venue! Even all the tables and chairs which were there a day ago were all gone…

Kaname guessed whether the staff had thought they were the police yesterday and had escaped in the middle of the night as they knew that they might be in danger. Kotetsu asked Rudo what they should do now and suggested to look for guests who had escaped yesterday. Rudo agreed and said that Shiro, “me” and him would look around the venue for more clues before we returned.

Chapter 10: 闇夜の密談 / The Secret Talk at Night

Over at Cyan cafe, Kuki complained to Senri why does he only gets plain water when Shu gets tea instead XD (Look at the double standard that Senri is setting XD) Kuki thought that it’s okay if him and Mashiro had the same treatment of not getting any tea, but Rui who was in the same class as Senri also gets plain water too, so Kuki felt that the most Senri could do was to pour him a cup too. However, it seems that however much Kuki had said was useless, so Kuki decided that he shall just make some coffee for himself instead.

They talked about which company might be operating the illegal casino, and Mashiro piped up that he had a very good idea which company was the one, saying that the company was even a very big and well-known company. However, instead of really operating and managing the casino, Mashiro had felt that the company seems to be just funding it instead. He also mentioned about “Beto”, which was the group that was operating the casino, and asked Shu whether he had heard about it.

Rui also revealed some new information, even though they had no idea who was operating the illegal casino, Rui had done some research on the landowner of the venue, and also the building that led towards the illegal casino, and they deduced that once they managed to track down who the owner is, they’ll be able to reveal who was the culprit.

Mashiro asked Shu whether he should investigate more about this “Beto”. Kuki warned him that they have a fast speed of escaping though, since Shiro had told him that there was nothing left at the venue when they had arrived there earlier on. Senri said that he had received the report and it said that not only the furniture of the casino was gone, even the wallpapers and carpeting of the venue was removed. Mashiro was shocked that even the carpeting was gone since they had found the casino yesterday and the time now was today’s morning… (How is their speed so fast? And they did everything so clean too… even removing the wallpapers and carpeting… OAO”)

Somehow the conversation turned towards them suspecting that there might be a spy among the members at the detective agency. Kuki was mad as he doesn’t believe that there would be a person who would do such a thing among them. Senri said that though he understood Kuki’s feelings of not wanting to suspect anyone, he felt that it was all too suspicious that the group had escaped so fast this time. Shu guessed that the enemy must have knew that they were detectives, which is why they retreated and escaped so fast this time.

Kuki still didn’t want to suspect anyone, while Mashiro suggested to do a background check on all the members in the agency. Rui agreed since if they do not “pluck” out the suspicious seed now, it might become an obstacle in the future for them when they carried out detective work (since the person could be obstructing them again and again). However, Shu felt that it’s too early to get suspicious about anyone, and thus tell Mashiro not to do that for now. Shu had felt that if they started to suspect anyone, as it would cause mistrust among the members and he wanted to avoid that currently. (Good thinking, Shu! It’ll be bad if everyone doesn’t trust each other…)

Chapter 11: 迷多き情報屋 / The Mysterious Informant

The next morning, “I” helped out Leo in washing the dishes, and he felt apologetic about it actually. It was supposed to be Shiro and him doing the dishes today, but it seems that Shiro had not realised it at all, and Leo guessed that he must have forgotten about it, since he believed that Shiro won’t be someone who purposely skipped out on his duties and make it troublesome for others.

(It’s so cute how Leo realised that “I” actually had household duties of washing the clothes today yet “I’m” helping him. He decided to help “me” in washing the clothes together later on~ ^^) It seems that Leo had a new invention that could help in washing clothes so he was actually very willing to help “me” out with it ^^; (Let’s hope his invention works~ *cross fingers*)

Leo also revealed that he’s a part of the “Kenrouzoku” and had really good hearing actually~ He revealed his invention called “The person who could differentiate the clothes!” (I guess it’s machine that could help to split clothes into different colours or something?) However, the machine ran into mishap as it started spinning too fast and ended up being a failure later on… Leo was disappointed but later on he had yet another great idea for an invention. “I” decided to let Leo work on his next invention, which Leo was thankful for, but was kind of unwillingly to go off initially since he knew it would be hard for “me” to dry the remaining the clothes by myself. (It’s okay Leo~ *pats pats*)

At the top of building, “I” saw a new guy which “I’ve” never met before. (But if you have read the earlier episodes, you’ll know that he’s Izana.) He approached “me” and commented that he had deduced correctly that he would definitely be able to meet “me” here. He introduced himself as Amo Izana and he’s part of Class 4 of the detective agency.

Izana expressed that he had a very strong interest in “me” and had wanted to meet “me” much earlier. He asked “me” whether “I’ve” heard about him from other members in the agency. (Why is this guy behaving kind of weird… You seems kind of creepy Izana…=w=“)

Izana was more interested to know more about “me” rather than talking more about himself though. He said that he had come to know that “I” had arrived here at the detective agency as “I” had nowhere to go to, but this was still a detective agency meant for “Kenrouzoku” in the first place. He felt that “I” seems to have gained entry in here abit too easily, and asked “me” a weird question. “Do you know anything about Viidog Code?” (What is this? Why is he asking about the title of the game? OWO”)

However, Izana’s questioning got stopped short when he realised that Shiro had came and found “me” here.

Shiro was shocked to find Izana here, and asked him what on earth is he doing here. Izana gave a weak smile as he remarked that he was just talking with “me” happily over here (I do not think it’s happy at all though =w=“), and Shiro dissed back at him that that’s why he’s asking because he doesn’t sees it that way (High five Shiro!), and hoped that he isn’t trying to brainwash “me” with something that he’s saying.

Izana knew that it’s best for him to leave the conversation, since he guessed that he might get chewed out by Shiro if he stayed here any longer XD

Shiro asked if anything happened to “me” while Izana was gone. He cautioned “me” not to believe Izana easily as this guy doesn’t have a trustworthy reputation around here. (Aww~ Shiro seems really protective of “me” here >///< But why is Izana so not trustable? OWO”)

Chapter 12: 一步一步 / Step by Step

Seems that the reason Shiro had came for “me” was to call “me” to have lunch with them. Upon arriving at the dining room, Shiro complained that why does the whole class had to have their lunch together. However, Kuki dismissed that easily and said that he had been waiting for us so that we could eat together.

Shiro explained that today’s lunch was actually some sort of lunch gathering to commemorate that both Class 7 and Class 3 had managed to close a case. Since Class 3 was joining us for lunch too, the lunch looked even more extravagant than usual. Shiro said that he had initially planned that he won’t eat if “I” had said that “I” won’t be eating but since we’re here, he asked “me” to quickly sit down and eat with them.

Shiro noticed that both Tsubasa and Kuki seems to be giggling among themselves as their shoulders were shaking. Kuki remarked that he was just touched, and Tsubasa helped Kuki to explain that it’s a rare scene since no one had expected that there would be one day where Shiro would gentle to “me”~ ^///^ (No wonder their reactions are like this, I feel flattered too that Shiro is actually treating “me” very gently this time ^^)

That only ended up making Shiro blushed, as he went into his tsundere mode saying that he’s not being gentle XDD (Keep trying to deny that, Shiro~) Kuki scolded Tsubasa that he shouldn’t be so direct since that would made Shiro embarrassed XDD (Look at them teasing Shiro that way XD)

Rudo and Kotaro appeared and commented that Class 7’s members were still in a good relationship with each other as always, but Kotaro remarked that he just only sees Shiro being teased actually XD (or “bullied” actually if you take Kotaro’s words literally ^^;)

Kaname and the others arrived, and he noticed that Kotetsu had maintain a shorter distance away from “me” than usual. Sosuke noticed it too and commented that it was only a metre apart, and this was actually an improvement~! (Yeah~!!) Kuki was impressed that Kotetsu had actually taken steps to get used to getting closer to “me”, and that made Kotetsu quite embarrassed.

Kuki was proud and said he shall let the next newcomer to come to our class next time so that he could rear him up ^^ Even though Shiro complained that he doesn’t want to look after newcomers, Kuki said that he had still taken care of “me” even though “I’ve” created troubles for him ^^; Shiro answered that he just does it because he had no choice XD

Kuki was interested on who might be the one taking care of others in Class 3 since they were always split up into pairs to work together, and made a guess on it might be Sosuke actually. He later guessed that it might Kaname, or maybe even Rudo himself. (Since he was the leader afterall~) Kuki was shocked when Rudo suggested that it was actually Kotetsu, whom Kaname agreed since there’s alot of times which Kotetsu had actually taken care of Kaname as his partner~ ^^ (Glad that these two were getting along well~ XD)

Seeing how united Class 3 seems to be, Kuki said to Tsubasa that they’re going to work hard to be like that. However, Tsubasa was missing when he had turned around, with Shiro commenting that Tsubasa was gone when he had noticed it. Kuki started to feel abit weird that Tsubasa seems to just go off and disappear suddenly at times…

And that’s it for Episode 3~! If Episode 2 focus more on Tsubasa, then Episode 3′s limelight is definitely on Shiro~ Aww~ I like Shiro so much after that, he maybe a tsundere but he’s really quite adorable when he gets embarrassed like this XD Kotetsu is another one, I’m glad that his “allergy” is getting abit better though~

This episode is also one that Class 3 members get to shine abit more, since other than Kotetsu I get to see more of the other members like Rudo, Kaname, Sosuke and Kotaro too~ However, I feel that we still need more scenes about Kotaro though, I felt kind of a pity that I didn’t get to know more about him as much as the other members =w=“

The main mystery is still yet to be solve though we managed to close one sub case of the missing people now~ What exactly is going on with the casino, or say the illegal casino? Who is Beto? And who is the mysterious new guy which Suzu-kun and “me” gets to befriend, is he related to this story? (Since if not why would he appear XD) Hopefully, the next episode would be able to reveal more about it~! +W+

#VIIDOG CODE #main story #summary #translation #otome game #vd:main #vd:translation